CB J12069-1 SpecBook2

02500
02505
02512
02516
02519
02620
02825
Laying and Jointing Buried Pipelines ............................................ 02500-1

Buried Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings ............................................ 02505-1
Disinfection .................................................................................... 02512-1
Leakage Tests ................................................................................. 02516-1
Open Grid Concrete Paving ........................................................... 02519-1
Foundation Drainage ...................................................................... 02620-1
Ornamental Fencing and Gates ...................................................... 02825-1
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
03100
Concrete Formwork........................................................................ 03100-1
03150
Concrete Accessories ..................................................................... 03150-1
03200
Concrete Reinforcement ................................................................. 03200-1
03310
Cast-in-Place Concrete ................................................................... 03310-1
03415
Precast Concrete Hollow Core Slabs ............................................. 03415-1
03600
Grout .............................................................................................. 03600-1
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
04050
Masonry Mortar and Grout ............................................................ 04050-1
04300
Masonry.......................................................................................... 04300-1
04720
Architectural Cast Stone................................................................. 04720-1
DIVISION 5 METALS
05085
Galvanizing .................................................................................... 05085-1
05120
Structural Steel ............................................................................... 05120-1
05500
Metal Fabrications .......................................................................... 05500-1
05510
Metal Stairs .................................................................................... 05510-1
05520
Handrails and Railing ..................................................................... 05520-1
05531
Metal Floor Grating........................................................................ 05531-1
05560
Metal Castings ................................................................................ 05560-1
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100
Rough Carpentry ............................................................................ 06100-1
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210
Building Insulation ......................................................................... 07210-1
07530
Elastic Sheet Roofing ..................................................................... 07530-1
07620
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ...................................................... 07620-1
07631
Gutters and Downspouts ................................................................ 07631-1
07715
Prefabricated Metal Roof Edging ................................................... 07715-1
07840
Firestopping.................................................................................... 07840-1
07900
Joint Sealers.................................................................................... 07900-1
DIVISION 8 DOOR AND WINDOWS
08110
Steel Doors and Frames.................................................................. 08110-1
08710
Finish Hardware ............................................................................. 08710-1
Columbus PS
TOC-2
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09900
Painting........................................................................................... 09900-1
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10210
Metal Louvers ................................................................................ 10210-1
10522
Fire Extinguishers .......................................................................... 10522-1
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11215
Split Case Centrifugal Pump .......................................................... 11215-1
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13201
Aboveground Fuel Oil Storage Tank and Accessories .................. 13201-1
13211
Fuel Purification Unit ..................................................................... 13311-1
13312
Process Controller System ............................................................. 13312-1
13431
Panel Devices and Enclosure Construction .................................... 13431-1
13851
Signaling and Alarm....................................................................... 13851-1
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14620
Trolley-Monorail Systems.............................................................. 14620-1
VOLUME 2 of 2
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15060
Supports and Anchors .................................................................... 15060-1
15072
Vibration Isolation.......................................................................... 15072-1
15075
Mechanical Identification ............................................................... 15075-1
15080
Mechanical Insulation .................................................................... 15080-1
15106
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings ........................................................ 15106-1
15107
Steel Pipe and Fittings .................................................................... 15107-1
15108
Miscellaneous Pipe and Fittings ..................................................... 15108-1
15109
Erecting and Jointing Interior Piping ............................................. 15109-1
15110
Valves ............................................................................................. 15110-1
15122
Pressure Switches ........................................................................... 15122-1
15124
Gauges Pressure and Vacuum ..................................................... 15124-1
15446
Sump Pumps................................................................................... 15446-1
15535
Refrigeration Piping and Specialties .............................................. 15535-1
15670
Condensing Units ........................................................................... 15670-1
15730
Packaged Air Conditioning Units .................................................. 15730-1
15761
Air Coils ......................................................................................... 15761-1
15765
Terminal Heat Transfer Units ........................................................ 15765-1
15810
Ductwork ........................................................................................ 15810-1
15820
Ductwork Accessories .................................................................... 15820-1
15830
Fans ................................................................................................ 15830-1
15850
Air Outlets and Inlets ..................................................................... 15850-1
Columbus PS
TOC-3
15900
15950
HVAC Controls .............................................................................. 15900-1

Testing, Adjusting and Balancing .................................................. 15950-1
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16050
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ......................................... 16050-1
16055
Electrical Requirements for Shop-Assembled Equipment ............. 16055-1
16060
Grounding....................................................................................... 16060-1
16075
Electrical Identification .................................................................. 16075-1
16080
Electrical Testing Requirements .................................................... 16080-1
16085
Short Circuit and Coordination Study ............................................ 16085-1
16121
Wire and Cables 600 Volts and Below ....................................... 16121-1
16122
Medium Voltage Cables ................................................................. 16122-1
16130
Electrical Raceway Systems........................................................... 16130-1
16132
Underground Electrical Distribution System ................................. 16132-1
16140
Wiring Devices............................................................................... 16140-1
16210
Electrical Utility Coordination and Requirements ......................... 16210-1
16220
Electric Motors ............................................................................... 16220-1
16230
Packaged Engine Generator Systems ............................................. 16230-1
16265
Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems ......................................... 16265-1
16266
Adjustable Frequency Drive........................................................... 16266-1
16273
Pad-Mounted Transformers............................................................ 16273-1
16413
Disconnect Circuit Breakers........................................................... 16413-1
16430
480 V Switchgear ........................................................................... 16430-1
16443
Panelboards .................................................................................... 16443-1
16445
Motor Control Centers ................................................................... 16445-1
16460
General Purpose Dry Type Transformers ...................................... 16460-1
16491
Control Components and Devices .................................................. 16491-1
16500
Lighting .......................................................................................... 16500-1
16723
Fiber Optic Cable ........................................................................... 16723-1
16724
Fiber Optic Patch Panels ................................................................ 16724-1
APPENDICES
Appendix A Boring Logs
End of Contents
Columbus PS
TOC-4
SECTION 15060
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing all hanging and supporting devices
of construction shown, specified, or required for pipelines, apparatus, and
equipment other than electrical equipment.
B.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Section 05120 - Structural Steel

Section 05560 - Metal Castings
Section 15106 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
Section 15107 - Steel Pipe and Fittings
Section 15109 - Erecting and Jointing "Interior Piping"
REFERENCES
A.
Codes and standards referred to in this Section are:

1.
ASME B16.1 -
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25,

125, 250, 800
2.
ASME B31.1 -
Power Piping (Includes Revision Service)
3.
ASTM A 307 -
Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000

PSI Tensile Strength
4.
MSS SP-58
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and

Manufacture
5.
MSS SP-69
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
6.
MSS SP-89
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation

Practices
7.
MSS SP-90
Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports
Columbus PS
15060-1
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division

1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to show the quantity, type, design and
location of all supports, hangers and anchors required.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General: System includes supporting devices adequate to maintain the pipelines,

apparatus, and equipment in proper position and alignment under all operating and
testing conditions with due allowance for expansion and contraction.
B.
Design Requirements: Design supporting devices in accordance with the best

practice and provide supporting devices that are not unnecessarily heavy. Design
supporting devices to accommodate loads imposed during leakage tests for the test
pressures specified. Base the required strength of supporting devices on the
combined weight of the piping and connected equipment, the weight of the denser
of the fluids used in operations or testing and the weight of insulation where
applicable. Install supports with a working safety factor of not less than 5, and
conform installation to requirements of Section 05120.
C.
Provide springs where necessary. Make hangers and supports of standard design
where possible and best suited for the service required. Include proper pipe
protection saddles for hangers and supports on pipes which are covered with
insulation. Where required, make supports screw adjustable after installation
unless approved otherwise.
D.
Interference: Design all supporting devices so as to minimize interference with

access and movement. Eliminate the potential for injuries due to protruding
supporting devices.
E.
Sizing: Provide base piping support, hanger rod size, brackets and spacing
meeting the requirements of ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, SP-69, SP-89 and SP-90
except as modified herein.
1.
Columbus PS
Modify hangers for plastic pipes to increase the bearing area by inserting a
protective sleeve of medium-gauge aluminum sheet metal between the pipe
and the hanger.
a.
Align hangers such that no sharp edges come in contact with the pipe.
b.
Provide a wooden or thermoplastic pad between the plastic pipe and

any concrete or masonry surface.
15060-2
c.
1.5
Use supports for vertical lines of a type which do not exert a

compressive strain on the pipe. Riser-type clamps that squeeze the
pipe will not be permitted.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are listed below. Other manufacturers of equivalent

products may be submitted.
1.
Pipe hangers and supports

a.
b.
2.
Sheet metal shield

a.
2.2
Grinnell Corporation, Cranston, RI

Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc., Cleveland, OH
"Thermal-Hanger Shields" by Pipe Shields Incorporated, Vacaville,

CA
MATERIALS
A.
Use structural and miscellaneous steel, metal castings, ductile iron pipe and
fittings, steel pipe and fittings, and supports meeting the requirements of Sections
05120.
B.
Support overhead hangers using threaded rods properly fastened in place by

suitable screws, clamps, inserts, or bolts, or by welding. Subject hangers to tensile
loading only. Where lateral or axial movement may occur, provide suitable
linkage to permit sway.
C.
Suspended Piping: Support suspended piping by adjustable ring or clevis hangers

and threaded rods from heavy duty concrete inserts or other fastening devices,
except as otherwise specified or noted.
D.
Brackets: Make brackets of welded steel and designed for the following load
classifications.
Columbus PS
15060-3
E.
Load Classification
Maximum Load
per Bracket
Light
750 pounds
Medium
1,500 pounds
Heavy
3,000 pounds
1.
When medium or heavy brackets are bolted to vertical surfaces, furnish and
install backplates of adequate size and thickness to distribute the load
against the vertical surfaces.
2.
When the use of backplates is not practicable, fasten the brackets to the
vertical surfaces in such a manner that the safe bearing strength of the
vertical surfaces will not be exceeded.
Saddle Stands: Use adjustable saddle stands.

1.
Provide each stand with a length of steel pipe fitted at the base with standard
threaded cast-iron flange or steel base plate and at the top with an adjustable
saddle or roll. Bolt the base flange or plate to the floor, foundation or
concrete base.
2.
Use stanchions of construction similar to the saddle stand, except fit them at
the top with cast-iron pipe saddle supports or with pipe stanchion saddles
with yokes and nuts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Install hanger and supports in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1 and
Section 15109.
PAINTING
A.
Painting: Paint hangers, supports, anchors, and similar devices as specified in

Section 09900.
B.
Touch-Up Painting: Clean and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted

connections and abraded areas as specified in Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15060-4
SECTION 15072
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for furnishing and installation of vibration

isolators for mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork and all other
appurtenances for a complete installation.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Section 15670 - Condensing Units

Section 15730 - Packaged Air Conditioning Units
Section 15761 - Air Coils
Section 15810 - Ductwork
Section 15830 - Fans
Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
REFERENCES
A.

1.
2.
1.3
ASTM A 36/A36M - Specification for Structural Steel

NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing structural design and details of
vibration isolators.
1.
Furnish templates to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations and other

support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with
the supported equipment.
2.
Submit shop drawings indicating locations of units and flexible connections.

Include support isolation points for piping and ductwork including risers and
air housings.
Columbus PS
15072-1
1.4
3.
Include a schedule of the units, showing size or manufacturers part number,

and weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit.
4.
Submit catalog data for each type of vibration isolation including materials,
dimensions, application, and performance characteristics.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by

specialized manufacturer and as follows:
1.
Obtain support isolation units from a single manufacturer if available.
2.
Engage the manufacturer to provide technical selection and supervision of

installation of support isolation units.
Performance: Comply with the minimum static deflections recommended by the

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,
including definitions of critical and noncritical locations, for selection and
application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Vibration Isolators.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Flexible Duct Connectors.

a.
b.
c.
3.
Vent Products Co. Inc.

Ventfabrics Inc.
Holtz Rubber Co.
Flexible Pipe Connectors.

a.
b.
Columbus PS
Consolidated Kinetics Corp.

Korfund Dynamics Corp.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.
Flow Flex Engr. Co.

Flexonic Inc.
15072-2
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Metraflex Co. Inc.

Holtz Rubber Co.
Mercer Rubber Co.
PAD-TYPE ISOLATORS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide a manufacturers standard padtype isolation unit, one of the following types, color coded to indicate load
capacity:
1.
B.
2.3
Neoprene pads.
Neoprene Pads: Use oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of the manufacturers standard

hardness and cross-ribbed pattern, designed for neoprene-in-shear-type vibration
isolation, and of the thickness required.
SPRING ISOLATORS
A.
Spring Isolators, Free-Standing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration

isolation springs between top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type
isolators bonded to the bottom of the bottom loading plate. Include studs or cups
to provide for centering of the springs on the plates. Include leveling bolts with
lock nuts and washers, centered in the top plate, arranged for leveling and
anchoring the supported equipment. Include holes in the bottom plate for bolting
the unit to the substrate.
B.
Vibration Isolation Springs: Use wound-steel compression springs, of highstrength, heat-treated, spring alloy steel, with an outside diameter of not less than
0.8 times the operating height, with a lateral stiffness not less than vertical
stiffness, and designed to reach solid height before exceeding the rated fatigue
point of the steel.
2.4
BASES AND FRAMES

A.
Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are required for use
with isolator units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment),
provide welded units, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars
complying with ASTM A 36/A36M, as shown. Provide welded support brackets
at points as required, and anchor the base to spring isolator units. Except as
otherwise indicated, arrange brackets to result in the lowest possible mounting
height for the equipment. Provide bolt holes in bases to match mounting anchor
bolt holes in the equipment. Fabricate the bases with the depth of the structure not
less than 0.10 times the longest span of the base, rigidly braced to support the
equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to the
equipment or equipment performance.
Columbus PS
15072-3
2.5
HANGERS AND RISERS

A.
Isolation Hangers: Provide hanger units formed with brackets and including the
manufacturers standard compression isolators of the type indicated. Design
brackets for 5 times the rated loading of units. Fabricate units to accept
misalignment of suspension members, and for use with either rod or strap type
members, including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.
1.
Provide a vibration isolation spring with a cap and pad-type isolators,

securely retained in the unit.
2.
Provide a neoprene pad, securely retained in the unit.
3.
Provide a fiberglass pad or shape, securely retained in the unit, with a

threaded metal top plate.
4.
Install a removable spacer in each unit, to limit the deflection during

installation to the rated-load deflection.
B.
Riser Isolators: Provide the manufacturers standard pad-type isolator bonded to

steel plates, formed for welding to the pipe sleeve extension.
C.
Riser Support Isolators: Provide the manufacturers standard pad-type isolator

laminated between 2 formed steel plate members, one for welding to the pipe
sleeve extension and other for welding to the pipe riser.
2.6
DUCT AND PIPE CONNECTORS

A.
Flexible Duct Connectors: Provide laminated flexible sheets of cotton duct and
sheet elastomer (butyl, neoprene or vinyl), reinforced with steel wire mesh where
required for strength to withstand the duct pressure indicated. Form connectors
with full-faced flanges and accordion bellows to perform as a flexible isolation
unit, and of the manufacturers standard length for each size unless otherwise
indicated. Equip each unit with galvanized steel retaining rings for airtight
connections with ductwork. Provide products approved by the NFPA for vibration
isolation connectors in duct systems as approved by NFPA Bulletin 90A.
1.
Columbus PS
Provide U-type configurations, asbestos free of 2 ply, vulcanized EPDM

elastomer fabric flexible connectors, with a 6-inch minimum width, and
molded flanges and corners. Design the flexible connectors for no less than
2 psi, temperature no greater than 250 degrees F, and to accept the system
movements without imposing any significant forces on the ductwork.
Provide flexible connectors resistant to all chemicals and reaction
byproducts they are exposed to. Use shop painted retaining bars to back up
flanges.
15072-4
B.
Flexible Pipe Connectors: For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered
with stainless steel wired braid with NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges,
welded to the hose.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Apply types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at

locations shown or otherwise required. Selection is at the CONTRACTORs
option where more than one type is indicated.
B.
Pad-Type Isolators: Install pad-type isolators at the following equipment:

1.
C.
Equipment Bases and Spring Isolators: Install equipment bases and spring
isolators where the following floor-mounted equipment is indicated:
1.
D.
E.
Condensing Units
Isolation Hangers and Spring Isolators: Install isolation hangers and spring
isolators where the following suspended equipment is indicated.
1.
Packaged air conditioning units.
2.
Ductwork located in mechanical equipment rooms, and each run connected

to vibration-isolation-mounted equipment for a distance of 100 diameters
but not less than 50 feet.
3.
Ductwork, where air velocity is 3000 fpm or greater.
Flexible Duct Connectors:

ductwork connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Condensing Units
Install flexible duct connectors at the following
Connections with air handling equipment.

Connections with all fans.
Building expansion joints.
Motorized equipment.
Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install flexible pipe connectors in piping systems at the
following locations:
1.
Columbus PS
Condensers/condensing units refrigerant pipes.
15072-5
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the manufacturers

instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and
units. Make adjustment so that the units do not exceed the rated operating
deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other
contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for
temporary protection against overloading during installation.
B.
Other Requirements: Meet the following installation requirements.
3.3
1.
Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for a secure
operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
2.
Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute this loading uniformly onto

isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to
distribute loading properly.
3.
Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.
4.
Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from

loading and operations.
5.
Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide

airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage.
6.
Install flexible pipe connectors on the equipment side of shutoff valves,

horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.
EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK

A.
Coordination: Examine the installation of equipment, piping, ducts and conduits

related to vibration isolation, including items connected to vibration isolators, and
after completion of other related work but before equipment startup, furnish a
written report listing any observed inadequacies for proper operation and
performance of the vibration isolators. Have the report cover, but not necessarily
be limited to the following:
1.
Equipment installations on vibration isolators.
2.
Piping connections including flexible connections.
3.
Ductwork connections including provisions for flexible connections.
4.
Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and

floors.
Columbus PS
15072-6
B.
Equipment Start-Up: Do not start-up equipment until inadequacies have been

corrected in an acceptable manner.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15072-7
(NO TEXT FOR THIS PAGE)
Columbus PS
15072-8
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for furnishing and installing identification

materials and devices for the mechanical systems.
B.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes, but is not limited to, the
Following:
1.
1.2
Section 09900 - Painting
REFERENCES
A.

1.
1.3
ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data: Submit the manufacturer's technical product data and installation
instructions for each identification material and device required.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in the appropriate

operation and maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide the specified items from firms regularly

engaged in the manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Columbus PS
15075-1
1.
Identification Materials
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Allen Systems, Inc.

Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Provide the manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for
each application as referenced in other Division-15 sections. Where more than a
single type is specified for an application, selection is at the CONTRACTOR's
option, but provide a single selection for each product category. Comply with
ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color fields, colors and viewing angles of
identification devices.
PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A.
Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide the manufacturer's standard pre- printed,

permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers,
complying with ASME A13.1.
B.
Insulation: Furnish 1-inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each
plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid
temperatures of 125 degrees F or greater. Cut the insulation length to extend 2
inches beyond each end of the plastic pipe markers.
C.
Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 inches including insulation if any,
provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around the pipe at each
location, fastened by one of the following methods:
D.
1.
Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.
2.
Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation.
3.
Taped to the pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not
less than 3/4 inches wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped
1-1/2 inches.
Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6 inches and larger, provide either fullband or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times the letter height,
fastened by one of the following methods:
1.
Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe.
2.
Taped to the pipe with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2
inches wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3 inches.
Columbus PS
15075-2
3.
E.
Lettering: Comply with the piping system lettering nomenclature as specified,

scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.
1.
2.4
Strapped-to-pipe application of semi-rigid type, with the manufacturer's

standard stainless steel bands.
Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating the direction of flow,
either integrally with the piping system service lettering, or as a separate unit
of plastic.
PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS

A.
B.
C.
2.5
General: Provide the manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded

equipment markers conforming to the following color code:
1.
Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2.
Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3.
Yellow/Green:
components.
4.
Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria.
Combination cooling and heating equipment and
Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as

closely as possible:
1.
Name and drawing number
2.
Equipment service
3.
Design capacity
4.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving

conditions, rpm, etc.
Size: Provide approximate 2-1/2-inch x 4-inch markers for control devices,

dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2-inch x 6-inch for equipment.
LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A.
General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in

mechanical identification Work, with corresponding designations shown, specified
or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, as recommended by the manufacturers or as required for
Columbus PS
15075-3
proper identification, operation and maintenance of mechanical systems and

equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for

identification materials.
1.
3.2
Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil painting.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install identification markers in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1.
B.
Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting

or other covering or finish, install the identification after completion of the
covering and painting.
3.3
PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A.
General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system and
include arrows to show normal direction of flow:
1.
Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and

contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend the color band or rectangle 2
inches beyond ends of lettering.
2.
Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous

color-coded painting of piping is provided.
B.
Color Coding: Continuously paint and color code all exposed piping to allow for
quick identification. Paint each piping system a different color as selected and
approved.
C.
Identifier Location: Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever
piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible
maintenance spaces and exterior nonconcealed locations.
3.4
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A.
General: Install engraved plastic laminate signs on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment.
Columbus PS
15075-4
B.
Lettering Size: Use a minimum 1/4 inch high lettering for name of unit where
viewing distance is less than 2 feet 0 inches, 1/2-inch high for distances up to 6
feet 0 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide
secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of the size of the principal lettering.
C.
Text of Signs: In addition to the name of the identified unit, provide lettering to
distinguish between multiple units, inform the operator of operational
requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and
improper operations.
3.5
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.
Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become

visually blocked by the Work of this division or other divisions.
B.
Cleaning: Clean the face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve
charts.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15075-5
Columbus PS
15075-6
SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Mechanical insulation for piping.
B.

1.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ASTM C 195 -
Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement
2.
ASTM C 533 -
Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
3.
ASTM C 552 -
Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
4.
ASTM C 553 -
Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation
5.
ASTM C 547 -
Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation
6.
ASTM C 612 -
Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
7.
ASTM C 921 -
Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing

Materials for Thermal Insulation
8.
ASTM E 84 -
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
9.
NFPA 255 -
10.
UL 723 -
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
Columbus PS
15080-1
B.
Product Data: Submit the manufacturers technical product data, insulation

materials, fire ratings, material safety data sheets and installation instructions for
each type of mechanical insulation. Submit a schedule showing the manufacturers
product number, k-value, thickness, density, and furnished accessories for each
mechanical system requiring insulation.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for
each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in the
maintenance manual.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Provide insulation from firms regularly engaged in

manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of the types and sizes required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5
years.
B.
Installers Qualifications: Use firm with at least 5 years successful installation

experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this
project.
C.
Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation,

jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25
or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 method.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
General: Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in
Division 1.
B.
Labeling: Deliver the insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to

the site in containers with the manufacturers stamp or label, affixed showing the
fire hazard indexes of products.
C.
Protection: Protect the insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical
damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation and remove damaged materials
from the project site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
General: Acceptable manufacturers are listed below. Other manufacturers of

equivalent products may be submitted.
Columbus PS
15080-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.2
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

Babcock and Wilcox; Insulating Products Div.
Certainteed Corp.
Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
Manville Products Corp.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
Rubatex Corp.
IMCOA (Refrigerant Piping)
Pipe Shields Inc. Thermal-Hanger Shields
MATERIALS
A.
Piping Insulation: Provide fiberglass piping insulation meeting ASTM C 547,

Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Cold Pipe Insulation: Provide heavy duty bonded fibrous glass sectional
pipe insulation with a thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.26 BTU per
hour per square foot per degree F per inch thickness at 50 degrees F mean
temperature.
2.
Jackets for Piping Insulation: Provide jackets meeting the requirements of

ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, and Type
II for piping with temperatures above ambient.
a.
Encase pipe fitting insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting

covers, fastened as per the manufacturers recommendations.
b.
Encase exterior piping insulation with an aluminum jacket which is of

weather-proof construction.
3.
Refrigerant Pipe Insulation: Provide refrigerant pipe insulation of the

waterproof closed cell type with a zero water vapor transmission rate,
temperature range of -10 degrees F to +200 degrees F and which do not
contain corrosive constituents associated with stress corrosion failure of
copper tube. Provide insulation which have excellent resistance to
chemicals, ozone and solvents. Provide seam joining to be moisture proof
using non-toxic sealant.
4.
Accessories: Provide the following accessories:
Columbus PS
a.
Provide staples, bands, wires and cement as recommended by the

insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated.
b.
Provide adhesives, sealers, and protective finishes as recommended

by the insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated.
15080-3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
General: Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be

installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable for insulation installation.
PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION
A.
Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:

1.
Interior above-ground storm water piping.
2.
Drain piping from drip pans.
3.
Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types
and thicknesses of insulation:
a.
Fiberglass: 1-inch thickness.
B.
Jackets for Piping Insulation: Install jacketing on all piping insulation.
C.
Thermal Hanger Shields: Provide insulated pipe protectors at all support points.
3.3
HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A.
Application Requirements: Insulate the following HVAC piping systems:

1.
Refrigerant liquid and suction lines between evaporators and compressors.
2.
Air conditioner condensate drain piping.
3.
Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types
and thicknesses of insulation:
a.
3.4
Fiberglass: 1-inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-inch, 11/2 inch thick for pipe sizes over 1-inch.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install piping in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

and approved shop drawings, and as specified in Division 1. Install all products in
accordance with the recognized industry practices so that insulation serves its
intended purpose.
Columbus PS
15080-4
B.
3.5
Piping Insulation:
1.
Order of Installation: Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to

testing, and acceptance tests.
2.
Insulation Surfaces: Install the insulation materials with smooth and even
surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of
insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces
or scraps abutting each other.
3.
Cleaning and Drying: Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating: Butt
insulation joints firmly together to form a complete and tight fit over the
surfaces to be covered.
4.
Integrity: Maintain integrity of the vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation,

and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.
5.
Insulating Fittings: Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping
system with an equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as
applied to the adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job
fabricated units except where a specific form or type is indicated.
6.
Penetrations: Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls,

floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
7.
Pipe Hangers: Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts.
For cold piping apply a wet coat of the vapor barrier lap cement on butt
joints and seal the joints with a 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape or band.
EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR

A.
3.6
Repair: Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both

previously damaged or damaged during construction. Use insulation of same
thickness as the existing insulation. Install a new jacket lapping and sealer over
the existing insulation and paint to match the existing surface color.
PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A.
Replacement: Replace damaged insulation which cannot be satisfactorily repaired,

including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
B.
Protection: Follow methods which are required for protection of the insulation
Work during the remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and
deterioration.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15080-5
Columbus PS
15080-6
SECTION 15106
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing ductile-iron pipe, fittings and

appurtenances, except soil pipe and buried ductile-iron pipe and fittings.
1.
Provide ductile-iron pipe and fittings complete with all necessary jointing
facilities and materials, specials, adapters and other appurtenances required
for installation in and completion of the pipelines to be constructed.
2.
Provide flanged and plain end pipe joints of the types, sizes and classes
shown or specified.
Related Work Specified In Other Sections Includes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Section 02505 - Buried Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

Section 02512 - Disinfection
Section 02516 - Leakage Test
Section 15109 - Erecting and Jointing Interior Piping
REFERENCES
A.

1.
AWWA C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron

Pipe and Fittings for Water
2.
AWWA C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3 inches through 48

inches, for Water and Other Liquids
3.
AWWA C115 - Flanged Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe with Threaded

Flanges
4.
AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or

Sand-Lined Molds, for Water and Other Liquids
5.
ANSI B16.1
- Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
6.
ASTMA307
- Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners
Columbus PS
15106-1
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Design Standards: Provide ductile-iron pipe meeting the requirements of AWWA

C115.
1.
Place pipe in structures using a minimum wall thickness of Thickness Class

51 for sizes larger than 12 inches, except provide Thickness Class 53 for
pipe with threaded flange joints.
2.
Construct concrete encasement where shown.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in the

General Requirements.
B.
Submit the following shop drawings:
C.
1.5
1.
Pipe joints and fittings, sleeves, and couplings. Where special designs or
fittings are required, show the Work in large detail and completely describe
and dimension all items.
2.
Fully dimensioned layout of pipes, fittings, couplings, sleeves, harnessing,

valves, supports, anchors and equipment. Label pipe size, materials, type,
and class on drawings and include schedule.
3.
Cross sections showing elevations of pipes, fittings, couplings, sleeves,

valves, supports, anchors and equipment.
4.
Catalog data for pipe, fittings, couplings, sleeves, and harnessing.
Quality Controls: Submit certificates of compliance for pipe, fittings, gaskets,

lining, coatings, specials, couplings, and sleeves in accordance with this Section.
A.
Deliver, store and handle all pipe, fittings and couplings as specified in the General
Requirements and Section 15109.
Columbus PS
15106-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are listed below. Manufacturers of equivalent product

may be submitted.
1.
Ductile-iron pipe and fittings.

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Sleeve-type couplings.
a.
12-inches in diameter and smaller

(1) Dresser Industries, Style 153
(2) Smith-Blair, Type 441 Omni Coupling System
b.
larger than 12-inches in diameter

(1) Dresser Industries, Style 38
(2) Smith-Blair, Type 411
c.
Gaskets.
(1) Dresser Plain Grade 27
(2) Smith-Blair 003
Harnessed Flange Adapters.

a.
4.
John Crane, Inc.

Garlock Packing Company
U.S. Rubber Company
American Cast Iron Pipe Company
United States Pipe and Foundry
McWane Incorporated
Coatings and Linings

a.
b.
c.
d.
Columbus PS
Viking Johnson (distributed by Henry Pratt Co.)
Gaskets
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.

McWane Incorporated
Griffin Pipe Products, Incorporated
Kop-coat
Tnemec
15106-3
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Fittings:
1.
General: Provide all fittings meeting the requirements of AWWA C110,

unless shown or specified otherwise. All fittings shall have a minimum
pressure rating of 250 psi.
2.
Flanged: Where long radius flanged fittings and other flanged fittings not
covered in AWWA C110 are shown or indicated, provide items meeting the
requirements of AWWA C110 and having laying lengths conforming to
ANSI B16.1 for 125 pound American Standard fittings.
Flanged Joints
1.
C.
Threaded Flanges: Provide threaded, ductile-iron, long hub flanges meeting

the requirements of AWWA C115.
a.
Screw flanges pipe on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop.
b.
Reface the face of the flange and the end of the pipe together.
c.
Design the flanges to prevent corrosion of the threads from the

outside and to prevent leakage through the pipe threads.
2.
Facing and Drilling: Provide flanges faced and drilled to the requirements
of AWWA C115 unless special drilling is called for or required. Face
flange accurately at right angles to the pipe axis. Drill flanges smooth and
true, and cover machined faces with zinc dust and tallow or equivalent
material.
3.
Taps: Tap flanges where tap or stud bolts are required.
4.
Fasteners: Provide bolts, stud bolts, and nuts meeting the requirements of
ASTM A 307, Grade B.
5.
Gaskets: Provide full-face gaskets for flanged joints on 12-inch diameter

and smaller pipe and gaskets of the ring type for flanged joints on larger
pipe. Provide flange gaskets meeting the requirements of AWWA C115.
Sleeves
1.
Columbus PS
Where shown in new cast concrete walls, provide suitable sleeves at all
points where pipes will pass through exterior walls of new structures and
where wall castings are not provided. Fabricate sleeves with an intermediate
collar located at the center of the wall and with plain or mechanical joint
15106-4
ends. Manufacture exterior wall sleeves of cast-iron meeting the

requirements of AWWA C110 and of flush wall design.
2.
D.
Sleeve-Type Couplings
1.
2.
E.
Where shown, install modular wall seals in the annular space between the
pipe and the sleeve. In all other locations, caulk the annular space between
the pipe and the sleeve. Fabricate sleeves large enough to accommodate
flanges, if required.
General: Manufacture middle rings to the following sizes.

a.
At least 1/4 inch thick and 5 inches wide for 8-inch diameter and
smaller pipe.
b.
3/8 inch thick and 7 inches wide for 10- through 30-inch diameter
pipe.
c.
1/2 inch thick and 10 inches wide for 36-inch diameter and larger
pipe.
Design: Manufacture middle rings without a pipe stop. Provide follower

rings of proper thickness. Provide molded rubber gaskets.
Harnessed Flange Adapters

1.
General: Provide harnessed flange adapters of ductile iron up to 12 inches

and of steel above 12 inches, with rolled steel spigots, compound rubber
gasket and high strength bolts and nuts.
2.
Gasket Material: Use gaskets that are of a rubber compound unaffected by

the fluid service of the pipeline.
3.
Pressure Rating: Provide harnessed flange adapters with a minimum

pressure rating equal to the test pressure of the pipeline.
4.
Coatings: Provide harnessed flange adapters with a thermoplastic polymer

coating. Provide tie rods, nuts and bolts with zinc coating.
5.
Provide harnessed flange adapters with adequate tie rods to limit the axial
movement at the specified test pressures, except where otherwise noted or
specified.
Columbus PS
15106-5
F.
G.
Wall Castings, Connecting Pieces, and Special Fittings

1.
General: Provide wall castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell,
bell and spigot, bell and flange, flange and flange, flange and spigot, and
flange and flare, meeting the requirements of AWWA C110.
2.
Design: Provide special fittings, where required, of an approved design that

have the same diameters and thicknesses as standard fittings, unless
otherwise required, but their laying lengths and other functional dimensions
are determined by their positions in the pipeline and by the particular piping
materials to which they connect.
3.
Intermediate Collar: Where watertightness is essential and at other locations

where indicated, provide wall castings with an integrally cast intermediate
collar located at the center of the wall.
Temporary Bulkheads: Provide temporary bulkheads at the ends of pipeline

sections where adjoining pipelines have not been completed and are not ready to
connect.
1.
H.
Removal:
needed.
Remove all temporary bulkheads when they are no longer

1.
Cement Lining: Provide all ductile-iron pipe and fittings having a cementmortar lining not less than standard thickness meeting the requirements of
AWWA C104 unless shown or specified otherwise. Linings shall have NSF
approval for contact with potable water.
2.
Exterior Primer: Shop coat ductile-iron pipe and fittings on the outside with
one coat of primer as specified in Section 09900 for use in exposed
locations, such as inside buildings, where finish painting or insulating is
required.
3.
Asphaltic Coating: Coat pipe for use not exposed to view with the standard
asphaltic outside coating specified in AWWA C151.
4.
Encased Pipe: Do not coat or paint the outside of fittings and pipe which are
to be encased in concrete where watertightness is to be obtained.
5.
Labels: Paint the weight and class designation conspicuously in white on

the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting after the shop coat has
hardened.
Columbus PS
15106-6
6.
Flange Joints: Immediately after facing and drilling, coat the back of the
flanges and bolt holes with asphaltic coating meeting the requirements of
AWWA C151.
7.
Sleeve-type Couplings:
a.
Shop coat couplings with Dresser Industries Red D or Smith-Blair

Standard Blue shop coat.
b.
Provide an additional shop coat of Kop-Coat Hi-Guard epoxy or

Tnemec Pota-pox on the interior of the middle ring.
c.
Finish coat exterior of sleeve-type coupling after installation with the

same coating specified in Section 09900 for the pipeline of which it is
a part.
d.
Ensure shop coats and finish coats are compatible.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General: Install all ductile-iron pipe and fittings in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings and as specified in
the General Requirements and Section 15109.
LEAKAGE TESTING
A.
Cleaning: Flush clean and test all pipes after installation.
B.
Testing: Test pipes for leaks and repair or tighten as required.
C.
Procedures: Conduct tests in accordance with Section 02516.
3.3
DISINFECTION
A.
3.4
Disinfect all pipelines that are to carry potable water before they are placed into
service as specified in Section 02512.
SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to the Schedule contained in Section 15109 Erecting and Jointing Interior
Pipe for information on the piping that is to be constructed using the pipe materials
and methods specified herein.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15106-7
Columbus PS
15106-8
SECTION 15107
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing steel pipe and fittings, except for
steel pipe in buried applications, as follows:
1.
B.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes, But is Not Limited to, the
Following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
Steel pipe and fittings include all fabricated and wrought steel pipe fittings.
Use steel pipe only where specifically shown or specified. Provide pipe of
the flanged, screwed, welded, grooved-type coupling joint or plain end type
of the sizes and thicknesses as shown or specified.

Section 02516 - Leakage Test
Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation
Section 15108 - Miscellaneous Pipe and Fittings
REFERENCES
A.

1.
AWWA C200
- Steel Water Pipe 6 In. and Larger
2.
AWWA C205
- Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for

Steel Water Pipe - 4 In. and Larger - Shop Applied
3.
AWWA C207
- Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4

In. Through 144 In.
4.
AWWA C208
- Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings
5.
AWWA M11
- Steel Water Pipe:

Installation
6.
ASTM A 47
- Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
Columbus PS
15107-1
A Guide for Design and
7.
ASTM A 53
- Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
8.
ASTM A 181/A181M - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General

Purpose Piping
9.
ASTM A 197
- Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron
10. ASTM A 283/A283M - Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile

Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars
1.3
11. ASTM A 307
- Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,

50,000 psi Tensile
12. ASTM A 536
- Specification for Ductile-Iron Castings
13. ASTM D 2000
- Classification System for Rubber Products in

Automotive Applications
14. ASME B16.1
- Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings
15. ASME B16.21
- Non-metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
16. ASME B16.3
- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
17. ASME B16.5
- Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2

through 24 with Appendixes
18. ASME B16.9
- Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings
19. ASME B36.10
- Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Standards: Use dimensions for steel pipe in accordance with ASME
B36.10, unless specified otherwise.
1.
B.
1.4
Provide pipe of 8- through 16-inch diameter not less than Schedule 30.
Small Steel Pipe: Provide steel pipe less than 30 inches in diameter meeting the
requirements of ASTM A 53.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in

Division 1.
Columbus PS
15107-2
B.
1.5
Submit the following shop drawings:

1.
Flanged, screwed, welding and mechanical coupling fittings and pipe,

couplings, harnessing and special fittings. When special designs or fittings
are required, show the Work in large detail and completely describe and
dimension the special or fitting.
2.
Catalog data for pipe, couplings, harnessing and fittings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Utilize certified welders, having current certificates conforming to the

requirements of the ASME code to perform all welding on steel pipelines.
A.
Deliver, store and handle pipe, fittings and couplings as specified in Division 1 and
Section 15109.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Steel pipe and fittings

a.
b.
c.
2.
Dielectric insulating fitting

a.
b.
3.
Walter Vallett Company

EPCO Inc.
Gaskets for flanged joints

a.
b.
c.
Columbus PS
U.S. Steel
L.B. Foster
Northwest Pipe Company
Garlock Packing Company

Crane Company
U.S. Rubber Company
15107-3
4.
Expansion Joints (Short Type)

a.
5.
Coatings
a.
b.
2.2
Anamet, Inc.
Kop-Coat
Tnemec
MATERIALS
A.
Fittings
1.
2.
Manufacture fittings for steel pipe to standard dimensions, suitable for the
pressures specified. Provide steel fittings of the same or heavier wall
thickness as the pipe of which they are a part.
a.
Provide fittings used in pipelines 2-inch diameter or smaller of the

screwed pattern.
b.
Provide fittings used in pipelines 2.5-inch diameter or larger of the

seamless steel welded type or flanged type, except as shown or
specified otherwise.
Unions: Use screwed unions on all steel pipelines 2-inch diameter and
smaller and flanged unions on pipelines 2.5-inch diameter and larger.
a.
3.
B.
Provide an adequate number of unions of the screwed or flanged type

in each main pipeline and each branch to facilitate the dismantling or
removal of any branch line or any part thereof or the section of the
main pipe to which it connects, without disturbing adjacent branch
lines or their related main pipeline.
Screwed Fittings: Provide malleable iron ASME B16.3 screwed fittings

where shown or specified for steel pipelines meeting the requirements of
ASTM A 197. Provide unions with brass or iron seats.
Flanges and Flanged Joints

1.
Flanges: Unless otherwise shown, provide all flanges for steel pipe, except
blind flanges, of the slip-on welding type with hubs meeting the
requirements of AWWA C207 Class D and made of metal meeting the
requirements of ASTM A 181 Class 60
a.
Columbus PS
Attach the flanges to the barrel of the pipe with two continuous fillet
welds.
15107-4
b.
2.
3.
C.
Provide plain faced blind flanges in accordance with ASME B16.5

Class 150.
Flanged Joints: Make flanged joints with bolts or bolt studs with a nut on
each end.
a.
Provide bolts, stud bolts, and nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM
A 307 Grade B and ASME B16.1.
b.
Provide bolts which have a 1/4-inch projection beyond the nut when
joint with gasket is assembled.
Gaskets: Provide rubber gaskets for flanged joints meeting the requirements
of AWWA C207 as modified and supplemented herein. Provide 1/8-inch
thick gaskets. Provide full face gaskets for pipe sizes 12 inches in diameter
and smaller. Provide ring type gaskets for pipe larger than 12 inches in
diameter.
Expansion
1.
General: Make ample provisions for flexibility in all pipelines to

compensate for expansion.
2.
Expansion Device: Provide adequate expansion devices to allow the lines to

expand and contract freely without damage to any part of the piping system.
3.
Columbus PS
a.
Provide expansion devices in the form of expansion joints, expansion

couplings, swivel or swing joints or pipe bends, and include such
anchors as may be shown, specified or required to make the devices
effective.
b.
If expansion devices are not required, fabricate all runs of pipe subject
to expansion shorter than their theoretical length to the extent that
there is freedom to expand without increasing the stresses imposed
when cold.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints that are of the single short type
and are designed for the specified test pressures. Provide expansion joints
with adequate tie rods to limit the axial movement at the specified test
pressures, except where noted or specified otherwise.
15107-5
D.

1.
General: Line and coat steel pipelines in accordance with the piping
schedule.
a.
Coat all bolts, nuts, couplings and the like after the joint has been
made.
b.
Paint in accordance with Section 09900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General: Install all steel pipe and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's
Section 15109.
LEAKAGE TESTING
A.
Cleaning: Flush clean and test all pipes after installation.
B.
Testing: Test pipes for leaks and repair or tighten as required.
C.
Procedures: Conduct tests in accordance with Section 02516.
3.3
DISINFECTION
A.
3.4
Disinfect all pipelines that are to carry potable water before they are placed into
service as specified in Section 02512.
SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to the Schedule contained in Section 15109 Erecting and Jointing Interior
Pipe for information on the piping that is to be constructed using the pipe materials
and methods specified herein.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15107-6
SECTION 15108
MISCELLANEOUS PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing miscellaneous pipe and fittings as

indicated. Miscellaneous pipe and fittings include all copper, plastic, and fittings.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2

Section 02516 - Leakage Tests
REFERENCES
A.

1.
ASTM B 32
Specification for Solder Metal
2.
ASTM B 42
Specification for
Standard Sizes
3.
ASTM B 43
Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe,

Standard Sizes
4.
ASTM D 1784
Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
5.
ASTM D 1785
Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
6.
ASTM D 2464
Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
7.
ASTM D 2564
Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
Columbus PS
15108-1
Seamless
Copper
Pipe,
1.3
8.
ASTM D 2855
Recommended Practice for Making SolventCemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Pipe and Fittings
9.
ASTM F 491
Specification for Poly (Vinylidene Fluoride)

(PVDF) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe and
Fittings
10.
ASTM F 492
Specification for Propylene and Polypropylene

(PP) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe and
Fittings
11.
ASTM F 599
Specification for Poly (Vinylidene Chloride)

(PVDC) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe and
Fittings
12.
ASME B1.20.1
Screw Threads - Pipe Threads, General Purpose

(Inch)
13.
ASME B16.18
Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

(Includes Revision Service)
14.
ASME B16.22
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint

Pressure Fitting (Includes Revision Service)
15.
AWWA C151/A21.51 -
Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal

Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other
Liquids
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit the following Shop Drawings.

1.
Submit complete detailed shop drawings in conformance with the specified

requirements.
2.
Include drawings that show the piping layouts and schedules of all pipe,
fittings, valves, hangers, supports and other appurtenances.
3.
When any work is of special design show in large detail and completely
describe and dimension.
Columbus PS
15108-2
1.4

A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Pipe and Fittings:

a.
Brass Pipe and Fittings

(1)
(2)
b.
Copper pipe and Fittings

(1)
(2)
c.
Chemtrol, Division of Nibco, Indianapolis, IN

Asahi/America, Malden, MA
Dielectric Insulating Fittings:

a.
b.
2.2
Mueller Industries, Inc., Wichita, KS

Nibco, Elkhart, IN
PVC and CPVC Pipe and Fittings

(1)
(2)
2.
Metalloy Industries, Inc., Ft. Lauderdale, FL

Nibco, Elkhart, IN
Walter Vallett Co., Detroit, MI

EPCO, Inc., Cleveland, OH
MATERIALS
A.
Brass Pipe and Fittings

1.
Pipe: Provide red brass pipe that meets the requirements of ASTM B 43.
a.
2.
Fittings: Provide brass pipe fittings that meet the ASME B16.15
requirements.
a.
Columbus PS
Provide pipe sizes, wall thicknesses and dimensions that meet the
ASTM B 43 Table 2 requirements for regular pipe.
Provide fittings rated for steam working pressures up to 250 psig.

15108-3
3.
B.
Provide unions made entirely of brass or bronze.
c.
Provide screwed type joints with clean cut, tapered and smooth
threads that meet ASME B1.20.1 requirements.
Finish: Provide piping with a rough finish, unless otherwise specified.
Copper Pipe and Fittings

1.
C.
b.
Small Copper Piping: For copper pipe 3 inches in diameter and smaller,
provide Type K hard drawn copper tubing that meets ASTM B 88
requirements.
a.
Fittings: Provide ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22

wrought copper and copper alloy fittings.
b.
Joints: Threaded or ASTM B 32 lead-free soldered joints.
2.
Potable Water Piping: Use ASTM B 32 alloy Grade 95TA (95 percent tin
and 5 percent antimony) solder for piping carrying potable water.
3.
Unacceptable Uses: Do not use copper pipe with soldered joints for
transporting fuel oil or other flammable or toxic liquids inside buildings.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe and
Fittings
1.
Pipe and Fittings: Provide PVC pipe and fittings that are Schedule 80 and
meet the requirements of ASTM D 1784 Class 12454-B and ASTM D 1785
unless otherwise shown or specified.
2.
Joints: Provide ASTM D 2855 solvent welded joints utilizing ASTM D

2564 solvent cement or ASTM D 2464 threaded joints, as indicated in the
piping schedules.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install all miscellaneous pipe and fittings in accordance with the
specifications contained herein and in Sections 02500 and 15109 and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings
and as specified in Division 1.
Columbus PS
15108-4
B.
Connections Between Dissimilar Metals: Where connections are to be made

between pipelines or equipment of corrosion causing dissimilar metals make the
connections using dielectric insulating couplings, unions or other approved
dielectric insulating devices.
C.
Couplings: Only use couplings to join standard lengths of pipe and as required to
complete a straight run of pipe. Do not use couplings to join random lengths of
pipe and cuttings from standard lengths.
D.
Reducing Fittings: Use reducing fittings for all changes in pipe size. Do not use
bushings.
E.
Pipe Flexibility: Make ample provisions for flexibility in all pipelines in

accordance with Section 15109 for interior pipelines.
F.
Drip Pans: Provide drip pans under all metallic pipelines installed over electrical
equipment and motors and properly connect to the drainage system with 3/4-inch
red brass pipe. Make leaktight connection between the drip pan and the drain pipe.
Pitch pans uniformly toward the drain pipe not less than 1/8-inch per lineal foot.
3.2
CLEANING AND PAINTING

A.
Cleaning: Flush all process and potable water pipelines with clean water.
B.
Leakage: Test pipes at the pressures specified in the piping schedules located in
Section 02500 and Section 15109.
C.
Paint in accordance with Section 09900, unless otherwise specified.
3.3
DISINFECTION
A.
3.4
Disinfect all potable water pipelines in accordance with Section 02512.

SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to the schedules contained in Section 02500 Laying and Jointing Buried
Pipelines and Section 15109 Erecting and Jointing Interior Piping for information
on the piping that is to be constructed using the pipe materials and methods
specified herein.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15108-5
Columbus PS
15108-6
SECTION 15109
ERECTING AND JOINTING INTERIOR PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Furnishing of supports and hangers and installation of all interior
and exposed exterior piping and supports.
1.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Furnish, support, hang and install piping of the materials, coatings and linings
shown or specified at locations as specified or where shown.

Section 02516 - Leakage Tests
Section 15060 - Supports and Anchors
REFERENCES
A.

1.
1.3
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping

A.
Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in Division 1 and as
follows:
1.
Take extreme care in loading and unloading the pipe and fittings. Do the work
slowly using skids or suitable power equipment, and keep the pipe under control
at all times.
2.
Handling Procedures: Under no condition is the pipe to be dropped, bumped,

dragged, pushed or moved in any way which will cause damage to the pipe,
lining or coating.
3.
Use of Slings: When handling the pipe with a crane, use a suitable pipe hook or
sling around the pipe. Under no condition is the sling to be allowed to pass
through the pipe unless adequate measures are taken to prevent damage to the
pipe ends, lining and coating.
Columbus PS
15109-1
4.
Damage: If any piping or fittings are damaged in the process of delivery,

storing, handling, or laying, replace or repair such piping or fittings as
approved.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Pipe Dope for Threaded Joints

a.
2.2
Masters Metallic Compound by Harbinseal Corporation
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Provide hangers and supports and all necessary appurtenances as specified in Section
15060.
FABRICATION
A.
Coating: Provide all threads coated with a suitable pipe dope, Masters Metallic
Compound, graphite and engine oil, or equal, before jointing.
B.
Priming: Prime all bolts by dipping with a bituminous coating, except the threads,
which are coated immediately prior to installation of the nuts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Paint hangers, supports, anchors, and similar devices as specified in Section 09900.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install all piping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

and approved Shop Drawings and as specified in Division 1.
1.
Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal

runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.
2.
Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping.
3.
Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
Columbus PS
15109-2
B.
4.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,
joints or connected equipment.
5.
Slope piping as shown and arrange systems to drain at low points.
6.
Do not penetrate building structural members unless shown.
7.
Locate groups of piping parallel to each other and at common elevations

whenever practical, spaced to permit servicing of valves.
8.
Arrange miscellaneous pipelines, which are shown in diagram form on the

Plans, clear of other pipelines and equipment.
9.
Fit and install pipelines in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
10.
Provide an adequate number of unions in main pipe and branch pipe runs to
facilitate dismantling or removal of pipeline sections without disturbing
adjacent branch or connecting lines.
Flanged Joints: Make flanged joints with bolts or bolt studs with a nut on each end.
1.
Field Flanges: Shop screw threaded flanges to pipe unless threading in the field
is permitted with prior approval.
2.
Flange to Pipe Assembly: Assemble pipe to be fitted with threaded flanges as

follows:
Columbus PS
a.
Accurately thread pipe and flanges to the appropriate gauge, screw

flanges on by heavy machinery until the end of the pipe projects beyond
the face of the flange and a tight metal-to-metal joint is produced without
evidence of heat in the threaded portion.
b.
Cut the projecting end of the pipe off flush with the face of the flange.
c.
Make a light refacing cut across both the end of the pipe and the face of
the flange at right angles to the center line of the pipe and then ream the
pipe.
d.
Flanged to Flange Assembly: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble

joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and
gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque
specified by bolt manufacturer.
15109-3
C.
D.
Threaded Joints: Conform threaded joints to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for
field cut threads unless otherwise specified. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows:
1.
Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of

internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2.
Align threads at point of assembly.
3.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads.
4.
Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. Assemble joint to produce a tight

joint without evidence of heat in the threaded portion. When using a pipe
wrench on valves, place wrench on valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
5.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded, or
damaged. If weld opens during cutting or threading operations, do not use that
portion of pipe.
6.
Retightening: Once a threaded joint has been assembled, it is not to be backed

off unless the threads are recleaned and new compound or tape applied before
rejointing.
Sleeve Type Couplings: For sleeve type couplings, equally tighten diametrically
opposite bolts on the coupling to bring the gaskets up evenly all around the pipe.
1.
E.
Anchors and Stands: Furnish and install anchors and stands when specified, shown, or
required for holding the pipelines and equipment in position or alignment.
1.
F.
Torque Wrenches: Do final tightening with torque wrenches set for the torque
recommended by the coupling manufacturer.
Small Piping Supports: Where adjustable supporting devices are not required,
support pipelines 3 inches in diameter and smaller on cast-iron, malleable iron,
or steel hooks, hook plates, rings or ring plates.
Hangers and Supports

1.
Direction Changes: Provide pipe hangers at each change in pipe direction, on

both sides of pipe mounted valves and equipment and on both sides of pipe
loops and expansion absorbing devices.
2.
Brackets: Use brackets for the support of piping from vertical surfaces.
3.
Anchors: Furnish and install anchors when specified, shown, or required for
holding the pipelines and equipment in position or alignment.
Columbus PS
15109-4
3.3
4.
Inserts: Install galvanized inserts in concrete structures where required for

fastening supporting devices.
5.
Controlled Movements: Install hangers and supports to allow controlled

movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe
anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion
bends and similar units.
6.
Load Distribution: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on the attachment

and to achieve any indicated slope of the pipe.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Tests: After installation of the interior and exposed exterior piping and supports,
control equipment and all appurtenances, subject the units to a field running test, as
specified in Division 1, under actual operating conditions.
1.
3.4
Perform testing of pipelines in accordance with the requirements of Section

02516.
CLEANING
A.
General: Clean the interior of pipelines of all dirt and superfluous material of every
description in an approved manner.
B.
Thoroughly clean threads for threaded joints after reaming.
C.
Disinfection: Disinfect pipelines carrying potable water in accordance with

requirements of Section 02512.
3.5
SCHEDULE
A.
Definitions: Abbreviations used in the schedule are as follows:

1.
Pipe Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Columbus PS
SS
DI
CK
CPVC
S
CISP
BR
PT
Stainless Steel
Ductile Iron
Copper - Type K
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride
Steel
Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Brass
Plastic Tubing
15109-5
2.
Joints:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
3.
Flanged
Screwed
Soldered
Solvent Welded
Compression Gaskets
Bell and Spigot
Tongue and Groove
Mechanical Joint
Harnessed
Sleeve Type Coupling
Welded
Coatings and Linings:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
F
SC
SD
SW
C
B&S
TG
MJ
H
SL
W
CL
P
G
I
BC
Cement-Mortar Lined
Painted
Galvanized
Insulated
Bituminous
Schedule: Provide products as listed in the following schedule:
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15109-6
INSIDE PIPING SCHEDULE

Protective
Coatings
Int.
Ext.(2)
Test
Pressure
(psig) (1)
F, SL H
SD
CL
--
P
I, P
120
100
--
SD
--
100
CISP
--
B&S, C
BC
I, P
(2)
40
SC
G, P
50
1/2 through 4
40
SC
--
100
Air Cooled Condensing
ALL
CK
--
SD, SW
--
I, P
200
Engine Generator Exhaust
ALL
40
SW, W
--
--
--
Diameter
(Inches)
Material
Water Piping
6 through 30
1 through 4
Plant Water
Storm Drainage
Service
Sump Pump Discharge

Fuel Piping (Above Ground)
Thickness
or Schedule
Joints
DI
CK
52
--
1/2 through 2
CK
3 through 12
__________
NOTES:
(1) Measure the test pressures shown in the schedule at the centerline of the pipeline's low point.
Adjust test pressures measured at other locations accordingly.
(2) Sewer leakage test
Columbus PS
15109-7
Columbus PS
15109-8
SECTION 15110
VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes:
operators.
1.
Provide valve operators complete, including a suitable enclosure, with all

appurtenances necessary for the operator to perform its intended function.
Such appurtenances include, but are not limited to, anchor bolts and other
mounting hardware, control switches, limit switches, pressure switches,
torque switches, gauges, control valves, electrical actuator system, electrical
supply connections, internal electric wiring and controls, terminal blocks,
regulating controls, push button controls, miscellaneous controls, extension
stems, local and remote indicators, operating nuts, indicating lights, floor
boxes, direct burial valve boxes and other such items.
2.
For each valve, provide the type of operator specified for the valve in the
Valve Schedule.
Following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Requirements for furnishing and installing all valves and

Section 16055 - Electrical Requirements for Shop-Assembled Equipment
Section 16121 - Wires and Cables - 600 Volts and Below
Section 16220 - Electric Motors
REFERENCES
A.

1.
ASME B1.20.1
- Pipe Threads, General Purpose
2.
ASME B16.1
- Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
3.
ASTM A 27/A27M
- Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for

General Application
Columbus PS
15110-1
4.
ASTM A 29/A29M
- Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy,

Hot Wrought and Cold-Finished, General
Requirements
5.
ASTM A 48
- Specifications for Gray Cast Iron Castings
6.
ASTM A 126
- Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
7.
ASTM A 197
- Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron
8.
ASTM A 276
- Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Steel Bars and Shapes
9.
ASTM A 278
- Specification for Gray Iron Castings for PressureContaining Parts for Temperatures Up to 650 F
10.
ASTM A 479/A479M - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting

Steel Wire Bars, and Shapes for Use in Boilers
and Other Pressure Vessels
11.
ASTM A 536
12.
ASTM A 572/A572M - Specification for High Strength Low Alloy

Columbium Vanadium Steels of Structural
Quality
13.
ASTM A 743/A743M - Specifications for Castings, Iron-Chromium, IronChromium - Nickel, and Nickel-Base CorrosionResistant for General Application
14.
ASTM A 744/A744M - Specification for Castings, Iron-ChromiumNickel, Corrosion-Resistant, for Severe Service
15.
ASTM B 148
- Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Castings
16.
ASTM B 584
- Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for

General Applications
17.
AWWA C500
- Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage

Systems
18.
AWWA C504
- Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves
19.
AWWA C508
- Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2

inch through 24 inch NPS
Columbus PS
- Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
15110-2
1.3
20.
AWWA C509
- Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply

Service
21.
AWWA C540
- Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice

Gates
22.
AWWA C550
- Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and

Hydrants
23.
MSS SP-80
- Bronze, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
24.
NACM
- Welded and Weldless Chain Specifications
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit the following:
C.
D.
1.4
1.
Complete detailed drawings of all valves.
2.
Working drawings, including arrangement and erection drawings of the

operators and control equipment; schematic control diagrams, electrical
connection diagrams, and complete description of the control system; and
operating characteristics.
Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1.
Manufacturer's certified performance and material records.
2.
Complete calculations for each size of motor operator indicating the force
required to operate the valve, the operator force provided, full load and
locked rotor current, and horsepower.
3.
Affidavit of compliance with AWWA specifications and certified drawings.
Operation and Maintenance: Submit operation and maintenance manuals for the
valve operators.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Furnish all valves of the same type from the same manufacturer. Provide parts that
are interchangeable for all valves of the same type and size.
Columbus PS
15110-3
1.5

A.
General: Deliver, store and handle all products as specified in Division 1 and as
follows.
B.
Storage and Erection: Pack and store all valves in satisfactory operating condition.
Carefully erect all valves in their respective positions, free from all distortion and
strain.
1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
For each size electric motor operator:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
One motor of each size

One torque switch of each size
One limit switch assembly of each size
Six push buttons
Six color caps of each color
Twenty indicating lamps
One reversing starter of each size
One overload relay of each size
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Gate Valves (2-1/2 and Smaller):

a.
b.
c.
2.
Resilient-Seated Gate Valves (3 and Larger):

a.
b.
3.

Mueller Company
AWWA Butterfly Valves:

a.
b.
c.
Columbus PS
Mueller Company
NIBCO, Inc.
Stockham
M&H 450
Mueller
Pratt Groundhog
15110-4
4.
Globe Check Valves:

a.
5.
Air/Air and Vacuum Valves:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
NIBCO, Inc.
Stockham
Valve Boxes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Valve & Primer Corp.

Valmatic
GA Industries, Inc.
Clow Corporation
American Darling Valve and Manufacturing
Globe Single Disc Check and Angle Valves:

a.
b.
7.
APCO Series 600 Silent Check Valve
Mueller
Bingham and Taylor
Opelika Foundry
Tyler
MATERIALS
A.
General:
1.
All valves and valve boxes are to be acceptable for potable water service.
Fabricate valves and valve boxes of materials resistant to corrosion for the
required service.
2.
Fabricate valves that are to be installed in metal pipelines and that are 2
inches in diameter and smaller of all brass or bronze, except fabricate the
handwheel of ASTM A 197 malleable iron. Fabricate valves that are to be
installed in metal pipelines and that are 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger
of the materials specified herein.
3.
Fabricate gate, globe and angle valves with a minimum steam working
pressure rating of 125 psig and a minimum nonshock cold water, oil or gas
pressure rating of 200 psig, unless otherwise specified.
4.
Fabricate operators of materials resistant to corrosion for the required

services. Provide operator materials as specified.
Columbus PS
15110-5
5.
C.
a.
Cast iron
ASTM A 126, Class B

ASTM A 48, Class 30 or 35
b.
Ductile iron
ASTM A 395
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
c.
Cast steel
ASTM A 27/A27M
6.
Operator worms, steel
7.
Operator gears, steel

(spur & helical)
8.
B.
Operator housings and pedestal handwheels:
Worm gears, bronze
ASTM A 29/A29M Grade

Designation 8620
ASTM A 572/A572M
ASTM B 148, Alloy C95400 or C95500
ASTM B 584, Alloy C86300
Valve Joints
1.
Fabricate valves 2 inches in diameter and smaller of the threaded or solder

end type for valves to be installed in copper pipelines, and of the threaded
end type for valves to be installed in metal pipelines.
2.
Fabricate all valves 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger with flanged ends
(interior) or mechanical joint ends (exterior), unless otherwise specified.
3.
For metallic flanged joints, provide flanges that are faced accurately at right
angles to the axis of the casting. Face and drill flanges and shop coat with a
rust-preventive compound before shipment.
4.
For flanged joints, provide flanges whose dimensions and drillings meet the
requirements of ASME B16.1, 125 pounds as a minimum. For valves
installed in pipelines with test pressure requirements higher than 125 psi,
provide flanges whose pressure ratings equal or exceed the specified test
pressure of the pipeline. Furnish special drillings where required. For
valves having flanges that do not conform with the thickness requirements
of ASME B16.1, test each valve in accordance with the hydrostatic shell test
pressure requirements of ASME B16.1.
Operating Force: Fabricate valves to limit the maximum force required to operate
all manual valves, including but not limited to valves with wrench operated nuts,
levers, handwheels and chainwheels, to 40 pounds. Limit the overall length of
each wrench or single-arm lever to 18 inches. Limit the overall length of each
dual-arm lever to 36 inches.
Columbus PS
15110-6
D.
2.3
Handwheel: Mark each valve handwheel with an arrow and the word OPEN.
Mark each nut with an arrow.
GATE VALVES
A.
Materials: Unless otherwise shown or specified, furnish and install gate valves
meeting the following requirements:
Nominal Valve Size,
Inches
Standard
Type
Design
Working Pressure
2-1/2 and smaller
MSS SP-80
Solid wedge
200 psi
3 through 16
AWWA C509
Resilient seat
250 psi
Greater than 16
AWWA C509
Resilient seat
150 psi
B.
Nonrising Stem: For buried service, furnish nonrising stem gate valves. Equip
nonrising stem valves, except for buried or submerged service, with externally
visible indication of the disc position at all points of travel.
C.
Stem Seals: Use the following types of stem seals:

Valve Type
Stem Seal
Nonrising stem
O-ring
Rising stem (Outside stem and yoke)
Stuffing box
Geared
Nonrising stem
O-ring or stuffing box
Rising stem (Outside stem and yoke)
Stuffing box
D.
Packing: Provide nonasbestos braided, twisted or formed ring type packing

suitable for the pressure-temperature ratings of the valve.
E.
Bonnet: Provide 3-inch and smaller gate valves with threaded bonnets. Provide 4inch and larger gate valves with outside screw and yoke bonnets.
F.
Accessories: Provide zinc plated bonnet bolts, studs and nuts. except for
submerged service. Provide stainless bonnet bolts, studs and nuts for submerged
service. Make wedging devices bronze to iron or bronze to bronze. Provide
glands which are bronze or bronze bushed and bronze gland bolts and nuts.
Columbus PS
15110-7
2.4
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
B.
General:
1.
Provide butterfly valves of the full flanged or mechanical joint pattern that
meet the requirements of AWWA C504, Class 150 B.
2.
Provide butterfly valves of the rubber-seated, tight-closing type.
Materials:
1.
Provide valve materials as specified below or as required for the service:

a.
Valve bodies:
Cast iron
b.
Valve shafts:
c.
Valve discs:
Cast iron
Alloy cast iron
Ductile iron
Bronze
d.
ASTM A 126, Class B

ASTM A 48, Class 40
ASTM A 276 or A 479/A479M, Type 304,
stainless steel or carbon steel with A 276 or A
479, Type 304 stainless steel journals
ASTM A 48, Class 40

ASTM A 436, Type 1
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
AWWA C504 Grade A, D or E
Mating seat surface:

Stainless steel
(castings)
ASTM A 743/A743M, A 744 Grade
CF-8 or CF-8M
Stainless steel
ASTM A 276 or A479,Type 304
Alloy cast iron
ASTM A 436, Type 1
Seats:
New natural rubber or Buna-N
C.
General AWWA C504 Construction: Manufacture valves and all accessories,

including operators, to meet the requirements of AWWA C504, except as
otherwise specified. Provide valve bodies of the short-body flanged type or
mechanical joint-end type, as shown or specified. Wafer body type valves without
lugs are not acceptable.
D.
Pressure: Provide butterfly valves of pressure class 150 B.
E.
Shafts: If stub shafts are furnished, extend the shafts a minimum of 1-1/2
diameters into the discs and provide clearance between the shaft and discs not
exceeding the following:
Columbus PS
15110-8
Shaft Diameter
(Inches)___
Maximum Radial
Clearance (Inches)
1/2 to 1-1/2
F.
2.5
.002
2 to 4
.0025
.003
.004
Protect the interior of the butterfly valves with an epoxy coating complying with
AWWA C550 and approved by NSF for contact with potable water.
GLOBE CHECK VALVES
A.
General: Provide globe check valves designed for pump stop and check service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Valve Body: ASTM A395 Ductile Iron

Plug and Seat: ASTM B584 C83600 Bronze
Valve Spring: ASTM A276 T316 Stainless Steel
Pressure Rating: 150 psi (minimum)
B.
Design check valve plug to open at a pressure that does not exceed 0.5 psig and
completely closes while there is still positive head of the discharge side of the
valve.
C.
Design the check valve for connection to the discharge of the pump for stop and
check service.
2.6
AIR AND VACUUM VALVES

A.
2.7
Automatic air and vacuum valve shall be constructed with cast iron bodies, type
302 stainless steel floats, bronze trim and Buna-N seats. Valves shall be of the size
and at the locations indicated on the drawings. Valve shall be of the combination
type to relieve large volumes of air as the lines are filled or emptied and also to
release small quantities of entrained air under pressure. Valve shall be for working
pressures indicated in drawings.
SOLENOID VALVES
A.
Provide solenoid valves of the direct acting, all electric, normally closed, packless
type with full area ports, unless otherwise shown or specified. Design valves to
not require a pressure assist from the process fluid to open or close. Size the
solenoids in accordance with the pressure conditions in the pipeline in which
valves are installed. Construct the valve body and bonnet of forged brass and
construct the solenoid core of stainless steel. Design solenoid the coils for 115-
Columbus PS
15110-9
volt, 60-hertz operation. Embed solenoid coils in molded plastic and install coils
in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures, except as shown or specified.
2.8
GLOBE, SINGLE DISC CHECK AND ANGLE VALVES

A.
General: Provide globe, single disc check and angle valves that meet the
requirements of MSS SP-80.
B.
Disc and Seats: Equip gate and globe valves with renewable bronze discs and
renewable seats.
C.
Bonnet: Equip globe and angle valves with threaded bonnets.
D.
Packing: Provide nonasbestos braided, twisted or formed ring type packing

suitable for the pressure-temperature ratings of the valve.
E.
Design: Equip check valves with bronze renewable seat rings, bronze discs or disc
rings and bronze discs hinge bushings and pins. Carefully mount discs and
provide discs that swivel in disc hinges. Provide pins, discs and other parts that are
noncorrosive, nonsticking and properly cured to operate satisfactorily within a
temperature range of 34 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit for potable water service.
2.9
MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE OPERATORS

A.
General: Provide operators as an integral part of the valve. Manufacture manual

operators of the enclosed, traveling-nut or worm-gear type, as shown or specified.
B.
Traveling-Nut Type: Fabricate traveling-nut type operators with a threaded steel

screw and a bronze nut. Provide a slotted-lever or link-lever system to transfer the
applied torque to the disc shaft. Equip all rotating shafts, screws and links with
separate bearings. Provide thrust bearings.
C.
Worm-Gear Type: Fabricate worm-gear type operators with a worm gear and
matching drive worm. Provide bearings for each rotating member.
D.
Stop-Limiting Devices: Provide stop-limiting devices on traveling-nut and

worm-gear type operators to prevent overtravel of the disc in either direction.
Design the operator to hold the disc in any position without flutter or wear on the
valve or operator. House the operator in a watertight enclosure. Pack operators
with grease or with oil. For buried service, equip valve operators with stainless
steel external bolting.
E.
Position Indicators: For buried service, equip manually operated butterfly valves,
with externally visible indication of the disc position.
Columbus PS
15110-10
F.
Buried Valves: Buried valves shall be provided with a 2-inch operator nut. The
direction of rotation to close the valve shall be clockwise. The gear ratio shall be
such that the torque required at the operating nut shall not exceed 80 foot-pounds.
G.
Tag: Attach a metal tag on which the direction and number of turns required to
open and close the valves is embossed.
2.10
EXTENSION STEMS, VALVE BOXES AND FLOOR BOXES
A.
Equip all direct burial valves and valves in vaults or manholes with operating nuts
and extended shafts to grade, unless otherwise shown or specified. The distance
from grade to the top of operating nuts shall be 48 maximum. Provide extension
if top of operating nut is greater than 48 below grade. Equip all direct burial
valves with adjustable type, cast-iron, valve boxes and extended shafts to grade.
Equip all valve boxes and floor boxes with ground level valve position indicators,
unless otherwise shown or specified.
B.
Valve boxes shall be 5-1/4 shaft, Buffalo style of the two piece type. The work
Water shall be cast or embossed on the valve box cover in letters not less than 1
inch high.
2.11
ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATORS MODULATING
A.
General: Provide modulating electric motor operators of the close-coupled,

electric motor-driven, worm gear type, complete with motor, gearing, limit
switches and auxiliary contacts, torque switches, position indicator, handwheel,
integral controller, and all required appurtenances. Design the operators to rotate
valve discs through 90 degrees from the fully open to the fully closed position and
back, as in butterfly valves. Provide operators that complete each operation in the
time specified. Provide operators that hold the discs in any position from fully
open to fully closed without vibration.
B.
Operator Mounting: Design the operator to be mounted in the position shown or

specified.
C.
Standard:
C540.
D.
Open and Close Time Periods: Provide valve operators that fully open the valve
from the closed position in approximately 60 to 80 seconds and fully close it in
approximately 60 to 80 seconds when the differential pressure and flow are at the
values specified for the valve and the voltage at the terminals is within 15 percent
of the nominal voltage. Design the operator to operate the valve through three
consecutive opening and closing cycles or for a period of 15 minutes, whichever is
longer, during every 60-minute period, at specified ambient temperature conditions
under full differential pressure.
Columbus PS
Except as otherwise specified, provide operators meeting AWWA
15110-11
E.
Temperature Range: Design the operator for indoor operation and for an ambient
temperature range of -20 to 140 degrees F.
F.
Torque: Design the operator to exert an unseating torque of at least 50 percent in

excess of the required disc seating torque at the specified voltage, neglecting
hammer-blow effect.
G.
Power Gearing: Provide power gearing consisting of helical or spur gears and
worming gearing. Fabricate helical and spur gears of accurately machined
hardened alloy steel. Provide a hardened alloy steel worm with threads ground and
polished after heat treating. Provide a nickel or manganese bronze worm gear.
Use antifriction bearings throughout. Grease pack or oil bath lubricate the
operator. Provide lubricants suitable for the ambient temperatures specified.
H.
Handwheel Manual Operation: Provide a handwheel for manual operation with

a maximum rim pull of 40 pounds. Design the handwheel so that it does not rotate
during electrical operation and the motor does not rotate during manual handwheel
operation. Provide an operator that is arranged so that motor or motor gearing
failure does not prevent manual operation. Arrange the operator to automatically
change from manual operation to electrical operation when its motor is energized
and to continue electric operation until the operator is reset to manual operation.
Provide a means for locking the drive in either manual or motor operation.
Provide removable handwheels. Provide an adaptor key or drive nut to permit
operation by a portable operator.
I.
Declutching Mechanism: Provide a declutching mechanism to disengage the

motor mechanically but not electrically from motor to handwheel operation. If the
clutch is of the external lever type, arrange it such that the lever does not move
when the motor is energized.
J.
Position Indication: Provide an operator-mounted disc position indicator of the

mechanical or indicating light type. For modulating or throttling service, provide
continuous disc position indication between the fully open and fully closed
positions. Provide electrical contacts as required for remote indication of disc
position.
K.
Electric Motor Design: Provide an operator motor of the high torque, ball or roller
bearing, squirrel-cage type designed for continuous valve duty. Provide motor
rated for 15 minute duty cycle or three complete opening and closing valve
strokes, whichever is longer, during a 60 minute period under full differential
pressure at 40 degrees C ambient. Design the motor for use on a nominal 480
volts, 3-phase, 60-hertz electrical service. Provide motor windings and leads with
Class F or better insulation with built-in thermal overload protection. In other
respects, provide motors meeting the requirements of Section 16220.
Columbus PS
15110-12
L.
Housing: Provide housings for controls, gears, and motors with integrally cast
flanges. Fully machine and template drill the flanges and their mating surfaces.
Provide joints which are metal-to-metal or gasket or O-ring sealed as required.
M.
Control and Motor Enclosures: Provide NEMA 4 control and motor enclosures,
except as otherwise specified.
N.
Electrical Compartment Heater: Provide electrical compartment heaters, unless

other means can be proven effective for moisture elimination.
O.
Electrical Requirements: Provide electrical controls for the operator as shown or

specified. Design operators for 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz service. Design all
control circuits for 120- volt, single-phase, 60-hertz ac. Provide an integral
480/120-volt control transformer with fused secondary.
P.
Overload Protection and Internal Wiring: Provide adequate overload protection in

the controller or embedded in the motor windings. Install an overload device in
each phase. If overload devices are installed in the motor windings, provide
devices of the bimetallic automatic reset type with the contacts in the control
circuit. Arrange the internal wiring in the operator so that the opening and closing
coils cannot be energized simultaneously at any time, regardless of external wiring
conditions.
Q.
Limit and Torque Switches: Provide the operator with limit and torque switches,
either direct or gear driven. Provide adjustable limit and torque switches with
auxiliary contacts that are operative in either direction of travel. Provide limit
switches that are in step with torque switches at all times, whether in motor or
manual operation. Equip the operator with limit switches to stop movement in
each direction and torque switches for protection against mechanical overload and
to stop movement in either direction if an obstruction is encountered. Provide the
number, function and arrangement of limit switches as shown, specified or
required.
R.
Additional Accessories: Provide additional limit switches, indicating lights,

position transmitters and remote position indicators, remote operating controls and
other accessories and controls as shown, specified or required.
S.
Control Components, Operator Housing and Operator Wiring: Provide control

components and operator housing that meets the requirements of Section 16055.
Provide operator wiring that meets the requirements of Section 16121.
T.
Control Module: Provide a solid-state type control module with a comparator

circuit which senses the error between the input command signal and the position
feedback signal.
Mount the control module within the operator switch
compartment.
Columbus PS
15110-13
Accept a 4-20 mAdc input command signal. Provide zero and span adjustments to
align minimum and maximum valve position with zero and 100 percent values of
the input command signal. Provide deadband adjustment from 0.16 to 1.0 percent
to eliminate excessive motor movement due to minor variation in the process
variable signal.
Activate the solid state reversing starter to drive the actuator in the proper
direction necessary to reduce the error to zero. Provide proportional band
adjustment from 5-40 percent. When the error is outside the proportional band,
run the actuator motor continuously toward set point. When the error is within the
proportional band, pulse the actuator motor toward set point to prevent overshoot.
Provide actuator to open the valve when command input signal increases.
On loss of command input signal, have valve fail open. On loss of feedback
signal, have valve fail in last position.
U.
Selector Switch and Push Buttons: Where the operator is 7 feet or less from the
floor and in an accessible location, integrally mount a 3-position AUTOOFF-MANUAL selector switch plus two push buttons marked OPEN and CLOSE
on the operator housing.
V.
Auto and Manual Operations: Provide operators that, when in the AUTO position,
will respond to the automatic signal as described above. Provide operators that,
when in the MANUAL position, will be operable by either push buttons or
handwheel.
W.
Motor Design: Design the motor specifically for valve operator service and to be
continuous rated for continuous modulating duty. Provide motor insulation of at
least Class H.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General: Install valves in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

and approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1.
PAINTING AND COATING
A.
General: Unless otherwise specified, coat the exterior surfaces of valves and
operators that are to be buried in the ground with two coats of asphalt varnish.
Paint exterior surfaces of other valves and operators as specified in Section 09900.
Columbus PS
15110-14
3.3

A.
Manufacturers Field Services: Furnish the services of a qualified representative

of each of the various manufacturers to provide instruction on the proper
installation of the equipment, inspect the completed installation, make any
necessary adjustments, participate in the startup of the equipment, participate in the
field testing of the equipment and place the equipment in trouble-free operation, as
specified in Division 1.
B.
Tests: After installation of the valves, control equipment and all appurtenances,
subject the units to a field running test, as specified in Division 1, under actual
operating conditions. Operate each valve through one complete open-close cycle
under the maximum pressure differential practical.
3.4
OPERATION DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.5
Manufacturers Field Services: Furnish the services of a qualified representative

of each of various manufacturers to demonstrate the proper operation and instruct
pump station personnel in the equipments operation and maintenance, as specified
in Division 1.
PAINTING
A.
3.6
Paint the equipment in accordance with the requirements in Section 09900.

SCHEDULE
A.
Abbreviations used in the schedule are as follows:

Joints
F
MJR
Flanged
Mechanical Joint, Restrained
Operators
H
ME
N
Handwheel
Modulating Electric Motor
Nut
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15110-15
VALVE SCHEDULE
Facility/Service
Valve Type
Size
Inches
VALVE VAULT
Potable Water
Drain Valve
Butterfly
Gate
30
12
F
F
H
H
PUMP STATION
Pump Suction
Pump Discharge
Pump Discharge
Butterfly
Globe Check
Butterfly
20
20
20
F
F
F
H
ME
BURIED PIPELINES
Potable Water Discharge
Potable Water Discharge
Gate
Butterfly
20, 24
30, 36
MJR
MJR
N
N
Columbus PS
15110-16
Joint
Type
Operator
Type
Remarks
SECTION 15122
PRESSURE SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for furnishing and installing pressure sensing

devices, pressure transfer tubing, pressure switches and isolating devices as shown
and specified.
B.
Related Work in Other Sections Include:

1.
2.
1.2
Section 15108 - Miscellaneous Piping and Fittings

Section 15110 - Valves
REFERENCES
A.

1.
1.3
ASME B16.1
- Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25,

125, 250, 800
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in the General
Requirements.
B.
Product Data and Information: Provide catalog data for equipment and associated
devices for each different type of equipment identified in Part 2 - Products.
C.
Contractor Shop Drawings:
1.
Provide bill of materials and catalog data sheets for each of the specified
instruments. Include terminal wiring details and pertinent manufacturing and
calibration data.
2.
Furnish manufacturer's installation recommendations including piping and

installation details, dimensions and accessories required for installation, power
and signal connection details.
3.
Provide instrument loop diagrams conforming to ISA-S5.4 "Instrument Loop

Diagrams" showing each instrument by loop number.
Columbus PS
15122-1
D.
1.4
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide operation and maintenance manuals as

specified in the General Requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide equipment designed to measure, indicate, and control accurately over their
entire range under continuous service.
B.
Provide equipment calibrated by the manufacturer. Submit calibration data sheets.
C.
Provide equipment of rugged and substantial construction, conforming to UL

standards.
D.
Furnish like instruments from the same manufacturer.

different manufacturers.
E.
Coordinate subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
1.5
Minimize the number of

A.
General: Deliver, store, and handle all products and materials as specified in the
General Requirements.
B.
Acceptance at Site: Inspect all materials and equipment against approved shop
drawings at time of delivery. Immediately return for replacement or repair any
equipment or materials damaged or not meeting the requirements of the approved shop
drawings.
C.
Storage and Protection: Label all equipment and materials after they have been
inspected. Store all equipment and materials in dry, covered, ventilated location.
Protect from harm in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Package and clearly label all spare parts to identify their contents and the
equipment for which the parts are intended.
B.
Provide the following spare parts.
1.
Columbus PS
One pressure switch of each range furnished.
15122-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Pressure Switches:
a.
2.2
Mercoid
GENERAL DESIGN DATA

A.
Provide components to operate on 115 volt ac, single phase, 60 hertz electrical service
unless otherwise specified.
B.
Provide two-wire transmitter power supplies in local panels as required.
C.
Provide fuses or switches for equipment as recommended by the instrument

manufacturer.
D.
Furnish all necessary accessories for installation, including mounting brackets, floor
stands, hardware and like items.
E.
Mount stainless steel nameplates on all field mounted instruments. Include serial
number, model number, and calibration data in both engineering and process input
units.
F.
Provide tool kits and test equipment, as recommended by the manufacturer, necessary
for assembling, calibrating and maintaining equipment.
2.3
PRESSURE SWITCHES
A.
Snap-action switch which closes on increase in pressure .
B.
Contact rating: 15 amps at 120 volts, ac operation.
C.
Minimum pressure rating: 150 psig
D.
Adjustable range: 5-150 psig.
E.
Minimum dead-band: 5 psig
F.
Minimum dead-band adjustment of 3 psig
G.
Provide switch with weather proof enclosure.
Columbus PS
15122-3
2.4
SHUTOFF COCKS
A.
Provide shutoff cocks for each process connection constructed of brass.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General
1.
Install equipment in the locations shown and as specified. Design equipment to

fit the space available, the general overall equipment dimensions as shown and
in coordination with the arrangement of adjacent equipment.
2.
Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for a
complete and functioning instrumentation and control system.
3.
Install, make final connections to, adjust, test and start-up all instrumentation.
Install instruments in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Sensing Devices :
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Locate pressure tap at three or nine o'clock position on pipe.

Provide ball valve at the process tap.
Provide block and bleed valves at the transmitter for calibration checks.
On startup, bleed sensing line through bleed valve and fittings.

A.
Inspections
1.
Preliminary Inspection - demonstrate that each instrument:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Has not been damaged by transportation or installation

Has been properly installed
Has no mechanical defects
Is in proper alignment
Has been properly connected
Testing and calibration
1.
Test all control functions and interlocks to confirm that the instruments operate
as shown and as specified.
2.
Calibrate instrumentation in presence of the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

Confirm that loop is functioning and calibrated prior to requesting
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER to witness calibration.
Columbus PS
15122-4
C.
3.
Calibrate all process sensing variables and electronic control signals using test
equipment (such as manometers for process pressure sensing and digital
voltmeters for electronic control signals) which is at least five times more
accurate than instruments to be calibrated. Calibrate electronic test equipment
within three months prior to testing and with accuracies traceable to NIST.
Calibrate instruments individually and as a loop where applicable. Prepare
calibration reports for each instrument.
4.
Adjust secondary functions such as alarm setpoints during initial calibration,

and demonstrate after system is placed in service. Include this information on
the calibration report.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the

manufacturer of the instruments to inspect the installation of the instruments, make
any necessary adjustments, and instruct operating personnel in the equipment's
operation and maintenance as specified in the General Requirements.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15122-5
Columbus PS
15122-6
SECTION 15124
GAUGES - PRESSURE AND VACUUM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for furnishing and installing gauges and isolating
devices as shown and specified.
B.

1.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.

1.
1.3
ASME B40.1
- Gages - Pressure, Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 1.

A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Columbus PS
Gauges
a.
Mastergauge by Marsh Instrument Company.
b.
Supergauge by U.S. Gauge, a Division of Ametek, Inc.
c.
Duragauge by Ashcroft, Industrial Valve and Instrument Division,

Dresser Industries.
15124-1
d.
2.
Diaphragm Seals
a.
b.
2.2
Helicoid Gauges by Helicoid Gauge Division, ACCO (American

Chain and Cable Company, Inc.)
Ashcroft
Mercoid
DESIGN
A.
General: Provide gauges to include pressure, vacuum, and compound gauges of

the dial-indicating bourdon tube type. Manufacture gauges to the requirements of
ASME B40.1, Gauges, Pressure and Vacuum, Indicating Dial Type - Elastic
Element, except as modified herein. Locate gauges as shown or specified. Wall
mount or independently support gauges for the following vibrating equipment:
1.
Water pumps
B.
Pressure Gauges: Provide Grade 2A pressure gauges with a range of 0 to 150 psig,
with an accuracy of 0.5 percent of the maximum scale reading.
C.
Compound Vacuum and Pressure Gauges: Provide Grade 2A compound vacuum

and pressure gauges a vacuum range of 0 to 30 inches of mercury and a pressure
range of 0 to 300 psig with an accuracy of 0.5 percent of the maximum scale
reading,
2.3
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Construct gauges with a nominal size of 4-1/2 inches. Provide bottom located
pressure connection, 1/4-inch NPT, male fitting extending a minimum of 1-1/4
inches beyond the case and with large wrench flats. Construct the bourdon tube
and fitting of bronze. Provide a weatherproof case of the wall mounted type,
constructed of shock-resistant plastic. Design the movement to be rotary gear or
helical roller type designed to minimize wear and maintain accuracy. Make
provisions for adjustment of zero reading. Manufacture dials white faces with
black numerals and markings. Provide gasket sealed glass windows to prevent
moisture and dust from entering the gauge case.
B.
Pulsation Dampening: Provide sintered metal snubbers or orifice plate restrictors

for pulsation dampening, and of Type 316 stainless steel construction. Locate
pulsation dampening devices adjacent to the pressure device.
C.
Shutoff Cocks: Provide shutoff cocks, for each gauge, constructed of Type 316
stainless.
Columbus PS
15124-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install pressure gauges in accordance with the manufacturer's
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15124-3
Columbus PS
15124-4
SECTION 15446
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing sump pumps with capacities and
details as scheduled, and installed as shown with controls, control panels and all
accessories necessary for complete installation. The required locations are as
follows:
1.
B.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Duplex Submersible Sump Pumps

Magnetic Starters
Lubrication of Equipment
Spare Parts
Following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
New Columbus Electrical Building SP-1 and SP-2 (Duplex)

Section 16121 - Wire Cable - 600 Volts and Below
PERFORMANCE
A.
Pump Curve: Design each sump pump to have a continuously rising characteristic
curve from rating point to shutoff. The characteristic curve passes through the
rating points and meets or exceeds the head and capacities specified. Design sump
pumps to operate at the following conditions without cavitation and vibration.
Columbus PS
15446-1
1.
New Electrical Building Duplex Installation:

Item
1.3
SP-1 and SP-2
Rated Capacity
30 gpm
Head at Rated Capacity
25 feet
Pump Speed
1750 rpm
Motor Size
1 hp
Control
Mercury Float
Pump Discharge Size
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Design the sump pump equipment for use on a nominal 480 volts, 3-phase, 60
hertz electrical service.
B.
Provide motor(s) with a voltage rating of 480 volts, 3 phase.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
CONTRACTOR's Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings, including arrangement

of equipment and control equipment, details of control panel, schematic control
diagrams, electrical connections, complete description of control system, and
equipment characteristics. Include following:
C.
1.
Certified pump curves, including flow, head, brake horsepower, and

efficiency
2.
General arrangement drawing showing location of pumps and control panel
3.
Cross-section drawings
4.
Parts list with materials of construction identified
5.
Motor performance characteristics
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish operator and maintenance manuals

for the pumps, valves and controls.
Columbus PS
15446-2
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Furnish all sump pump equipment specified in this Section from single pump
equipment manufacturer if available.
A.
Division 1 and as follows.
B.
Acceptance: Accept pump equipment on-site in factory packing. Inspect for

damage.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Provide following spare parts for each type of pump delivered and
securely wrapped or boxed, indexed and tagged with complete information for use
and recording.
1.
One assembled pumping unit for each size and type provided
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
3.
2.2
Weil Pump Co.

Pacific Pump Co.
Hydro-Matic Pump Co.
MATERIALS
A.
Duplex Submersible Pumps at New Electrical Building: Provide ejector type

submersible pumps with stainless steel shaft, double mechanical seals, factorylubricated ball bearings, and extra heavy-duty waterproof casing of close-grained
cast iron with integrally cast legs for supporting pump on bottom of sump. Provide
cast-iron, nonclog impeller capable of passing 2-inch solids.
1.
Weil Pump Co. Series 14130.
2.
Provide motors as specified in Section 16220.
3.
Provide liquid level controls consisting of NEMA 6 sealed mercury float

switches for pump start and pump stop for each pump and high water alarm,
Columbus PS
15446-3
(2-pole type for local and remote alarm circuit), with height adjustable on 1inch stainless steel support rod. Position float switches for liquid level
controls and alarm as follows and at levels as indicated on the Drawings.
Switch No. 1 - Float switch opens control holding circuit on liquid drop.
Switch No. 2 - Float switch starts one pump through electric alternator in
control panel on liquid rise.
Switch No. 3 - Float switch starts second pump liquid rise.
Switch No. 4 - High water alarm wired to operate audible and visual alarm
on pump control panel.
Pump(s) continue to operate until Float Switch No. 1 opens
control holding circuit.
4.
Provide heavy-duty waterproof power cables rated at 600 volts and control
cables rated at 600 volts, with sufficient slack to permit pump removal from
sump for servicing without disconnecting the cables.
5.
Provide prewired control panel for wall mounting with top of cabinet 6 feet
above floor. Panel consists of U.L. Inc. approved, side-hinged NEMA 4,
gasketed, weatherproof enclosure containing following:
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
B.
Circuit breaker disconnect switches with lockout handles

Magnetic starters with overload and low voltage protection
Test-Off-Automatic selector switches
Electric alternator
Control circuit transformers for pump control circuits
Control circuit transformer with disconnect switch for high
water alarm circuit
Red pump running lights
Manual reset buttons (3-coil overload)
Alarm bell and blue alarm light mounted on panel door
Alarm silencing switch
Numbered and wired terminal strip with extra terminals wired from
alarm contacts
Magnetic Starters: Provide magnetic starters that meet the requirements of Section
16055.
Columbus PS
15446-4
C.
Lubrication of Equipment: Provide equipment with internal or concealed bearings

lubrication fittings extended to accessible location outside casing, excepting
hermetically sealed units with lifetime lubrication.
1.
Lubricate prior to start-up, and at recommended intervals before turning

equipment over to the OWNER. Provide linen tag or heavy duty shipping
tag attached to each piece of equipment showing date of lubrication and
name and number of lubricant used. Provide typewritten list, in triplicate, of
each item lubricated and type of lubricant used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install pump units in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and

approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1.
1.
Clean before pump installation.
2.
Complete all piping and wiring, make adjustments to equipment to provide

complete operating system.
3.
Provide the duplex sump pump installation at the New Electrical Building
with a 1/2-inch thick aluminum floor plate with separate openings and
covers for 12- by 18-inch inspection-cleanout access, outside air vent, and
individual pump installation. Provide each pump with discharge pipe, water
level control device, and electric cables to pass through separate openings in
cover to permit service removal without disturbing other equipment.
Provide openings with aluminum covers, gasketed, bolted to floor plate with
rustproof bolts.
4.
Equip each discharge pipe or vent opening in cover or floor plate with
cast-iron flange collar with tapered (Buna-N) gasket and rustproof bolts to
achieve gastight seal around pipe; and, provide rubber grommet to seal cable
openings in sump cover for each power and control cable.
5.
Provide specified rubber flap type or ball type check valve, union and gate
valve in each pump discharge pipe in manner to permit pump unit to be
disconnected and removed separately.
6.
Provide check valve with flanged connection and with full pipe area when
open, quick closing and quiet in operation, and recommended for sewage
service by manufacturer. Provide Series 100 replaceable reinforced Buna-N
rubber flapper swing check valve as manufactured by APCO/Valve and
Primer Corp., a Type 50 phenolic ball check valve with rubber seat as
manufactured by Flomatic Corp., or equal.
Columbus PS
15446-5
7.
3.2
Provide sump pump discharge pipe and fittings having threaded or flanged
joints, or both, up to the gravity collector line.

A.
3.3
Control System: Demonstrate that pump equipment operates as specified with the
control system.
A.
Manufacturer's Service Representative:

Provide services of qualified
representative of manufacturer to inspect installation, make any necessary
adjustments, test equipment, and instruct operating personnel in operation and
maintenance of sump pumping equipment.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15446-6
SECTION 15535
REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Refrigeration piping and piping specialties used for air
conditioning applications.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.2
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers

Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification
Section 15900 - HVAC Controls
Section 16121 - Wire and Cable - 600 Volts and Below
REFERENCES
A.

1.
ASHRAE 15
2.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code SEC IX - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications
3.
ASME B31.5
- Refrigeration Piping
4.
ASME B31.9
- Building Services Piping
5.
AWS A5.8
- Brazing Filler Metal
6.
AWS BRH
- Brazing Handbook
7.
ARI 760
- Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants
Columbus PS
- Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
15535-1
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data: Provide the manufacturer product data for each type of valve and
for each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the layout of refrigerant piping,
specialties, and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube
sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show the interface and spatial
relationships between piping and proximate to equipment.
D.
Brazer's Certification: Submit signed qualification certificates certifying that

brazers comply with the requirements specified under "Quality Assurance".
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping
specialties, for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Qualify brazing processes and brazing

operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section
IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Conform work to ANSI/ASME B31.9 as applicable.
1.5

A.
General: Deliver, and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with
labeling in place.
B.
Protection: Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by

leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation.
Columbus PS
15535-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
General: List includes acceptable manufacturers.

equivalent products may be submitted for approval.
1.
2.2
Other manufacturers of
Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

a.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric.
b.
Danfoss Electronics, Inc.
c.
EATON Corporation, Control Div.
d.
Henry Valve Company.
e.
Parker-Hannifin Corporation, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Division.
f.
Sporlan Valve Company.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Pipe and Tubing Materials: Provide Type K copper tubing complying with
requirements specified in Section 15080.
1.
Copper Tubing Fittings:

Provide copper fittings complying with
2.
Joining Materials: Provide joining materials complying with requirements

specified in Section 15080.
Valves: Provide complete valve assemblies, UL-listed, and designed to conform to

ARI 760.
1.
Globe: 450 psig maximum operating pressure, 275 degrees F maximum

operating temperature; cast bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass
wing cap and bolted bonnet; replaceable resilient seat disc; plated steel stem.
Provide valves capable of being repacked under pressure. Provide straight
through or angle pattern valves, with solder-end connections.
2.
Check Valves - Smaller Than 7/8 inch: 500 psig maximum operating
pressure, 300 degrees F maximum operating temperature; cast brass body,
with removable piston, Teflon seat, and stainless steel spring; straight
through globe design. Provide straight through pattern valves, with solderend connections.
Columbus PS
15535-3
C.
3.
Check Valves - 7/8 inch and Larger: 450 psig maximum operating pressure,
300 degrees F maximum operating temperature; cast bronze body, with cast
bronze or forged brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically
retained Teflon seat disc. Provide straight through or angle pattern valves,
with solder-end connections.
4.
Solenoid Valves: 240 degrees F temperature rating, 500 psig working

pressure; packless construction, forged brass, with Teflon valve seat and
stainless steel core, two-way straight through pattern, and solder end
connections. Provide manual operator to open valve. Furnish complete with
NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and normally
closed moisture resisting holding coil.
5.
Evaporator Pressure Regulating Valves: Pilot-operated, forged brass or cast

bronze; complete with pilot operator, stainless steel bottom spring, pressure
gauge tappings, standard coil; and wrought copper fittings for solder end
connections.
6.
Thermal Expansion Valves: Straight through or angle design, with solderend connections, thermostatic adjustable, modulating type; size as required
for specific evaporator requirements, and factory set for proper evaporator
superheat requirements. Provide packless type valves with a forged brass
body and corrosion resistant brass and stainless steel trim, complete with
sensing bulb, a distributor having a side connection for hot gas bypass line,
external superheat adjustments, and an external equalizer line.
7.
Hot Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable type, sized to provide capacity reduction
beyond the last step of compressor unloading; and wrought copper fittings
for solder end connections.
Refrigeration Piping Specialties: Provide complete refrigeration piping specialty

assemblies designed to conform to ARI 760, and UL-listed.
1.
Strainers: 500 psig maximum working pressure; forged brass body with
monel 80-mesh screen, and screwed cleanout plug; Y-pattern, with solder
end connections.
2.
Moisture/liquid Indicators: 500 psig maximum operation pressure, 200

degrees F maximum operating temperature; forged brass body, with
replaceable polished optical viewing window, moisture sensing element
which changes color when an unsafe moisture level exists in the system, and
solder-end connections.
3.
Filter-driers: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring,
and spring, gasketed ductile iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and
Columbus PS
15535-4
wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with
replaceable filter-drier core kit, including gaskets, as follows:
a.
High capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration and extra

drying capacity.
4.
Suction Line Filter-Drier: 350 psig maximum operation pressure, 225

degrees F maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought copper
fittings for solder end connections. Permanent filter element with a molded
felt core surrounded by a desiccant, for removal of acids and moisture for
refrigerant vapor.
5.
Suction Line Filters: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; "T" type
corrosion resistant plated steel shell, flange ring, and spring, gasketed ductile
iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder
end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter core kit, including
gaskets, as follows:
a.
High capacity filter kit to provide micronic filtration.
6.
Flanged Unions: 400 psig maximum working pressure, 330 degrees F

maximum operating temperature; two brass tailpiece adapters for solder end
connections to copper tubing; flanges for 7/8 inch through 1-5/8 inch unions
of forged steel, and for 2-1/8 inch through 3-1/8 inch of ductile iron; four
plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket. Have a factoryapplied rust-resistant coating provided for flanges and bolts.
7.
Flexible Connectors: 500 psig maximum operating pressure; seamless tin

bronze or stainless steel core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder
connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum
7 inch in length.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
General: Examine rough-in for refrigeration piping systems to verify actual

locations of piping connections prior to installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Piping: Install refrigeration piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 and

as specified in Section 15109.
1.
Columbus PS
Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize

pressure drop.
15535-5
2.
Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other
fitting as possible.
3.
Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and

other equipment.
4.
Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls,
or ceilings, sized to permit the installation of full thickness insulation.
5.
Insulate suction and liquid lines. Do not install insulation until system
testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated.
6.
Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors with an equal length, and
pipe identically and symmetrically.
7.
Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper

tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury.
8.
Slope refrigeration piping as follows:

a.
Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2-inch per 10 feet
downward slope away from the compressor.
b.
Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward
slope to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may
cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor
in damaging slugs.
c.
Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to
entrain oil in vertical runs.
d.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
9.
Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above
ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
10.
Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other
permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation
applications, with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient
space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
11.
Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with
the level side down.
Columbus PS
15535-6
B.
Valves and Specialties: Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to

allow for servicing and inspection, and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
1.
Install globe valves on each side of strainers and driers, in liquid and suction
lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
2.
Install a full sized, 3-valve bypass around each drier.
3.
Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass
valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at the top.
a.
4.
Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Section 16121.

Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
Thermostatic expansion valves may be mounted in any position, as close as

possible to the evaporator.
a.
Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount the distributor directly

on the expansion valve outlet.
b.
Install the valve in such a location so that the diaphragm case is

warmer than the bulb.
c.
Secure the bulb to a clean, straight, horizontal section of the suction

line using two bulb straps. Do not mount the bulb in a trap or at the
bottom of the line.
d.
Where external equalizer lines are required make the connection

where it will clearly reflect the pressure existing in the suction line at
the bulb location.
5.
Install pressure regulating and relieving valves as required by ASHRAE

Standard 15.
6.
Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve,

hot gas bypass valve, compressor suction valve, and as required to protect
refrigerant piping system components.
7.
Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and

upstream of thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
a.
8.
Columbus PS
Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-1/8 inch OD,

using a bypass line.
Install filter/driers upstream of solenoid and expansion valves.
15535-7
9.
Install unions to allow for removal of solenoid valves, pressure regulating

valves, expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and
evaporators.
10.
Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection of

compressors and condensers.
C.
Hangers and Supports: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section
15060. Install hangers and supports as specified in Section 15109.
D.
Pipe Joint Construction: Provide brazed joints complying with the procedures
contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."
1.
WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly

toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes and provide adequate
ventilation.
2.
CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to
prevent damage. When sight glasses are being installed, remove the glass.
Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of
refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do no apply heat near the bulb of the
expansion valve.
3.
Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (ie., nitrogen or
carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.
4.
Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to the proper and uniform
brazing temperature.
E.
Equipment Connections: The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of

piping, fittings, and specialties. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow
servicing and maintenance.
F.
System Charging: Charge the system using the following procedure:

1.
Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
2.
Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until a temperature of 35

degrees F is indicated on the vacuum dehydration indicator.
3.
During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in the
piping.
4.
Maintain a vacuum on the system for minimum of 5 hours after closing the
valve between the vacuum pump and the system.
Columbus PS
15535-8
3.3
5.
Break the vacuum with refrigerant gas, and allow the pressure to build up to
2 psi.
6.
Complete charging of system, using a new filter dryer core in the charging
line. Provide full operating charge.

A.
Inspection: Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in

accordance with ASME Code B31.5, Chapter VI.
B.
Repairs: Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on

procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut-down, troubleshooting,
servicing, and preventative maintenance of refrigeration piping valves and
refrigeration piping specialties, as specified in Division 1.
3.4

A.
General: Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and

adjust the thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat
requirements.
B.
Adjust Controls and Safeties: Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment with new materials and products.
C.
Procedures: Before installation of copper tubing, clean the tubing and fittings
using the following cleaning procedure:
1.
Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth
through the tubing by means of a wire or an electrician's tape.
2.
Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube
or pipe. Continue this procedure until the cloth is not discolored by dirt.
3.
Draw a clean, lintless cloth, first saturated with compressor oil and then
squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe to remove any remaining lint.
Inspect the tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.
4.
Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15535-9
Columbus PS
15535-10
SECTION 15670
CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
Air-cooled condensing units complete with refrigerant
compressors, condensing coils, condenser fans, controls, and accessories.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 15072 - Vibration Isolation
Section 15535 - Refrigeration Piping and Specialties
Section 15730 - Packaged Air conditioning Units
Section 16055 - Electrical Requirements for Shop Assembled Equipment
REFERENCES
A.

1.
ASHRAE 15
- Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
2.
NEMA MG 1
- Motors and Generators
3.
UL 207
- Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories,

Non-Electrical
4.
UL 303
- Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing, and

Compressor Units
5.
UL 465
- Air Conditioners, Central Cooling
6.
ARI 210/240
- Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump

Equipment
7.
ARI 520
- Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors, and

Condensing Units
Columbus PS
15670-1
1.3
8.
ASHRAE 23
- Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement

Condensing Units
9.
ARI 270
- Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment
10.
ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Conservation in New Building Design
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Submit catalog product data indicating dimensions,
general assembly, specialties and accessories, weights, rated capacities,
performance ratings, materials and finishes, controls, electrical requirements, and
wiring diagrams.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly,

equipment locations, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and
location and size of field connections. Include schematic layouts showing
condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant compressors, refrigeration piping, and
accessories required for complete system.
D.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit Operations and Maintenance

Manuals as specified in Division 1 including manufacturer's descriptive literature
including installation and operation instructions, start-up instructions, controls,
accessories, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
General: Provide equipment from a company specializing in the design and

manufacture of condensing units which has a minimum of 5 years documented
experience, and issues complete catalog data on these products.
A.
Division 1.
B.
Shipping and Handling: Comply with the manufacturers instructions for rigging,
unloading and transportation of units.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store equipment in its original shipping crates or

containers, with labeling in place until time of installation. Store equipment in
clean, dry place and protect coils from physical damage.
Columbus PS
15670-2
1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Furnish one complete change of lubricating oil.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Air Cooled Condensing Units.

a.
b.
2.2
The Trane Company

Carrier Corporation
MATERIALS
A.
General: Factory fabricate, assemble, test and finish condensing units with
indicated capacities and characteristics, and including all necessary accessories for
complete installation.
B.
Air Cooled Condensing Units: Provide air cooled condensing units of minimum
size, capacity and arrangement shown and scheduled, meeting the following
requirements.
1.
Provide factory assembled, air cooled condensing unit prepiped and

prewired, comprising refrigeration compressor equipment, condenser coil,
condenser fans and motors, magnetic starters, controls, and fan guards
mounted in heavy gauge steel casing. Construct casing of one piece welded
assembly with removable panels for access to all components and protect
exterior surfaces with baked enamel.
2.
Provide hermetic type compressor with forced feed lubrication provided by

positive displacement reversible oil pump, a crankcase sight glass, and
electric crankcase heater. Provide compressor equipped with suction and
discharge shutoff valves, and mounted on spring vibration isolators.
3.
Provide operating and safety controls for condensing unit including

refrigerant high and low pressure safety cutouts, low oil pressure cutout, and
compressor winding thermostat cutout. Provide condensing unit complete
with circuit breaker and magnetic starter, control circuit fusing and control
power transformer. Provide necessary relays, timers and manual reset
overloads.
Columbus PS
15670-3
2.3
4.
Provide condenser coil constructed of seamless copper tubing mechanically

bonded to heavy duty aluminum plate fins. Test condenser coils at factory
at 425 psig air pressure under water, and vacuum dehydrate at 175 degrees F
minimum.
5.
Fabricate each condensing unit at factory as one unit including all internal
piping and with internal wiring to identified terminal strips in unit control
panel.
6.
Provide direct-driven condenser fans of propeller type, with all exposed fan
and shaft surfaces weatherproofed and arranged to give vertical air
discharge, and with permanently sealed ball bearings.
7.
Provide factory wired controls mounted in an accessible location. Provide

thermal and current sensitive overload devices for compressor motor
protection. Provide solid state compressor protection control system to
prevent short cycling due to safety devices or power interruptions, controlled
by positive acting timer. Provide accessory equipment including filter-drier,
liquid line moisture indicating sight glass, refrigeration tubing, and
insulation package. Charge system with recommended refrigerant and oil.
8.
Provide controls as specified in Section 15900.
9.
Provide the condenser coil plate fins with a removable exterior protective
guard to protect fins from damage.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Provide units constructed and rated in accordance with ARI 210/240. Test in
accordance with ASHRAE 23.
B.
Provide units with Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) and Coefficient of

Performance (COP) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
General: Examine condensing units at the time of delivery for damaged or missing
components. Do not proceed with installation of units until all items found
defective have been corrected.
Columbus PS
15670-4
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install all units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make all necessary
adjustments to equipment to provide complete and satisfactory operation upon
completion of installation.
B.
Connect to electrical service.
C.
Install units on vibration isolation. Refer to Section 15072.
D.
Install units on concrete base as indicated. Refer to Section 03310.
E.
Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators.

Section 15535 and comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
F.
Supply the initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit. Replace
losses of refrigerant and oil.
3.3
Refer to

A.
Operation and Checkout: Provide initial and cooling season start-up, and winter
season shut down during first year of operation, including routine servicing and
check out.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of

the manufacturer to provide instruction on proper installation of the equipment,
inspect the completed installation, make any necessary adjustments, participate in
the startup of the equipment, participate in the field testing of the equipment and
place the equipment in trouble-free operation, and instruct operating personnel in
its operation and maintenance as specified in Division 1.
C.
Tests: After installation of the units, control equipment and all appurtenances,
subject each unit to a field running test as specified in Division 1, under actual
operating conditions.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15670-5
Columbus PS
15670-6
SECTION 15730
PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Packaged indoor air conditioning units.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.2

Section 15110 - Valves
Section 15535 - Refrigeration Piping and Specialties
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1 - Pressure
Vessels
2.
ANSI/NEMA 250 -
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)
3.
ANSI/NFPA 90A -
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation

Systems
4.
ARI 210/240
Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment
5.
ASHRAE 15
Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
SUBMITTALS:
A.

1.
Columbus PS
15730-1
B.
Product Data: Submit the manufacturer's technical product data, including rated
capacities of the selected model clearly indicated, weights of units, furnished
specialties and accessories, and installation and start-up instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit the manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings

indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of
assembly of components.
D.
Service Connections:
Indicate drain, electrical and refrigeration rough-in
connections on shop drawings and product data.
E.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit the manufacturer's electrical requirements for power

supply wiring to packaged air conditioning units. Submit the manufacturer's
ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final
installation of packaged air conditioning units and controls. Clearly differentiate
between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be fieldinstalled.
F.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and a parts list for each packaged air
conditioning unit, air purifier unit, control, and accessory; including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in an operation
and maintenance manual as specified in Division 1.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A for the installation of

packaged air conditioning units.
B.
Manufacturer:
Provide equipment from a Company specializing in the
manufacture of the products specified in this section with a minimum of 5 years
documented experience.
1.5

A.
Division 1.
B.
Handling: Handle packaged air conditioning units, and components carefully to

prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged packaged
air conditioning units, or components. Replace damaged units with new units.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store packaged air conditioning units, and components in
a clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris,
and physical damage.
Columbus PS
15730-2
D.
1.6
Unloading: Comply with the manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions

for unloading packaged air conditioning units, and moving units to final location
for installation.
SPARE PARTS
A.
Furnish the following spare parts.

1.
One complete set of filters for each packaged air conditioning unit.
2.
One complete set of belts for each belt driven piece of equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Packaged Indoor Air Conditioning Units

a.
b.
2.2
Carrier Corporation
The Trane Company
PACKAGED INDOOR AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A.
General: Provide suspended type air conditioning units that are factory fabricated
and assembled, factory tested and factory finished, and of a size, capacity,
arrangement and characteristics as specified and scheduled. Provide units with
ARI-rated cooling capacity. Provide units having DX refrigeration. Provide each
unit comprised of casing and frame, evaporator fan, controls and filters, cooling
coils, electric heating coils, and suitable connections for externally mounted aircooled condensing unit.
B.
Casing: Provide casing constructed of heavy gauge zinc coated sheet steel with
removable access panels, designed for duct connections, and finished with a high
grade semi-gloss baked enamel color as selected. Provide closed-cell gasketting
where modules are joined.
C.
Insulation: Provide double-wall modules insulated with 2 inch thick 1-1/2 density
acoustic insulation which complies with NFPA-90A requirements.
D.
Fans: Provide forward-curved aluminum centrifugal evaporator fan, statically and

dynamically balanced, belt driven by permanent split capacitor motors with oilers
for bearing lubrication.
Columbus PS
15730-3
E.
Evaporator Coil: Provide an evaporator coil of nonferrous construction with

seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Factory test the
coil for leakproofness at 300 psig air pressure under water. Clean and dehydrate
the refrigerant system and completely charge the system with refrigerant and
recommended oil before shipment. Provide the coil with a remote bulb thermal
expansion valve for each refrigerant circuit.
F.
Drain Pan: Provide insulated coil condensate drain pan constructed of zinc-coated
steel with an additional coat of insulating sealer and a drain line connection
extended from the drain pan to discharge at an approved drain point.
G.
Electric Heating Coil: Provide the electric heating coil of the size and capacity
shown, comprising heating elements fabricated of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent
chromium wire, insulated by floating ceramic bushings, supported in an
aluminized steel frame with stainless steel terminals insulated with phenolic
bushings. Provide the units listed by UL, Inc. built to meet the requirements of the
NEC and tested dielectrically at 2,000 volts before shipment.
Provide the electric heating coil complete with disc type manual and automatic
reset thermal cutouts, built-in magnetic contactors, control transformer, built-in
circuit breaker and disconnect switch, fan interlock relay, and pilot lights to
indicate when the heater is on and when overheating. Factory wired heater
elements and controls to terminal strips with internal wiring suitable for 105
degrees C, all contained in a NEMA Type 3R enclosure and conforming to Section
16055.
H.
Air Flow Switch: Provide an airflow switch factory installed on the unit wired into
the electric heating coil control circuit so that the heater cannot operate unless
there is adequate airflow through the heater.
I.
Filters: Provide 2 inch thick throwaway filters with rated efficiency of not less
than 25 to 30 percent when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52-76 method.
J.
Controls: Provide controls as specified in Section 15900 and conformance in

Section 16055. Provide a control panel complete with motor starter, contactors,
control power transformers, disconnect switches and other devices needed to
provide a complete installation. Design control panels for operation with a 480
volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz power supply.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
General: Examine areas and conditions under which packaged air conditioning
units are to be installed. Do not proceed with installation work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
Columbus PS
15730-4
B.
Field Verification: Verify that the structural support and the ceiling system are
ready to receive Work.
C.
Service Connections: Examine rough-in for refrigeration, and condensate drainage

piping, and electrical conduits, to verify the proper locations of connections prior
to installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install units in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and

approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1.
B.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by the manufacturer but not
specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish a copy of the manufacturer's field wiring
diagram with equipment. Verify that the electrical wiring installation is in
accordance with the manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements
specified in Section 16055. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until the
wiring installation is acceptable.
C.
Drain Piping: Connect each unit drain to the nearest indirect waste connection. At
drain pans provide a trap constructed at least 1-inch deeper than the fan pressure.
3.3

A.
Start-Up: Start up packaged units, in accordance with the manufacturer's start-up

instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B.

inspect the completed installation, make any necessary adjustments, participate in
the startup of the equipment, participate in the field testing of the equipment and
place the equipment in trouble-free operation, and instruct the operating personnel
in its operation and maintenance as specified in Division 1.
C.
Tests: After installation of the packaged air conditioning units, control equipment
and all appurtenances, subject each unit to a field running test as specified in
Division 1, under actual operating conditions.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15730-5
Columbus PS
15730-6
SECTION 15761
AIR COILS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Heat transfer coils utilizing refrigerants as heat transfer media
for installation in air systems.
B.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ARI 410
Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
2.
NEC
National Electrical Code.
3.
UL 1096
Electric Central Air Heating Equipment.
4.
SMACNA -
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Submit product data indicating coil and frame
configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in
dimensions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating coil and frame configurations,
dimensions, materials, rows, connections and rough-in dimensions.
D.
Diagrams: Submit complete wiring and control diagrams.
Columbus PS
15761-1
E.
1.4
Quality Control: Submit manufacturer's certificate that coil capacities, pressure

drops and selection procedures meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
General: Provide equipment from a company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
A.
Division 1.
B.
Storage and Protection: Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving
them in the shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors, in a clean, dry
place.
Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
General: List includes acceptable manufacturers.

equivalent products may be submitted for approval.
1.
Direct Expansion Cooling Coils.

a.
b.
2.2
Other manufacturers of
Carrier Corporation.
The Trane Company.
COILS - GENERAL
A.
2.3
General Design: Factory fabricate and assemble, factory test, and factory finish air
coils, with indicated capacities and characteristics, and including all necessary
accessories for complete installation.
DIRECT EXPANSION COOLING COILS
A.
General: Provide units meeting the minimum face area and maximum air friction
drop as scheduled.
B.
Headers: Construct headers of seamless copper tubes with silver brazed joints.
Columbus PS
15761-2
C.
Liquid Distributors: Provide copper venturi type distributor with seamless copper
distributor tubes.
D.
Tubes: Provide tubes of 5/8 inch OD seamless copper arranged in parallel or

staggered pattern, expanded into fins, with brazed joints.
E.
Fins: Provide aluminum continuous plate type fins with full fin collars or
individual helical finned tube type wound under tension.
F.
Testing: Provide coils air tested under water at 300 psig for working pressure of
250 psig; clean, dehydrate and seal with dry nitrogen charge.
G.
Accessory:
15535.
Provide refrigeration accessory equipment as specified in Section
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Delivery: Examine units at the time of delivery for damaged or missing

components. Do not proceed with the installation of units until all items found
defective upon examination have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install coils in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and

approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1. Make all necessary
adjustments to the equipment to provide a complete and satisfactory operation
upon completion of the installation.
B.
Removal Space: Install to permit removal of coils. Provide no less space for
removal than minimum as recommended by the manufacturer.
C.
Supports: Support coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double

angle frames and secure to casings. Arrange supports to avoid piercing drain pans.
Provide an airtight seal between coil and duct or casing.
D.
Protection: Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent
fins.
E.
Alignment: Install coils level.
F.
Connection: Make connections to coils with unions and flanges.
G.
Moisture Eliminators: For cooling coils where the air velocity exceeds 550 ft/min,
provide six break moisture eliminators of 24 gauge galvanized steel.
Columbus PS
15761-3
H.
Drain Pans: Provide drain pan and drain connections for cooling coils. Fabricate
drain pans from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Extend the drain pan 3 inches from
face of coil entering air side, 6 inches from face of coil leaving air side, and 4
inches from face of eliminators. Pipe drain pans individually to floor drain with
water seal trap.
I.
Sight Glass: On refrigerant coils, provide a sight glass in the liquid line within 12
inches of the coil.
J.
Insulation: Insulate headers located outside air flow as specified for piping. Refer
to Section 15080.
3.3

A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide the services of a qualified representative of

the manufacturer to inspect the installation of air coils, certify that it meets the
manufacturer's recommendations, and instruct the operating personnel in their
operation and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15761-4
SECTION 15765
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Electric unit heaters.
B.

1.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code.
2.
ARI 410
Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils.
3.
ASHRAE 33 -
Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and

Heating Coils.
4.
ARI 440
Room Fan Coil Air Conditioners.
5.
UL 883
Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan

Heater Units.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for terminal heat transfer units
showing dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and
finishes of materials, and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions,

construction details, and field connection details.
D.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit the manufacturer's electrical requirements for power

supply wiring to terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring
Columbus PS
15765-1
diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between those
portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
E.
1.4
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication

instructions, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in operation and maintenance
manuals as specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide equipment from firms regularly engaged in

the manufacture of terminal units, of the types and sizes required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years.
B.
UL Compliance: Provide electrical components for terminal units which are listed
and labeled by UL.
1.5

A.
Division 1.
B.
Protection Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage,

breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units or
components, replace them with new units.
C.
Storage: Store terminal units and components in a clean dry place, protected from
weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
D.
Handling: Comply with the Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for
unloading terminal units, and moving them to final location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Electric Unit Heaters

a.
b.
Columbus PS
Emerson-Chromalox Div. of Emerson Electric Co.

Industrial Engineering and Equipment Co.
15765-2
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Electric Unit Heaters: Provide electric unit heaters of the minimum size, heating
and air capacities, electric characteristics and arrangement shown, meeting the
following requirements.
1.
Provide each unit comprised of a dynamically balanced aluminum blade

propeller fan direct-driven by a totally enclosed continuous duty motor,
metal sheathed electric heating elements, power magnetic contactors,
thermostat, and automatic reset thermal overload cutout, all mounted in a
heavy gauge metal cabinet. Construct the cabinet of phosphate treated steel
finished in baked enamel.
2.
Provide electrical components factory prewired to a terminal strip. Provide

the units noted for three phase electric supply wired to give balanced
electrical circuits. Provide an integral transformer to give a low voltage
control circuit if the power supply is other than 115 volt single phase.
3.
Provide electric unit heaters listed by the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and
meeting the requirements of the National Electric Code.
4.
Provide ceiling or wall mounting brackets where required, and a fan guard.
5.
Suspend unit heaters by hanger rods and neoprene vibration isolators

meeting the requirements specified in Section 15072.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
General: Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be
installed. Verify that the required utilities are available, in the proper location, and
ready for use. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install heat transfer units, in accordance with the manufacturer's

B.
Unit Heaters: Hang unit heaters from the building structure, with pipe hangers
anchored to the building, not from piping. Mount the units as high as possible to
maintain the greatest headroom unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Electrical Requirements: Install electric heating equipment including devices

furnished by the manufacturer but not factory-mounted. Furnish a copy of the
Columbus PS
15765-3
manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal. Verify that the electrical wiring

installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's submittals and the installation
3.3

A.

the manufacturer to provide as specified in Division 1.
B.
Tests: After installation of the heat transfer units, control equipment and all
appurtenances, subject each unit to a field running test as specified in Division 1,
under actual operating conditions.
3.4

A.
General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed

surfaces of units, vacuum clean terminal coils and the inside of cabinets.
B.
Touch-Up: Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets,

using finish materials furnished by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15765-4
SECTION 15810
DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Ductwork materials, construction, hangers and supports, and

cleaning.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers

Section 10210 - Metal Louvers
Section 15820 - Ductwork Accessories
Section 15850 - Air Outlets and Inlets
REFERENCES
A.

1.
ASHRAE
ASHRAE
Design
2.
ASHRAE
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Systems and

Equipment; Duct Construction
3.
ASTM A 36/A36M -
Specification for Structural Work
4.
ASTM A 90/A90M -
Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Iron or Steel Articles
5.
ASTM A 653
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip

Process
6.
ASTM A 700
Practices for Packaging, Marking and Loading

Methods for Steel Products for Domestic
Shipment
Columbus PS
15810-1
Handbook
Fundamentals;
Duct
1.3
7.
ASTM C 411
Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of

High-Temperature Thermal Insulation
8.
ASTM C 916
Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal

Insulation
9.
ASTM C 920
Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
10.
ASTM C 1071
Specification
Insulation
11.
ASTM E 84
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials
12.
AWS D1.1
Structural Welding Code - Steel
13.
AWS D9.1
Sheet Metal Welding Code
14.
NFPA 90A
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems
15.
NFPA 90B
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air

Conditioning Systems
16.
NFPA 255
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials
17.
SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards
18.
UL 181
Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors
for
Thermal
and
Acoustical
DEFINITIONS
A.
Sealing Requirements Definitions:

system sealing requirements:
The following definitions apply for duct
1.
Seams: Joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of airflow) oriented

edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct
surface connections made on the duct perimeter are deemed to be joints.
2.
Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; socalled duct collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal
connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct,
plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.
Columbus PS
15810-2
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.5
Design Requirements: The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to
select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of the
air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system
must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout
modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the
original design results without increasing the system total pressure.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Provide all submittals, including the following as specified in Division 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit 1/4 scale shop drawings indicating duct systems routing,
sizes, fitting details, reinforcing, support, required clearances, and installed
accessories and devices.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Provide materials from a company specializing in the design and

manufacture of ductwork and duct fittings having a minimum of 5 years
documented experience, which issues complete catalog data on these products.
B.
Codes: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS
D1.1 for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1 Certify that each welder
qualification is current.
1.7

A.
General: Deliver, store, and handle all products and materials as specified in
Division 1.
B.
Delivery: Deliver sealant and fire-stopping materials to site in original unopened

containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and
designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store and handle sealant fire-stopping materials in

compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
Store ductwork and duct fittings in a clean dry place and protect from physical
damage.
Columbus PS
15810-3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Gasket for flanged connections for sheet metal ductwork

a.
2.2
Ductmate Industries 440 Butyl Gasket
DUCTWORK
A.
General: Provide ductwork and plenums conforming to the more stringent

recommendations of the current editions of the ASHRAE Handbook and of the
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", and "Accepted Industry
Practice for Industrial Duct Construction".
B.
Steel Ductwork: Provide galvanized steel ductwork as follows:

1.
Galvanized sheet steel of lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, coating

designation G 90 with mill-phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts
exposed to view.
C.
Construction Material: Unless otherwise specified, provide duct reinforcing and

duct specialties constructed of the same materials as the duct, if commercially
available. Otherwise, provide such reinforcing and duct specialties fabricated of
Type 316L stainless steel. Where dissimilar metals join, isolate metals
electrolytically to prevent corrosion.
D.
Reinforcing: Reinforce ductwork to prevent sagging, flexing and drumming, and

build ductwork to be airtight at the fan static pressures scheduled.
E.
Dimensions: The dimensions of the ducts shown are not to be considered absolute;
however, any changes from dimensions indicated are subject to approval. Where it
is necessary to change dimensions of ducts, do not exceed equivalent friction loss.
1.
F.
Duct sizes noted are the actual inside dimensions.
Pressure Loss: Provide duct curves, bends, offsets, transitions and transformation
pieces to be gradual, to minimize air turbulence. In general, design duct
transformations changing air velocity for minimum loss in total pressure.
1.
Columbus PS
Refer to equipment schedules for duct system pressure and seal

classifications.
15810-4
2.3
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

A.
Construction: Construct sheet metal ducts in accordance with requirements

recommended by SMACNA and ASHRAE.
1.
Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections, such as pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations.
2.
Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20 gauge
or less, with more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel area unless they are
lined or are externally insulated. In addition, crossbreak on both diagonals
duct section surfaces exceeding 4 square feet unless the duct perimeter is
beaded at 18-inch or closer spacing.
3.
Fabricate and brace ducts to be quiet in operation.
B.
Curved Rectangular Elbows: Fabricate curved rectangular elbows with the

centerline radius of at least 1-1/2 times the duct dimension parallel to the radius.
Where space limitations require elbows with a smaller radius ratio, fabricate the
elbows with sufficient full radius turning vanes to result in a pressure loss not
greater than that for the elbow specified above.
C.
Mitered Rectangular Elbows:

vanes.
D.
Round Elbows: Fabricate round elbows with the centerline radius of at least 1-1/2
times the duct dimension parallel to the radius. Where space limitations require
elbows with a smaller radius ratio, fabricate the elbows with sufficient full radius
turning vanes to result in a pressure loss not greater than that for the elbow
specified above. Fabricate round cross-section elbows of minimum 5-piece
construction.
E.
Joints and Seams: Fabricate sheet metal rectangular joints and seams meeting the
following requirements:
Equip mitered rectangular elbows with turning
1.
Submit certified test results, material safety data sheets, and applicable spec
sheets for proprietary transverse duct connectors with shop drawings.
2.
Conform certified test results to the entire sheet and joint deflection criteria
defined by SMACNA, in Section VII, of the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual.
3.
The nonproprietary TDC/TDF connectors may be used, constructed as the

nonproprietary SMACNA T-24 Flange, whose duct construction limits are
defined on page 1-25 of the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual. No other duct construction methods concerning TDC/TDF will be
accepted.
Columbus PS
15810-5
4.
F.
G.
Fabricate longitudinal seams with the Pittsburgh lock seam on all ductwork.
Sealing Materials: Provide sealing materials as follows:

1.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not limited
to materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and
combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.
2.
Joint and Seam Sealant: Provide one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,

polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I;
formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
3.
Flanged Joint Mastics: Provide one-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric

joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use O.
4.
Flanged Connections: Provide approved gasket between all SMACNA T24, TDC/TDF flanged connections on metal ducts.
Hangers and Supports: Provide duct hangers and supports meeting the following
requirements.
1.
Building Attachments: Fasten duct hangers and supports to concrete

surfaces with steel threaded expansion type concrete anchors when cast-inplace concrete inserts are not installed. Do not cut reinforcing steel. Do not
use powder actuated concrete fasteners.
2.
Hangers: Securely support horizontal ducts from the building structure by

means of hanger rods or angle supports not more than 8 feet apart. Provide
the hanger rods sized for the weight carried, threaded at both ends, and
equipped with nuts and washers. Provide angles as duct bottom supports.
When angle hangers are used, extend the hangers from flanged duct
connections, extended stiffeners, or fabricated trapezes.
3.
Duct Attachments: Provide sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping

metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
4.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Provide steel shapes conforming to ASTM A

36/A36M as follows:
a.
Columbus PS
Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dipped

galvanized steel shapes and plates.
15810-6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
3.2
General: Except as otherwise indicated construct all ductwork as specified of

galvanized steel in accordance with SMACNA standards.
DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the
specific duct pressure classification as required.
B.
Joints: Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
C.
Fittings: Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and
shape, and connections.
D.
Duct Openings: Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate

thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for
testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure
against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install
insulation material inside a metal ring.
E.
Duct Location: Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and

horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural
and permanent enclosure elements of building. Install duct systems in shortest
route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building
and its equipment.
F.
Construction Penetrations: Determine the exact location and size of opening

required for ductwork. Core drill all penetrations through existing floors, walls or
ceilings. Chipping is not allowed in lieu of core drilling. Obtain written approval
prior to making any new penetrations through existing floors, walls or ceilings.
Drill pilot holes before core drilling to locate any interference with existing
conduits, equipment, etc. Neatly patch and seal opening after installation of new
equipment to match existing walls, floors, ceilings, etc.
G.
Clearances: Where insulated or uninsulated ducts pass through walls, floors, or

partitions, provide the opening in the construction not exceeding 1-inch clearance
on all sides. Where ducts pass through walls, floors, or partitions required to have
a fire-resistance rating and fire dampers are not required, provide the opening in
the construction not exceeding 1-inch clearance on all sides, filled solidly with an
approved material capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases
sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subject to the same NFPA 251 timetemperature fire conditions required for fire barrier penetration.
Columbus PS
15810-7
H.
Flexible Connections: Support at free end within 12 inches of flexible connection

all ducts at flexible connections with air-handling equipment and fans.
I.
Layout: Coordinate layout with lighting layouts and similar finished Work.
J.
Electrical Equipment Spaces:

Route ductwork to avoid passing through
transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
K.
Nonfire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and

exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal the space between construction
opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as
duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
L.
Seal: Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
M.
Concrete Insert: Install concrete inserts prior to placing concrete.
N.
Blank Off Panels: Blanked off unused portions of louvers with insulated panels
provided under Section 10210.
O.
Temporary Closures: During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or

taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering
ductwork system.
P.
Hanging and Supporting: Support ductwork as follows:
3.3
1.
Make provisions for supporting all ductwork, dampers, and other ductwork
accessories, where necessary.
2.
Construct, reinforce, support and brace ductwork to prevent buckling,

warping, sagging, flexing and vibrating and be quiet in operation under all
operating conditions and airtight at the fan static pressures scheduled.
3.
Securely support horizontal ducts from the building structure by means of

hanger rods or angle supports not more than 8 feet apart. Size hanger rods
for the weight carried, thread at both ends, and equip with nuts and washers.
4.
Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of
each branch intersection.

A.

the manufacturer to provide instruction on proper installation of ductwork, inspect
the completed installation, make any necessary adjustments, as specified in
Division 1.
Columbus PS
15810-8
3.4
CLEANING
A.
General: Perform cleaning Work in accordance with the following:

1.
Keep each duct system internally clean by installing only clean materials
and by providing temporary closures during the installation.
2.
Remove all loose materials and obstructions from interior of ducts.
3.
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove
accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time.
Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary
filters, or bypass during cleaning.
4.
Clean large duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect
equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass
during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning
purposes.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15810-9
Columbus PS
15810-10
SECTION 15820
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Ductwork accessories such as turning vanes, volume dampers,

splitter dampers, air extractors, duct hardware, access doors, instrument test holes,
and gravity backdraft dampers.
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
SMACNA -
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
2.
ASHRAE
Handbook - Systems and Equipment; Recommendations

pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories.
3.
NFPA 90A -
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data: Submit catalog product data indicating dimensions, assembly,

materials and finishes, and operation and performance data.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies. Provide
product data for the hardware used.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit the manufacturer's installation,

maintenance, and repair data as specified in Division 1 including a parts lists for
each type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
the operation and maintenance manual.
Columbus PS
15820-1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Provide equipment from manufacturers regularly engaged in the design and

manufacture of ductwork accessories, of the types and sizes required, which have a
minimum of 5 years documented experience and which issue complete catalog
data on these products.
A.
Division 1.
B.
Storage and Protection: Store products in a clean, dry place and protect from
physical damage in their original shipping packings, with labeling in place until the
time of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Turning Vanes.
a.
b.
2.
Volume Dampers
a.
b.
3.
Ventfabrics Inc.
Young Regulator Co.
Air Extractors
a.
b.
Columbus PS
Ventfabrics Inc.
Young Regulator Co.
Splitter Dampers
a.
b.
4.
Aero Dyne Co.

Tuttle and Bailey
Barber-Colman Co.
Titus
15820-2
5.
Duct Hardware
a.
b.
6.
Access Doors
a.
b.
c.
7.
Ventfabrics Inc.
Young Regulator Co.
Gravity Backdraft Dampers

a.
b.
c.
2.2
Air Balance Inc.

Ruskin Mfg. Co.
Ventfabrics Inc.
Instrument Test Holes

a.
b.
8.
Ventfabrics Inc.
Young Regulator Co.
Air Balance Inc.

American Warming and Ventilating Inc.
Ruskin Mfg. Co.
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide ductwork accessories of the same materials as the duct, if

commercially available. Otherwise fabricate such ductwork accessories of Type
316L stainless steel, protected inside and outside with a factory applied 4-6 mil
heresite, or equal, air dried phenolic coating. Construct duct accessories in
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
B.
Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes as follows:
C.
1.
Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane

runners, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards".
2.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Factory fabricate turning vanes of a

streamlined design, with single thickness vanes not more than 1-1/2 inch
apart for ducts 24 inches and smaller and with double thickness vanes
spaced 3-1/4 inches apart for ducts larger than 24 inches.
Volume Dampers: Provide volume dampers complete with brass bushings, steel
rods, brackets, locking quadrant controls, and of closed end type designed for use
on high pressure ducts. Provide multiple opposed blade type volume dampers if
the duct dimension perpendicular to the damper shaft exceeds 10 inches.
Columbus PS
15820-3
D.
Manual Splitter Dampers: Provide splitter dampers of a length 1-1/2 times the
width of the branch duct served with self locking assemblies.
E.
Air Extractors: Provide air extractors capable of providing uniform air distribution
and designed to minimize pressure drop and turbulence.
F.
Duct Hardware: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all
items on project, for the following:
1.
Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, a quadrant lock device on one
end of the shaft; and an end bearing plate on the other end for damper
lengths over 12 inches. Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended
bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.
2.
Damper Remote Drives: Provide remote flexible drive where specified,

complete with flexible couplings, linkages and concealed type regulators for
flush ceiling mounting.
G.
Access Doors: Provide duct access doors where necessary to service or replace
equipment. Construct doors of the same or greater gauge as the ductwork or
plenums served. Provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide
insulated doors as double wall type insulated with 1-inch 6-pound density glass
fiber, with suitable reinforced edges, closing into structurally framed openings
with 1/2-inch neoprene-lined channels. Provide door panels with double
diagonally cross breaks, hinged with two or more butt hinges and secured with two
or more compression latches. Provide plenum doors with latch handles on both the
inside and outside. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, and extended
frames for externally insulated duct. Provide one side hinged and the other side
with one handle-type latch for doors 12 inches high and smaller or 2 handle-type
latches for larger doors.
H.
Test Holes: Provide instrument test holes in the ducts and plenums at appropriate
locations for insertion of 3/4-inch pitot tubes and similar air measuring
instruments. Equip the openings with removable, tight fitting caps or covers.
I.
Gravity Backdraft Dampers: Provide counterbalanced interlinked backdraft

dampers at gravity relief locations shown and as specified. Construct the dampers
of aluminum complete with jamb and blade seals, nonmetallic bearings, and
adjustable counterbalance on extended shaft. Provide dampers suitable for
operation at a maximum of 4 inches w.g. and a pressure drop not exceeding 0.1
inches w.g.
Columbus PS
15820-4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
General: Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be
installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install ductwork accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's

installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as
shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products serve intended function. Make all necessary
adjustments to provide a complete and satisfactory operation upon completion of
the installation.
B.
Turning Vanes: Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in

supply, return and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C.
Volume Dampers: Install volume dampers in main ducts and branch ducts and at
all return and exhaust air branch duct take off connections and all other locations
where shown.
D.
Splitter Dampers: Install manually operated splitter dampers in all supply air
branch duct connections for volume distribution.
E.
Extractors: Install air extractors behind all supply registers and all other locations
where shown.
F.
Duct Hardware: Install locking quadrant controls for each volume damper.
Provide remote flexible drives where manual damper operators are inaccessible.
G.
Access Doors: Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with
latches operable from either side, except outside only where the duct is to small for
a person to enter. Provide access doors, amply sized to suit their function, for
inspection and cleaning, and where necessary to service or required to replace
equipment.
H.
Instrument Test Holes: Provide instrument test holes in ducts where required for
testing and balancing purposes.
I.
Gravity Backdraft Dampers: Install backdraft dampers at gravity relief locations

and where shown.
J.
Coordination: Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of ductwork

accessories properly.
Columbus PS
15820-5
3.3

A.
Tests: Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate their compliance

with the specified requirements. Test for air leakage while the system is operating.
Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and
leakproof performance.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a qualified representative of

the manufacturer as specified in Division 1 to inspect the installation of equipment,
certify that it meets the manufacturer's recommendations, and instruct the
operating personnel in its operation and maintenance.
3.4

A.
Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings.
B.
Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched

surfaces with the manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15820-6
SECTION 15830
FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: The following types of fans:

1.
2.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
Roof-mounted fans
Wall exhaust fans

Section 16445 - Motor Control Centers
REFERENCES
A.

1.
AMCA 99
Standards Handbook
2.
AMCA 210
Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
3.
AMCA 300
Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans
4.
AMCA 301
Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from

Laboratory Test Data
5.
AFBMA 9
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
6.
AFBMA 11 -
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
7.
ASTM E 84 -
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials
8.
NEC
National Electrical Code
Columbus PS
15830-1
9.
1.3
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data: Submit complete catalog product data, including the following:
1.
Dimensions
2.
Assembly
3.
Weights
4.
Specialties and accessories
5.
Rated capacities
6.
Performance ratings
7.
Controls
8.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated, including brake horsepower, static pressure, and static efficiency
plotted against air volume for the duty scheduled
9.
Certified fan sound power ratings, for both fan outlet and casing radiation at
rated capacity
10.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories
11.
Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring
12.
Materials gauges and finishes, including color charts
13.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing equipment assemblies and

indicating locations, dimensions, weights, required clearances, construction details,
and location and size of field connections.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturers descriptive literature,

as specified in Division 1, including operation instructions, lubrication
instructions, motor and drive replacement instructions, wiring diagrams, controls,
Columbus PS
15830-2
accessories maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. Include this data and
product data in the operation and maintenance manual.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and place the AMCA Certified
Rating Seal on the equipment.
B.
Sound Ratings: Conform to AMCA 301, test to AMCA 300 and place the AMCA
Certified Sound Rating Seal on the equipment.
C.
Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
D.
Fans and Components: Provide UL listed and labeled fans and components.
E.
Motors and Electrical Accessories: Comply with NEMA standards and NEC.
F.
Manufacturer: Provide equipment from a company regularly engaged in design

and manufacture of fans, of types and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, and which
issues complete catalog data on these products.
1.5

A.
Division 1.
B.
Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to site in factory fabricated protective

containers. Handle products properly to prevent damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Do not install damaged equipment, replace damaged units with new.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for unloading and transporting equipment
to final location.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store equipment in its original containers with labeling in
place until the time of installation and as specified in Division 1.
1.6
SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A.
Equipment Roof Supports: Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment

supports, and roof penetrations.
B.
Structural Supports: Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support
members.
Columbus PS
15830-3
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
Furnish spare parts wrapped or boxed, indexed and tagged with complete
information for use and reordering. Provide the following spare parts.
1.
One complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Roof-Mounted Louver Face Fans

a.
b.
2.
Roof Curbs
a.
b.
c.
3.
Penn Ventilation Co.

Thybar Corp.
Pate
Wall Exhaust Fans

a.
b.
2.2
Penn Ventilator Co.

Greenheck Fan Corp.
Penn Ventilation Co.

Greenheck Fan Corp.
FANS GENERAL
A.
General Design: Factory fabricate, assemble, test, and finish fans of the
arrangement, minimum size, capacities and characteristics scheduled.
B.
Fan Performance: Provide fans tested and rated in accordance with Air Movement
and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) test procedures, bearing the AMCA rating
seal. Provide certified performance curve for each fan.
C.
Fans and Shafts: Provide fans statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
Design fans for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower. Provide turned, ground, and polished steel fan shafts designed to
operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed
range of the fan's class.
Columbus PS
15830-4
D.
Belt Drives: Provide drives of a V-belt type, factory mounted, with final
alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. Provide V-belt drives which
have a minimum service factor of 1.5 based on motor horsepower.
E.
Belts: Provide V-belt type belts in matched sets.

nonsparking, and nonstatic belts.
F.
Motor and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Use adjustable pitch motor sheaves with motors
through 15 hp; use fixed pitch motor sheaves on larger than 15 hp motors with
adjustable pitch fan sheaves. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle
of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. Include an allowance to replace
motor and fan wheel pulleys as required to obtain required airflow during final air
balance of system.
G.
Shaft Bearings: Provide self-aligning grease lubricated bearings of the type

indicated having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA L(50)) of 200,000,
calculated in accordance with ANSI/AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and
ANSI/AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.
H.
Lubrication: Provide fan lubrication fittings extended to the service side with
aluminum tubes and secured accessibly outside the fan housing.
I.
Controls: Provide controls furnished with equipment meeting the requirements of

Sections 15900 and 16055.
J.
Motors: Provide TEFC high energy efficient type motors as specified in Section
16220.
K.
Electrical Equipment: Provide all electrical equipment and materials, including

combination motor starters, circuit breakers and disconnect circuit breakers
meeting the requirements of Section 16445.
2.3
Provide oil-resistant,
ROOF-MOUNTED LOUVER FACE FANS

A.
General: Provide all aluminum construction roof-mounted louver face fans of a

centrifuge type with housing, weatherproof hood and curb cap; incorporate
following specified features, unless scheduled otherwise.
B.
Entire Assembly: Bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
C.
Louvered Penthouse Hood: Provide heavy gauge extruded aluminum housing

braced where necessary to prevent vibration; provided with anti-condensation
coating. Provide lifting lugs. Provide hinged aluminum cover for quick access to
motor and drive assembly.
D.
Drive: Provide V-belt drives, sized for minimum of 150 percent of driven
horsepower.
Columbus PS
15830-5
E.
Motors: Provide motors equipped with permanently factory lubricated bearings

guaranteed for normal operation without further lubrication.
F.
Openings: Provide openings equipped with bird screens for exhaust fans.
G.
Fan Wheel: Provide backward curved aluminum blade wheel, non-overloading

design.
H.
Fan Bearings: High quality ball or roller type mounted in cast iron pillow blocks
with grease fittings. Provide pulleys of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed
and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts.
I.
Vibration:
isolators.
J.
Disconnect Switch: Provide an integral disconnect switch for each fan.
K.
Prefabricated Curbs: Provide fans complete with roof curbs as specified.
L.
Protective Coating: Unless otherwise noted furnish fans with manufacturers

standard primer and rustproof enamel finish, as specified in Section 09900.
M.
Damper: Provide a gravity, self-acting back draft damper on the fan inlet,
comprised of a heavy-gauge welded steel frame and aluminum interlinked blades
with neoprene edge seals and linkage.
2.4
Provide the entire fan and motor assembly mounted on vibration
ROOF CURBS
A.
2.5
Provide prefabricated roof curbs of types as required and shown. Provide curbs of
monolithic construction, 18 or 14 gauge as required, galvanized steel, with
continuous arc-welded corner seams, galvanized steel inner liner, factory-installed
wood nailer and insulated with 1-1/2-inch thick, 3-pound density rigid fiberglass
board insulation. Provide curbs with a minimum height of 12 inches above the
finished roof deck and of the style and design to mate the deck. Provide all curbs
with tops leveled, with pitch built into curb where roof slopes 1/4 inch per foot or
more.
WALL EXHAUST FANS
A.
General: Provide wall exhaust fans which meet the characteristics, size, capacity
and arrangements as scheduled.
B.
Construction: Provide each wall mounted propeller fan comprised of a heavygauge steel panel with folded edges and integral venturi, rigid steel motor and
direct drive assembly frame, motor, and a dynamically and statically balanced
Columbus PS
15830-6
propeller blade assembly. Bolt fan guards fabricated of heavy-gauge galvanized

wire to the steel panel at the motor side.
C.
2.6
Damper: Provide a gravity, self-acting back draft wall shutter on the fan
discharge, comprised of a heavy-gauge welded steel frame with aluminum
interlinked blades with neoprene edge seals, and linkage.
A.
Tests: Perform the following factory tests:

1.
Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method
for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in
accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating."
Provide fans which are licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings
Seal.
2.
Units Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air
density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in
accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
General: Examine equipment and field conditions as follows.

1.
Examine fans at the time of delivery for damaged or missing components.
2.
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fans.
3.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Power Supply: Verify that the proper power supply is available.

INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
Make all necessary adjustments to equipment to provide complete and satisfactory
operation upon completion of the installation.
Columbus PS
15830-7
B.
Support: Support fans as described below.

1.
Install prefabricated roof mounting curbs for roof-mounted fans, watertight

in accordance with the prefabricated curb manufacturer's recommendations.
Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs. Set each fan on a continuous 2- by
1/4-inch sponge neoprene gasket. Flange connecting ducts over the wood
mounting frame attached to the fan curb. Provide roof openings in
accordance with approved manufacturers shop drawing submittals.
C.
Vibration Correction: If undesirable vibration occurs in the fan after installation,

rebalance the fan in the field or replace to achieve operation within acceptable
limits.
D.
Access Space: Provide access space around fans and motors for service. Provide
no less than minimum as recommended by the manufacturer. Allow space for
motor removal.
E.
Electrical Leads: Install fans, as shown and specified, with flexible electrical
leads.
F.
Flexible Connections: Provide flexible connections at inlet and discharge of fans

where shown. Ensure metal bands of flexible connectors are parallel with
minimum 1-inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. Flexible
connections are not to be in tension while fan is running.
G.
Safety Screen: Provide safety screen where fan inlet or outlet is exposed.
H.
Backdraft Dampers: Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and

as indicated.
I.
Operating Requirements: Do not operate fans for any purpose until bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been test run under observation.
J.
Lubrication: Properly lubricate all pieces of equipment, furnished with lubrication

fittings, prior to start-up and at recommended intervals before turning equipment
over to the OWNER. Attach a linen tag or heavy-duty shipping tag to each piece
of equipment showing the date of lubrication and the name and number of
lubricant used. Furnish typewritten list, in triplicate, of each item lubricated and
the type of lubricant used.
3.3

A.
Adjustment and Cleaning: Perform adjusting and cleaning as follows:

1.
Align, adjust and balance each belt drive to prevent noise and vibration.
2.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Columbus PS
15830-8
B.
3.4
3.
Start fan system and check for excessive leaks and vibration and correct.
4.
Remove all loose materials and obstructions from interior of equipment.
5.
Remove debris and waste materials resulting from installation.
6.
Clean tar, adhesive, dirt or marks from exterior of unit.

the manufacturer to inspect the installation of equipment, and certify that it meets
the manufacturer's recommendations as specified in Division 1. Make any
necessary adjustments, test and place the equipment in satisfactory operating
condition and instruct the operating personnel in its operation and maintenance.
PAINTING
A.
Paint fans as specified in Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15830-9
Columbus PS
15830-10
SECTION 15850
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for furnishing and installing registers, gravity

ventilators, and all accessories and appurtenances necessary for complete
installation.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2

Section 10210 - Metal Louvers
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ARI 650
Air Outlets and Inlets
2.
ASHRAE 70 -
Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance

of Outlets and Inlets
3.
ADC 1062
Certification, Rating and Test Manual
4.
NFPA 90A
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating System
5.
SMACNA
Duct Construction Standards
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for
air outlets and inlets including the following:
1.
Columbus PS
Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished,
indicating construction, finish and mounting details.
15850-1
2.
C.
Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including
aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop; and
noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for air outlets and inlets including the
following:
1.
Manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet and
inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
2.
Schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and
noise level.
D.
Quality Control: Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and
type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules.
E.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit maintenance data, including

cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product
data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals, in accordance with requirements
of Division 1.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air

outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
A.
Division 1.
B.
Shipping and Packing: Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated
fiberboard type containers. Identify on outside of container, the type of outlet or
inlet, and location to be installed. Provide complete information for use and
reordering, including supplier's name, address and phone number.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect
them from weather and construction Work traffic. Where possible, store indoors.
When necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof
wrapping. Avoid crushing or bending, and prevent dirt and debris from entering
and settling in devices.
D.
Inspection: Inspect all air outlets and inlets against approved shop drawings at the
time of delivery.
Columbus PS
15850-2
Return for replacement all air outlets and inlets damaged or not meeting the
requirements of the approved drawings.
1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
Furnish the following spare parts:

1.
Three sets of operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require
them.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Registers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Titus Products; Division of Philips Industries, Inc.

Carnes Co.; Division of Wehr Corp.
Krueger; Division of Philips Industries, Inc.
Tuttle & Bailey
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers

and gravity ventilators where shown, of size, shape, capacity, and type indicated,
constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete
installation.
REGISTERS
A.
General: Provide registers materials as follows:

1.
Materials:
a.
B.
Aluminum in galvanized steel ducts
Supply Registers: Provide supply registers where shown and specified meeting the
1.
Columbus PS
Provide supply air registers as double deflection type, with individually

adjustable vertical front blades, flanged and gasketed; Aluminum - Model
272FS, manufactured by Titus Products.
15850-3
C.
2.4
2.
Fabricate one inch margin frames.
3.
Provide air extractors and integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers

with a removable key operator, operable from the face.
Return Registers: Provide return registers where shown and specified meeting the
1.
Provide return air registers as single deflection type, with fixed horizontal
blades set at 45 degrees, flanged and gasketed; Aluminum - Model 3FL
manufactured by Titus Products.
2.
Fabricate one inch margin frames with concealed mounting.
3.
Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with a removable

key operator, operable from the face.

A.
Performance: Provide air inlets and outlets meeting the following performance
requirements.
1.
Provide registers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses,

throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in
manufacturer's current data.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
General: Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be
installed. Do not proceed with installation Work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install air outlets and inlets, in accordance with the manufacturers
B.
Coordination: Coordinate with other work, as necessary to interface installation of

air outlets and inlets with other work.
C.
Location: Locate registers as indicated.
Columbus PS
15850-4
D.
Construction Openings: Provide roof openings in accordance with approved

manufacturers shop drawing submittals.
E.
Painting: Paint visible exterior duct surfaces behind grilles and registers flat black
in accordance with Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15850-5
Columbus PS
15850-6
SECTION 15900
HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing electronic/electric, temperature

control systems for ventilating, heating and air conditioning systems as indicated.
Provide systems complete in all respects, including thermostats, smoke detectors,
thermometers, relays and switches, automatic dampers, damper operators,
miscellaneous accessories, and alarm systems.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.2

Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Material and Methods
Section 16075 - Electrical Identification
REFERENCES
A.

1.
AMCA 500
2.
ASME B16.22 -
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressure Fittings
3.
ASTM B 32
Solder Metal
4.
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum)
5.
NFPA 90A
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation

Systems
Columbus PS
Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters
15900-1
1.3
6.
ASME 40.1
Gauge, Pressure and Vacuum, Dial Indicating (for Air,

Steam,
Oil,
Water,
Ammonia,
ChloroFluorohydrocarbon Gases, and Compressed Gases)
7.
NEMA DC 3
Residential Controls - Electric Wall-Mounted Room

Thermostats
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data: Provide complete catalog data for all proposed control components
including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, performance charts
and curves, catalog cuts and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for the following:

1.
Complete data on all proposed control components
2.
Dimensioned external and internal, control panel layouts, with components

identified
3.
Bills of material for all control components
4.
Control sequence description for each system
5.
Control diagrams
6.
Damper schedule including sizes, trim, operator sizes and pressure drop
calculations
7.
Air temperature sensor schedule including range, element type, element

length accuracy, hysteresis, linearity, power requirements and mounting
details
8.
Detailed operating instructions
9.
Complete plan wiring, riser and schematic diagrams, and terminal

connection diagrams
10.
Calculations and all other details required to demonstrate the system design
has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Submit all
sensor range calculations.
Columbus PS
15900-2
D.
1.4
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit operation and maintenance manuals

covering the function, operation and maintenance of all control components and
systems, as specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Provide equipment from a company specializing in manufacturing

the products specified in this Section with minimum of 5 years documented
experience and which issues complete catalog data on these products.
B.
Installer: Provide company specializing in installing the Work of this Section with
minimum 5 years documented experience.
1.5

A.
Division 1.
B.
Acceptance: Accept products on-site in factory-fabricated protective containers,

with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect products for damage.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store products in clean dry place and protect from weather
and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components,
enclosures, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Temperature Control Equipment

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Johnson Controls, Inc.

Landis & Staefa
Barber Colman Company
Honeywell Inc.
Control Dampers
a.
Aluminum Dampers
(1)
(2)
Columbus PS
Ruskin - Model CD50

Air Balance - Series 500
15900-3
3.
Damper Operators
a.
Electric/Electronic Damper Operators

(1)
(2)
(3)
4.
Time Delay Relays

a.
b.
5.
Agastat - Cat. No. SSC12ABA

ISSC - Cat. No. 1017-B-1
Current Sensors
a.
6.
Veries Industries, Inc-Hawkeye
Thermostats
a.
General Use Thermostats

(1)
(2)
(3)
7.
Johnson Controls
Barber Colman
Honeywell
Smoke Detectors
a.
Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors

(1)
b.
c.
Pyrotronics - Series 3 with AD-3RP housing
Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors

(1)
Pyrotronics - Model PEC-3
Smoke Detector Remote Alarm Lamp

(1)
2.2
Johnson Controls - Series M-100

Barber Colman - Series MP-400/MA-400
Belimo Aircontrols
Pyrotronics - Model RL4
HVAC CONTROLS, GENERAL

A.
General: Provide temperature control systems as specified and complete in all

respects. Provide control components subject to mechanical strain of metallic
construction. Provide all electric and electronic control components to be UL
listed.
Columbus PS
15900-4
B.
Wiring: Provide electrical wiring and conduit for the following.

1.
Control and interlock wiring from remote ventilating and air conditioning
control components to control panels supplied with the ventilating and air
conditioning equipment.
2.
Power, warning and alarm wiring from the control components initiating
alarms to the station PLC provided under Division 16 Work.
3.
Wiring of safeties required for sequences of operation including, but not

limited to, current sensors, high temperature thermostats, etc. provided under
Division 16 Work.
4.
Power wiring to electric actuators provided under Division 16 Work.
5.
Power and control wiring to HVAC smoke detectors provided under

Division 16 Work.
Provide all wiring and conduit to meet the requirements of applicable Division 16
sections.
2.3
CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
General: Provide multiple blade control dampers of the sizes shown at locations
shown and specified. Furnish control dampers of the low leakage type designed to
give not more than 15 cfm leakage per square foot of a 48-inch square damper at
4-inch w.g. pressure differential when tested in accordance with AMCA 500.
B.
Construction: Provide dampers of the multiple parallel blade type.

control damper meeting the following requirements:
C.
Provide
1.
Except where specified otherwise, provide damper blades which do not

exceed 6 inches in width and 48 inches in length and are rigidly constructed.
Supply blades suitable for high velocity performance.
2.
Provide damper bearings made of noncopper-bearing corrosion-resistant

materials, molded synthetic or Type 316 stainless steel. Provide replaceable
butyl rubber blade seals along with the damper. Provide jamb seals of the
spring type of materials specified resulting in a tight closing, low leakage
damper.
Aluminum Dampers: Provide aluminum dampers constructed of 6063 T5 extruded

aluminum. Construct frames of 5-inch wide, 1/8-inch thick extruded aluminum
with mounting flanges, reinforced corners and flexible aluminum jamb seals.
Supply blades of double wall airfoil type extruded aluminum with extruded
replaceable blade seals locked in extruded blade slots. Furnish axles and linkage
in the air stream of 316 stainless steel.
Columbus PS
15900-5
2.4
DAMPER OPERATORS
A.
Electric Operators: Furnish electric damper operators with oil-immersed motors

and of the two-position type. Equip two-position operators with return springs.
Provide damper operators that revert to their initial position upon power
interruption. Supply damper operators of sufficient size and number to operate
their respective dampers. Provide dampers with dimensions larger than 48 inches
wide or 72 inches high, or area greater than 32 square feet, with multiple operators.
Furnish electric damper operators conforming to Section 16140 which accept
control signal inputs through a suitable transducer to drive the damper operators.
Furnish damper operators with and powered by 24-volt ac transformers powered
by an external 120-volt ac power source.
B.
Electronic Actuators: Furnish electronic damper actuators of the modulating type.

Provide actuators which have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing
circuitry to prevent damage throughout rotation. Provide the torque required for
proper close-off and be capable of being mechanically or electrically paralleled to
increase torque where required. Provide a mechanical spring return mechanism for
"Fail safe" operation. Non mechanical forms of fail safe are not acceptable.
Provide all spring actuators capable of both clockwise and counterclockwise
operation by changing the mounting orientation. Provide actuators designed to
accept a 2 to 10 VDC or 4-20 mA input signal and provide an independent 2 to 10
VDC position feedback signal. Provide actuators powered by 24 VAC or VDC
and 2 position spring return actuators powered by 24 or 120 VAC. Power
consumption not to exceed 15 VA per actuator. Provide actuators with an external
manual gear release or crank to allow manual positioning when the actuator is not
powered. Provide actuators with the capability of adding auxiliary switches or a
feedback potentiometer. Provide all actuators with NEMA 12 rated, UL listed
enclosures.
2.5
SWITCHES AND RELAYS

A.
General: Provide electric relays necessary to accomplish specified control

functions. Provide electric switches and relays complying with applicable
requirements specified in Division 16.
B.
Construction: Provide electric relays of the plug-in solid-state type with

compatible current and voltage ratings.
C.
Time Delay Relays: Provide adjustable time delay relays with automatic reset,
with ranges as specified and electrical rating of at least 10 amperes rms at 115
volts.
Columbus PS
15900-6
2.6
CURRENT SENSORS
A.
General: Provide electric current sensors to sense equipment status and other
specified control functions. Comply with applicable requirements specified in
Division 16.
B.
Construction: Provide current sensors of a solid state type with compatible current
and voltage ratings. Provide sensors complete with in-rush time delay, single set
point adjustment, power and status LED's, and adjustable trip set point with
accuracy of 2 percent of range UL listing and NEMA 12 sealing required.
C.
Design: Provide sensors suitable for operation at 5 to 185 degrees F and 0 to 95

percent humidity, and of a induced power type. Sensors with an external power
supply are not acceptable.
D.
Function: Unless otherwise noted, provide each sensor to accomplish the

following function upon motor status failure:
2.7
1.
Close a pair of dry contacts to complete a remote alarm circuit to station

DPC unit.
2.
De-energize the respective fan starter.
THERMOSTATS
A.
Electric Thermostats: Provide electric thermostats as two-position type or fully

modulating type as required. Furnish electric thermostats with bimetallic sensing
elements and concealed adjustable set point. Supply electric thermostats with field
adjustable sensitivity and with thermometers in heavy duty covers of approved
standard finish. Equip electric modulating type thermostats to operate on the
balanced bridge principle and produce a 4-20 ma output signal. Provide both
inside air and outside air temperature thermostats.
B.
High Temperature Thermostats: Provide high temperature thermostats as electric

wall type, as required, with specified set point approximately at mid-range and
arrange to perform the specified control and alarm functions upon temperature rise
above the set point. Provide high temperature thermostats of the manual reset
type, set at 100 degrees F.
2.8
SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Furnish duct-mounted smoke detectors of the

self-contained 115-volt photoelectric type suitable for duct mounting, complete
with sampling tube and box assembly. Equip the locking cover box with a power
ON light, an alarm indicator light, and a detector, all prewired ready for wiring
connections. Extend sampling tubes the full width of the ducts in which they are
Columbus PS
15900-7
mounted. Provide smoke detectors with an automatic reset logic with loss of input
power supply.
B.
2.9
Function: Design smoke detectors to accomplish the following functions when

any one of the smoke detectors is activated.
1.
Activate a visual alarm at the smoke detector.
2.
Stop the associated fan.
3.
Close relay dry contacts to close remote alarm to the DPC system.
4.
Provide smoke detectors so that a trouble alarm from any one of the smoke
detectors associated with a specific system activate a single identified alarm
to the DPC system.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANELS

A.
General: Furnish temperature control panels with suitable brackets for wall
mounting, NEMA 12 construction, and full face access door. Provide internal
panel wiring color coded and numbered conductors, neatly bundled and secured.
Furnish panel a disconnect switch for each external 120-volt and 480-volt circuit
connected to the panel. Furnish the temperature control panels with thermometers,
switches, controllers, control relays, timing relays, reset timers, motor starters,
contactors, indication lights, selector switches, pushbuttons, terminal strips, and
other components needed for a complete installation. Provide the temperature
control panels with an outside air and inside air temperature indicator for all
thermostats that provide a 4-20 ma air temperature signal output signal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
General: Verify that systems are ready to receive control component Work.
Beginning of installation means that the installer accepts the existing conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install required control components in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings and as specified in
Division 1. Adjust and test to meet the required control performance. Coordinate
prior to control installation the proposed controls with electrical plans and
interfacing equipment for compatibility. Install the systems by experienced
competent mechanics employed by a firm with an established controls service
organization.
Columbus PS
15900-8
B.
Electrical Requirements: Provide electrical material and installation in accordance

with applicable requirements of Division 16.
C.
Set Points: Provide adjustable set points for all set points listed in the specified or
scheduled control sequences. All temperature set points in the control sequences
are in degrees Fahrenheit.
D.
Testing: Prove operation of exhaust air fans by current sensors. If a fan has been
commanded on and the current sensor indicates a no-flow status, initiate an
individual alarm and close remote alarm contacts to station DPC system. Provide
an adjustable time delay function for the current sensor to lock out the alarm
during fan start-up.
E.
Selector Switches: A HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch for the supply and

exhaust air fans is provided under Division 16 Work.
1.
Operate fan through its safety devices, as specified, when the selector switch
is in the HAND or AUTO position.
2.
The selector switch permits continuous operation of the fan when placed in
the HAND position. When the selector switch is in the Hand position,
provide damper which functions as specified for the AUTO position.
F.
Painting: Provide painting in accordance with Section 09900.
G.
Control Sensors: Check and verify locations of thermostats, and other exposed
control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate room
thermostats 48 inches above floor.
H.
Damper Operators: Locate damper operators outside of the airstream wherever

possible.
I.
Conduit and Wiring: Provide conduit and electrical wiring where required.
3.3
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A.
Electrical Room: Provide the following controls for the Electrical Room mounted
on the temperature control panel (TCP-1).
1.
Columbus PS
Provide ACU-1 with a H-O-A mode selector switch. When H-O-A switch is
in the AUTO mode, ACU-1 operates continuously.
a.
HEATING mode when the inside air temperature is below 60F.
b.
COOLING mode when the inside air temperature is above 70F or the
outside temperature thermostat T3 is above 80F.
15900-9
2.
Provide a cooling thermostat T1 set for 80F, wired to air conditioning unit
ACU-1 and its respective air cooled condensing unit ACC-1.
3.
When space temperature rises above 80F, ACC-1 starts.

temperature reduces below 75F, ACC-1 stops.
4.
Provide a H-O-A mode selector switch for electronic actuators for MOD-1A
and 1B. When MOD-1A and MOD-1B are in the AUTO mode, modulate
the return and supply dampers to maintain an Electrical Room temperature
of between 60F and 75F. When the room temperature increases above
70F, the system shall provide 100 percent outside air, until ACC-1 starts
and the system changes to 5 percent outside air. After ACC-1 starts the
system shall continue to use 5 percent outside air for a time period of 2
hours after ACC-1 stops. When the room temperature reduces below 60F,
the system shall provide 5 percent outside air.
5.
Provide a H-O-A mode selector switch for the ACU-1 when the system is in
the HEATING mode.
6.
Columbus PS
When space
a.
When the H-O-A is in the HAND mode, the heating coil shall operate
at high heat (Stage 2).
b.
When the H-O-A is in the AUTO mode, the heating coil shall operate
as follows:
Temperature
Heating Coil
Above 55F
Off
50F to 55F
Stage 1 (Low)
45F to 49F
Stage 2 (High)
Provide a H-O-A mode selector switch for electric operator MOD-1A and
MOD-1B.
a.
When the H-O-A is in the HAND mode, MOD-1A shall close and
MOD-1B shall open (100% outside air).
b.
When the H-O-A is in the OFF mode, MOD-1A shall open and
MOD-1B shall close (100% return air).
c.
When the H-O-A is in the AUTO mode, both MOD-1A and MOD-1B
shall operate as described above for ACU-1.
15900-10
7.
8.
9.
Columbus PS
Provide a H-O-A mode selector switch for electric operator MOD-2A and
MOD-2B.
a.
When the H-O-A is in the HAND mode, both MOD-2A and MOD-2B
shall open.
b.
When the H-O-A is in the OFF mode, both MOD-2A and MOD-2B
shall close.
c.
When the H-O-A is in the AUTO mode, both MOD-2A and MOD-2B
shall open when the Generator Room thermostat T2 temperature is
below 50F and the ACU-1 heating coil is not operating.
An H-O-A mode selector switch provided in MCC-1, under Division 16

Work, controls exhaust air fan EF-1. Provide H-O-A switch HAND and
AUTO position indication and run indication to DPC unit.
a.
Provide a cooling thermostat T4 set for 90F, wired to exhaust air fan
EF-1.
b.
When H-O-A switch is in the AUTO mode and space temperature

rises above 90F, EF-1 starts and outdoor air motorized damper
MOD-5 opens. When space temperature reduces below 85F, EF-1
stops and motorized damper MOD-5 closes.
c.
When H-O-A switch is in HAND mode, MOD-5 shall open and EF-1
shall operate continuously.
d.
On a continued rise in space temperature above 95F, a high

temperature thermostat makes contact for alarm to the DPC unit.
Provide a H-O-A mode selector switch for electric operated MOD-5.

a.
When the H-O-A is in the HAND mode, MOD-5 shall open.
b.
When the H-O-A is in the OFF mode, MOD-5 shall close.
c.
When the H-O-A is in the AUTO mode, MOD-5 shall operate as

described above for EF-1.
15900-11
B.
Generator Room: Provide the following controls for the Generator Room mounted
on the temperature control panel (TCP-1).
1.
2.
C.
An H-O-A mode selector switch provided in MCC-1, under Division 16

Work, controls exhaust air fan EF-2.
a.
Provide a cooling thermostat T5 set for 90F, wired to exhaust air fan
EF-2.
b.
When H-O-A switch is in the AUTO mode and space temperature

rises above 90F, EF-2 starts and outside air motorized damper MOD3 opens. When space temperature reduces below 85F, EF-2 stops
and motorized damper MOD-3 closes.
c.
When H-O-A switch is in the HAND mode, MOD-3 shall open and
EF-2 shall operate continuously.
d.
On a continued rise in space temperature above 105F, a high

temperature thermostat makes contact for alarm to the DPC unit.
Provide MOD-3 and MOD-4 each with a H-O-A mode selector switch.
a.
When the H-O-A is in the MANUAL mode, the MOD shall open.
b.
When the H-O-A is in the OFF mode, the MOD shall close.
c.
When the H-O-A is in the AUTO mode, the MOD shall operate
automatically when the Generator starts and the Generator control
panel signals that MOD-3 and MOD-4 shall open and EF-2 shall run
operate continuously.
d.
MOD-3 and MOD-4 shall open automatically with loss of input

power to the operator.
Pump Room: Provide the following controls for the Pump Room mounted on the
temperature control panel (TCP-2).
1.
Columbus PS
Provide H-O-A mode selector switch for roof exhaust air fan REF-1, REF-2,
REF-3, REF-4 and REF-5.
a.
When H-O-A switch is in the HAND mode, the roof exhaust fan shall
operate continuously.
b.
When H-O-A switch is in the OFF mode, the roof exhaust fan shall
not operate.
15900-12
c.
2.
3.
When H-O-A switch in the AUTO mode, the roof exhaust fan shall be
operated by the temperature control system.
Provide a lead/lag selector switch with the following lead/lag roof exhaust
fan operation sequence:
Switch
Position
Lead/Lag Sequence
REF-1, 2, 3, 4, 5
REF-2, 3, 4, 5, 1
REF-3, 4, 5, 1, 2
REF-4, 5, 1, 2, 3
REF-5, 1, 2, 3, 4
Control the lead/lag operation of the roof exhaust fans based on Pump Room
temperature as measured by Thermostat T6 as follows:
Temperature (F)
Exhaust Fan
Air Intake
Damper
Start
Stop
Lead
(1)
80
75
Lag 1
Lead
85
80
Lag 2
Lag 1
90
85
Lag 3
Lag 2
95
90
Lag 4
(2)
100
95
(1) Existing room air intake

(2) All three air intake dampers open
4.
Provide each lead roof exhaust fan with an H-O-A switch and a lead/lag
selection switch with the following function:
a.
b.
c.
d.
When H-O-A switch is in HAND mode the damper shall open.

When H-O-A switch is in OFF mode the damper shall close.
When H-O-A switch is in AUTO mode, damper shall open based on
the above lead/lag roof exhaust fan sequence.
The dampers shall close with loss of input power supply.
5.
The lead roof exhaust fan shall be provided with an automatic system to
operate fan 10-percent of the time to provide minimum room ventilation.
6.
Provide Run indication lights for each roof exhaust fan and Open and
Closed indication lights for each damper.
Columbus PS
15900-13
7.
Provide TCP-2 mounted motor starters for each roof exhaust fan with a test
pushbutton mounted on the roof by the fan.
8.
Smoke detectors SD-4 and SD-5 shall be wired to TCP-2.
9.
Provide the following alarms from TCP-2 to DPC:

a.
b.
c.
3.4
Low Room Temperature Alarm (40F)

High Room Temperature Alarm (110F)
Smoke Alarm (SD-4/SD-5)

A.

and to instruct the operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the
temperature control system inspect the completed installation, make any necessary
adjustments, participate in the startup of the equipment, participate in the field
testing of the equipment and place the equipment in trouble-free operation, as
B.
Tests:
After installation of the equipment, control equipment and all
appurtenances, subject each unit to a field running test as specified in Division 1,
under actual operating conditions.
1.
2.
Perform prefinal inspection/test as follows:

a.
Carry out test with controls operating as near as possible to service

conditions.
b.
Correct all defects in the controls.
Final inspection/test:
a.
Prior to the acceptance test, completely adjust and operate properly all
controls.
b.
Notify the OWNER when the installation is ready for acceptance

tests. At least two weeks prior to scheduled acceptance tests, deliver
copies of record internal panel layouts and detailed schematic and
wiring diagrams to the OWNER. At the acceptance test, demonstrate
the complete functions and proper operation of each control system to
the OWNER. Simulate conditions of off-season temperature and
alarms as required for a complete demonstration.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15900-14
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing and installing the following:

1.
2.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.2
Testing, adjustment and balancing of air systems.

Measurement of final operating conditions of HVAC systems.

Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation,

Total System Balance.
2.
ASHRAE - Most Recent Systems Handbook: Chapter 57, Testing, Adjusting

and Balancing.
3.
NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of

Environmental Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
Columbus PS
15950-1
B.
Testing and Balancing Agency: Submit the name and qualification of the testing,
adjusting and balancing agency and their personnel for approval within 180 days
after the award of the contract.
C.
Test Reports: Submit a complete set of all approved tests prior to final acceptance.
D.
System Testing and Balancing: Submit a detailed account of the proposed

methods and sequence to carry out testing and balancing.
E.
Draft Reports: Prior to commencing the Work, submit draft reports indicating
adjusting, balancing and equipment data required.
1.
Submit three draft copies of the report for review prior to final acceptance.
Provide three final copies for the OWNER and for inclusion in the operation
and maintenance manuals.
F.
Reports Quality: Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals,
complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and
side. Include a set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to
correspond with the data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
G.
Testing and Balancing Equipment: Submit data sheets of specific instruments to

be used, listing their most recent calibration dates.
H.
Balancing Procedures:
Use the
recommendations of the ASHRAE.
I.
Other Requirements: Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms,

prior to commencing the system balance.
1.4
balancing
procedures
meeting
the
REPORT FORMS
A.
General: Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance
or NEBB forms.
B.
Format: Include the following information on the report forms:

1.
Title Page
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Columbus PS
Company name
Company address
Company telephone number
Project name
Project location
Project CONTRACTOR
Project altitude
15950-2
2.
Instrument List
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Air Handling Equipment

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
4.
Identification/Location
Design air flow
Actual air flow
Design return air flow
Actual return air flow
Return air temperature
Electric Motors
a.
b.
c.
Columbus PS
Manufacturer
Model/Size
Air flow, design and actual
Total static pressure (total external), design and actual
Inlet pressure
Discharge pressure
Fan RPM
Return Air/Outside Air Data

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
Manufacturer
Model/Size
Return air flow, design and actual
Outside air flow, design and actual
Total static pressure (total external), design and actual
Inlet pressure
Discharge pressure
Fan RPM
Exhaust Fan Data

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
5.
Instrument
Manufacturer
Model
Serial number
Range
Calibration date
Manufacturer
HP/BHP
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
15950-3
d.
e.
f.
g.
7.
V-Belt Drive
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
8.
Air terminal number

Room number/location
Terminal type
Terminal size
Area factor
Design velocity
Design air flow
Actual velocity
Actual air flow
Percent of design air flow
Air Cooled Condenser

a.
b.
c.
d.
Columbus PS
System zone/branch
Duct size
Area
Design velocity
Design air flow
Actual velocity
Actual air flow
Duct static pressure
Air temperature
Air correction factor
Air Distribution Test Sheet

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
10.
Required driven RPM
Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
Belt, size and quantity
Motor sheave, diameter and RPM
Center to center distance, maximum, minimum and actual
Duct Traverse
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
9.
RPM
Enclosure
Service factor
Starter size, rating, heater elements
Manufacturer
Model/Size
Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
15950-4
e.
f.
11.
Cooling Coil Data

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
12.
Manufacturer
Service
Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Sound Level Report

a.
b.
c.
13.
Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual

Number of compressors
Location
Octave bands - equipment off
Octave bands - equipment on
Vibration Test
a.
Location of points
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
b.
Test readings
(1)
(2)
(3)
c.
d.
e.
Columbus PS
Fan bearing, drive end

Fan bearing, opposite end
Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
Motor bearing, drive end
Motor bearing, opposite end
Casing (bottom or top)
Casing (side)
Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
Duct after flexible connection (suction)
Horizontal, velocity and displacement

Vertical, velocity and displacement
Axial, velocity and displacement
Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration

Unusual conditions at time of test
Vibration source (if noncomplying)
15950-5
14.
Duct Leak Test

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Description of ductwork under test

Duct design operating pressure
Duct design test static pressure
Duct capacity, air flow
Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
Test apparatus
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
g.
h.
i.
1.5
Blower
Orifice, tube size
Orifice size
Calibrated
Actual static pressure

Actual orifice differential pressure
Leakage
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A.
General: Submit record documents as specified in Division 1.
B.
Location Record: Accurately record actual locations of balancing devices setting.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Provide services from a company specializing in the testing, adjusting and

balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented
experience, certified by AABC or NEBB.
1.
Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance

Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.
2.
Perform the total system balance in accordance with AABC National

Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System
Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and
Adjusting of Environmental System.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A.
1.8
Sequence the Work to commence after completion of systems and schedule

completion of Work before Substantial Completion.
PRE-INSTALLATION
A.
Conference: Convene a conference 1 week prior to commencing testing.
Columbus PS
15950-6
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
General: Before commencing Work, verify that the systems are complete and
operable. Verify the following:
1.
Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition
2.
Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable
3.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment
4.
Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in
addition to final filters
5.
Duct systems are clean of debris
6.
Fan rotations are correct
7.
Volume dampers are in place and open
8.
Coil fins have been cleaned and combed
9.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place
10.
Air outlets and inlets are installed and connected
11.
Duct system leakage has been minimized
B.
Defects and Deficiencies: Report any defects or deficiencies noted.
C.
System Imbalance: Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or

conditions which prevent system balancing.
D.
Acceptance of Existing Conditions: Beginning of testing means acceptance of

existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Additional Balancing: Provide additional balancing devices as required.
Columbus PS
15950-7
B.
3.3
Instruments: Provide instruments required for testing adjusting and balancing

operations. Make these instruments available to facilitate spot checks during
testing.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
3.4
Air Systems: Adjust the air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply
systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems from the
design figures indicated.
ADJUSTING
A.
General: Adjust Work as specified in Division 1.
B.
Completion: Properly install, inspect and confirm proper operation of each

individual component of the system before giving notice to proceed with testing,
adjusting and balancing. Do not perform testing, adjusting and balancing until all
mechanical equipment is properly installed and is 100 percent operational, all
temperature controls are installed and calibrated and all systems are cleaned and
clean filters installed.
C.
Deficiency and Correction: Assist in the system testing, adjusting and balancing.
Adjust the system and make corrections of any deficiencies found such as: motor
starters and horsepower; improper sheave and belt sizes; missing, improperly
installed or malfunctioning volume control dampers, air extractors, power wiring,
controls and any other items that prevent the completion of the system testing,
adjusting and balancing.
D.
Recorded Data:
conditions.
E.
Settings: Permanently mark settings of dampers and other adjustment devices the
allow the balanced settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
F.
Balance Verification: After adjustment, take measurements to verify that the

balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
G.
Operating Systems: Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards,
closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring
thermostats to the specified settings.
H.
Final Inspection: At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded

in the report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the OWNER.
Columbus PS
Record data representing actually measured, or observed
15950-8
3.5
AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING

A.
Perform air system balancing as follows:

1.
Check filters for cleanliness and minimum bypass leakage, dampers for
correct position, and temperature controls for completeness of installation.
2.
Prepare test report sheets for fans, and air inlets and outlets. Obtain the
manufacturer's flow factors and follow the recommended procedure of
testing.
3.
Open all supply dampers, and place all fans in specified operation.
4.
Check motor amperage and voltage for each motor, fan rotation, and
automatic dampers for proper position.
5.
Check air temperature controls and verify that they are operating to deliver
design temperatures.
6.
Using pitot tube and calibrated manometer, traverse the main duct and all
main branches and ascertain the total air being delivered. Adjust or replace
pulleys and belts and install additional dampers if required to obtain the
design airflow. Make adjustments so that all finally adjusted air quantities
are at least equal to, but more than 10 percent above, the air quantities noted
on the drawings.
7.
Adjust branch dampers until the proper air volume is obtained in each
branch duct.
8.
Commence terminal outlet balancing beginning with the outlets nearest the
fan. Use branch dampers for major adjusting and terminal dampers for
minor adjustments only.
9.
Make additional test and adjustment passes through entire systems as

necessary to obtain the noted outlet values.
10.
Read and record amperage readings for each motor lead, fan static and
velocity pressures and the static pressure drop across each major component
(i.e., intake, filters, coils,).
11.
Adjust air terminal outlets for proper distribution pattern.
12.
Inspect and test all electrical protective devices and circuits for proper motor
protection, including properly sized starter overload heater elements, for all
equipment furnished.
Columbus PS
15950-9
3.6
13.
Provide a system schematic with the required and actual air quantities
recorded at each outlet or inlet.
14.
Measure building static pressure and adjust the supply, return and exhaust
air systems to provide the required relationship to maintain approximately
0.05 inches positive static pressure for each zone near building entries.
15.
Permanently mark the balance position of all manual volume dampers, and
replace all access covers.
A.
General: When each system has been completed and proved functional,
demonstrate its intended operation in each of its operating modes. Simulate in an
acceptable manner functions dependent upon parameters such as weather, process
or emergency conditions which are unavailable at the time of test, or separately
demonstrate when those parameters exist, to assure proper functioning under all
operating conditions. Immediately after testing, properly reset control settings
temporarily modified for such simulations.
B.
Final Acceptance: Final acceptance of the Work will be contingent upon the
operation of all equipment and systems meeting the specified requirements. The
CONTRACTOR shall conduct a second test of the entire system within 30 days
from the planned date of final acceptance and make all adjustments needed to
correct any deficiencies identified during the inspection. The CONTRACTOR
shall provide the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER with a final report which
describes the results of all testing conducted and final adjustments made to the
systems.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
15950-10
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: General requirements for providing basic electrical materials

and methods.
B.

1.
Certain equipment, control devices, conduit and wiring are shown on

electrical drawings, but are specified in other sections pertaining to
plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, temperature control
systems, process equipment, process control systems and instrumentation.
Install and connect these items to the electrical system as indicated or
required in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C.
Overall Application of Specifications: This Section applies to all Division 16

sections and to other sections that include requirements for electrical equipment.
Irrespective of where the electrical requirements are specified, provide and install
all materials necessary for a complete operational system.
D.
Temporary Requirements: This Section applies to any temporary circuits,

overcurrent devices, conduit, wiring, and other equipment required during
changeover from the existing electrical system to a new electrical system. This
Section also applies to temporary rewiring of lighting circuits, power circuits,
instruments and devices.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Corrosive Areas: The following areas are designated corrosive:

1.
Electrical Building
a.
b.
2.
Existing Pump Building

a.
3.
Columbus PS
Generator Room
Fuel Oil Storage Area
Pump Room Floor Elevation
Existing Valve Vault

16050-1
1.3
4.
Outdoor Location
5.
Below Grade Locations
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements:
sections.
B.
Performance Requirements:
applicable sections.
1.4
Design requirements are specified in the applicable
Performance requirements are specified in the
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Furnish all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish a complete list of electrical equipment and
materials to be furnished that shows the manufacturer, catalog number, size, type,
capacity, voltage rating and other pertinent information related to each item on the
list.
C.
1.
Furnish catalog data on the manufacturer's standard equipment and

materials. Clearly indicate on the catalog data the equipment and devices
specifically being proposed.
2.
Identification: Furnish a complete schedule or listing of system and

equipment identification labels with legends.
CONTRACTOR's Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings on items manufactured

for the Contract.
1.
Furnish a connection diagram and schematic for each piece of electrical

equipment. A manufacturer's standard connection diagram or schematic
showing more than one method of wiring is not acceptable unless, the
intended method is clearly marked.
2.
Furnish point-to-point wiring diagram that shows connections to field

equipment. Clearly differentiate between manufacturer's wiring and field
wiring and show terminal numbers, individiaul wiring numbers and conduit
numbers.
3.
Furnish raceway layout drawings that show conduits, boxes, and panels
which contain the conductors to be provided. Include schedules listing
conduit sizes and conductor content and identification.
Columbus PS
16050-2
D.
4.
Where additions and modifications are made to existing equipment, furnish

drawings which clearly identify the existing equipment that remains and the
new Work.
5.
Submit a sequence of construction describing in detail the steps for

implementing the work as shown on the contract drawings.
Coordination Drawings: Furnish coordination drawings that have a scale of

1/4"=1'-0" or larger; that show major elements, components, and systems of
electrical equipment as they relate to other systems, installations, and building
components. Indicate locations where access space is limited and where
sequencing and coordination of installations are required for the efficient flow of
the Work, including (but not limited to) the following:
1.
E.
Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and

materials. Include the following:
a.
Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment

disassembly as required for periodic maintenance.
b.
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
c.
Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
d.
Equipment connections and support details.
e.
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
2.
Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large

equipment into the building during construction.
3.
Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors,

walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and
installations.
4.
Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate the installation of air outlets and
inlets, light fixtures, communications systems components, sprinklers, and
other ceiling-mounted devices.
Record Documents:
Furnish record documents, and in addition to the
requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for:
1.
Columbus PS
Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all new equipment, electrical devices,

control panels and electrical systems.
16050-3
F.
1.5
2.
Interior and exterior major raceway systems sizes and locations; locations
of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and
circuit breaker sizes and arrangements.
3.
Exposed and concealed equipment locations dimensioned from prominent

building lines.
4.
Approved substitutions, and actual equipment and materials installed.
Maintenance Manuals: Furnish maintenance manuals, and in addition to the

requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for
equipment items:
1.
Functional description, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature
and catalog numbers of replacement parts.
2.
Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in,

and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,
shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating
instructions.
3.
Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and

troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions.
4.
Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes: Provide all electrical Work in accordance with applicable local codes,
regulations and ordinances. If there is a conflict between the requirements
specified in the Contract Documents and the codes, follow the more stringent
requirements as determined and approved.
B.
Testing: As a minimum, provide standard factory and field tests for each type of
equipment. Other tests may be specified in the applicable equipment section.
C.
Labeling: Provide electrical equipment and materials that are listed and approved
by Underwriters Laboratories or other OSHA recognized testing laboratories with
the testing agencys label attached.
D.
Standard Products: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical materials and

equipment which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in
the production of such materials and equipment. Provide the manufacturer's latest
standard design that conforms to these Specifications. Provide the products of the
Columbus PS
16050-4
same manufacturer when two or more units of the same class of material and
equipment are required.
1.6

A.
Division 1.
B.
Shipping and Packing: Provide materials and equipment suitably boxed, crated or
otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and
storage. Clearly label such boxes, crates or enclosures with manufacturer's name,
and name of material or equipment enclosed.
C.
Acceptance at Site: Conform to acceptance requirements as required in Division 1.

1.
D.
1.7
Repair or replace all materials and equipment damaged by handling and

storage as directed at no additional Contract cost.
Storage and Protection: Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the
elements and keep them dry at all times. Handle and store to prevent damage and
deterioration in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
General: The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the
principal electrical elements, outlets, devices and circuit layouts. Install and
connect all electrical elements and devices to form a complete workable system as
required by the Contract Documents, regardless of whether all system components
are specifically stated in the Specifications or shown. Provide necessary materials
and installation wherever required to conform to the specific requirements of the
furnished equipment and for proper installation of the Work.
B.
Schematics: In general the runs of feeders are shown schematically and are not
intended to show exact routing and locations of raceways. Verify actual and final
arrangement, equipment locations, and prepare circuit and raceway layouts before
ordering materials and equipment. Equipment locations are approximate and are
subject to modifications as determined by approved equipment dimensions.
C.
Coordination of Work: Coordinate the Work so that the electrical equipment may
be installed without altering building components, other equipment or installations.
D.
Departure from Design: If departures are deemed necessary due to structural

conditions, obstructions or other problems, provide details of such departures and
the reasons for requesting approval as soon as practicable but not later than the
submittal of the raceway layout drawings. Do not make any departures without
written approval.
Columbus PS
16050-5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
ROUGH-IN
A.
3.2
Final Location: Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and
with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A.
General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical

systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1.
Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with

other building components.
2.
Verify all dimensions by making field measurements.
3.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components as

construction progresses to provide for electrical installations.
4.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be

set in cast-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are
constructed.
5.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
6.
Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems,

materials, and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
7.
Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and

overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing
regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
Provide all required connections for each service.
8.
Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved

submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible.
Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing
that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where
coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements,
refer conflict to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER for resolution.
Columbus PS
16050-6
3.3
9.
Where installed exposed in finished spaces, install systems, materials, and

equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components.
10.
Provide electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair

or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect
equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with
other installations.
11.
Provide access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished
surfaces.
12.
Install systems, materials, and equipment providing right-of-way priority to

systems required to be installed at a specified slope.
13.
Provide field quality control of all electrical work in accordance with the
requirements of NEC 110.9.
CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
General: Perform cutting and patching as specified in Division 1. In addition to

the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply:
1.
2.
Columbus PS
Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials

required to:
a.
Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
b.
Remove and replace defective Work.
c.
Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the

Contract Documents.
d.
Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
e.
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
f.
Locate existing structural reinforcing with a pachometer where core

drilled penetrations are required so as not to cut the steel reinforcing.
Cut, remove, and properly dispose of selected electrical equipment,

components, and materials as indicated. Included are the removal of
electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new
Work. Deliver all removed serviceable apparatus to the OWNER or as
directed.
16050-7
3.
Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not

indicated or scheduled to be removed.
4.
Provide and maintain adequate temporary partitions or dust barriers that

prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
5.
Protection of Installed Work:

protect adjacent installations.
6.
Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials that
are compatible with the original installation and applied by experienced
installers.
During cutting and patching operations,
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16050-8
SECTION 16055
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOP-ASSEMBLED EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing, installing and testing shopassembled equipment as indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Shop-assembled equipment panels and other items are specified under the driven
equipment sections and may require external field connection to ancillary devices
and other system components for interlocks and alarms. Provide all field wiring as
required by the system and equipment specified under the driven equipment
sections. This field wiring may not be specified or shown. This equipment
includes but is not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Condensing units
Air conditioning units
Electric hoists and cranes
Electric water coolers
Fuel oil pumps
Miscellaneous control equipment
Pump and fan equipment
Sump pump equipment
Dewatering pump
Temperature control systems
Valve operators

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Columbus PS

Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Section 16060 - Grounding
Section 16130 - Electrical Raceway Systems
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
Section 16491 - Control Components and Devices
16055-1
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
2.
UL 486A
- Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper

Conductors.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Design Requirements: Provide the Shop Assembled equipment using the

Components and Appurtenances meeting the requirements specified in Division
16.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturer's data on all equipment and
devices in the assembly, including voltages, number of phases, current ratings,
capacities and other relevant data.
C.
Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings for the shop-assembled equipment,

including the following:
D.
1.
Layout drawings of the assembly showing accurately scaled basic equipment

sections, auxiliary compartments and combination sections. Show special
relationships of assemblies to associated equipment, including plan and front
views of the equipment. Furnish a device summary.
2.
Furnish wiring diagrams for assemblies that show connections to electrical

power. Clearly differentiate between shop-installed portions of wiring and
field installed portions.
3.
Furnish construction drawings for equipment requiring field assembly.

Clearly differentiate between shop-assembled portions and field assembled
portions.
4.
A manufacturers standard connection diagram or schematic showing more

than one method of connection is not acceptable unless the intended method
is clearly identified.
Quality Control: Furnish manufacturer's test reports and certified performance

records of all equipment installed. Furnish field test reports after equipment is
installed.
Columbus PS
16055-2
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes: Comply with local codes and all other applicable codes.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
requirements.
1.6
Comply with applicable Regulatory Agency

A.
Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide shop-assembled equipment as standard products manufactured

by companies regularly engaged in the manufacture of such equipment.
B.
Factory Assembled Requirements: Provide control panels for shop-assembled

equipment as complete factory assembled units that require only external
connections for installation including main disconnect and all electrical features
necessary for the proper operation of the units.
C.
Controls:
1.
2.
3.
Columbus PS
Motors 1/2 Hp and Larger:

a.
Provide motors suitable for 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz operation,

with all controls at 115 volts or less.
b.
Provide a combination circuit breaker along with all required control

transformers, relays, timers, heaters and other necessary incidentals to
form a complete functioning unit.
c.
Provide NEMA Size 1 or larger starters.
Motors less than 1/2 Hp:

a.
Provide motors suitable for 120-volt, single phase operation unless

otherwise noted.
b.
Provide manual motor starter with neon pilot light.
Provide all controls and equipment as specified in Section16491.

16055-3
D.
Control Components: Install principal control components in NEMA 250 rated

enclosures as follows:
AREA
ENCLOSURE
Above grade indoor
NEMA 12 - Industrial
Corrosive areas as defined in Section 16050 NEMA 4X - Watertight and corrosionresistant stainless steel with stainless
or as shown.
steel external hardware. Provide all
external operators made of the same
materials as that of the enclosures
E.
Miscellaneous Controls:
1.
Provide float switches, pressure switches, limit switches, thermostats and

other auxiliary control devices to satisfy the intended service.
2.
Provide contacts rated at 10-amperes, 120 volts, 60-hertz ac, unless

otherwise specified.
3.
Provide limit switches that function in accordance with contact development

charts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install shop-assembled equipment as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate cabling and wiring as necessary to interface installation

of shop-assembled equipment.
C.
Torque Requirements: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including

screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque
tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals in accordance
with UL Standard 486A.
D.
Grounding Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for the shopassembled equipment as specified and shown. Tighten connections in accordance
with UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
Columbus PS
16055-4
E.
3.2
Adjustments: Make all necessary adjustments to the equipment to provide

complete and satisfactory operation upon completion of the Contract.
A.
Shop Painting: Paint the shop-assembled equipment enclosures as specified in

Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting:
original finish.
Clean and touch up scratched and marred surfaces to match
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16055-5
Columbus PS
16055-6
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing a complete grounding system as

specified and shown. Grounding includes but is not limited to: electric equipment
enclosures, transformers, switchgears, motor control centers, ground grid systems,
grounding rods, grounding conductors, bonding jumpers, water pipe connections,
and structure metal frames as required.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2

Section 16080 - Electrical Testing Requirements
REFERENCES
A.
Codes and Standards: The following codes and standards are referred to in this
Section:
1.
1.3
NEC - National Electrical Code
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Furnish all submittals, including the following, as specified in

Division 1.
B.
Product Data and Information:

following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Furnish manufacturer's catalog data for the
Grounding and grounded conductors

Grounding connectors, clamps and bushings
Grounding rods
Bonding jumpers
Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings showing the locations and length of
grounding rods. Label the size and material used for grounding rods. Furnish
details pertaining to grounding electrode conductors, grounding and grounded
Columbus PS
16060-1
conductors, grounding connections and the ground grid for buildings, structures,
lighting units, manholes and handholes.
D.
1.4
Quality Control: Furnish a field report of the system ground impedance test
results.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Codes and Standards: Construct a complete grounding system in accordance with

applicable ANSI, IEEE Standards and the NEC and local codes.
A.
Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are listed below.

manufacturers of equivalent products may be submitted for review.
1.
Grounding and Grounded Conductors

a.
b.
2.
Grounding Rods
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.

Thomson Industries, Inc.
Carolina Galvanizing Utility Products Division
Erico Products
Superior Grounding Systems
Ground Rod Access Box

a.
b.
2.2
American Insulated Wire Corporation

Rome Cable Corporation
Strongwell Quazite
Hartford Concrete Products, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide conductor sizes as shown or required.
Columbus PS
16060-2
Other
B.
Materials: Provide conductors in accordance with the requirements specified in

Section 16121.
C.
Bare conductors: Provide bare copper conductor where buried in earth, embedded
in concrete or exposed.
D.
Insulated Conductors: Provide copper conductor with green color insulation rated
at 600 volts where installed in conduits or other enclosed raceways.
2.3
CONNECTORS
A.
Grounding Clamps and Bolted Connectors: Provide grounding clamps and bolted
connectors suitable for devices or cables being connected.
B.
Welding: Provide the exothermic welding process for buried, concealed and
accessible connections to structural members, ground rods, and case grounds.
Clean and paint welds embedded in the ground or encased in concrete with asphalt
base paint.
C.
Bolted Connectors: Provide bolted connectors for grounding to ground buses and
equipment.
D.
Pipe Grounding: Provide copper, brass, or bronze grounding clamps for grounding
pipes. Do not provide strap type clamps.
E.
Grounding Bushings: Provide grounding bushings for conduits where conduits are
not effectively grounded by firm contact to the grounded enclosure.
2.4
GROUNDING RODS
A.
Length and Size: Provide grounding rods 3/4-inch in diameter and 10 feet long.
B.
Grounding Rod Material: Stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Install conductors to preclude exposure to physical damage.
2.
Install connections firm and tight.
3.
Arrange conductors and connectors without placing strain on the

connections.
Columbus PS
16060-3
B.
C.
4.
Bury equipment grounding conductors as shown, or at a minimum of 12

inches below grade.
5.
Bring loops or taps up for connection to equipment or other items to be

grounded.
6.
Install an insulated grounding conductor in all conduits.
7.
When raceways are used to contain and protect grounding conductors, install
in accordance with Section 16130 and NEC.
8.
Where conductors are installed in nonmetallic raceway, provide the

grounding conductor in addition to the neutral wire, sized in accordance
with NEC or as scheduled.
9.
Perform exothermic welding with properly sized molds.
Grounding Rod Installation:

1.
Install grounding rods as shown with the top of the rod a minimum of 12
inches below grade.
2.
Drive grounding rods into permanently moist soil.
3.
Provide additional ground rod sections as required to reach permanently

moist soil.
4.
Provide cast iron junction box without bottom for access to grounding rod
and conductor where shown.
Equipment Grounding: Ground each piece of electrical equipment using a

conductor in the raceway feeding the equipment in accordance with NEC.
1.
Unless specified otherwise, connect transformer enclosures and neutrals to

the grounding system. Connect the neutral ground connection at the
transformer terminal. Make the connection from the ground grid to the
ground bus and enclosures of switchgears and motor control centers, lighting
and distribution panelboards, and control, relay and instrumentation panels.
2.
Provide two separate, independent, diagonally opposite connections for

power transformers so removal of one connection will not impair continuity
of the ground system. Provide ground plates that are imbedded in the
concrete pad so that transformers can be removed without damaging
grounding system. Install a copper ground connect between ground plates
and the transformers.
Columbus PS
16060-4
D.
Grounding Conductors: Connect the grounding conductor between the equipment

and the grounding system. Where a ground bar is furnished with the panelboard,
connect the grounding conductor to the bar.
E.
Miscellaneous Grounding: Provide grounding for the following:
3.2
1.
Ground receptacles and switches and their metal plates through positive
ground connection to the yoke/strap, outlet box and grounding system
grounding wire installed in the conduit.
2.
Ground racks, supports, frames, covers and metal parts in manholes or

handholes, controllers, motor frames, surge capacitors, arrestors, lighting
fixtures, metal structures, exposed noncurrent carrying metal, mechanical
equipment, hoist beams, cranes and similar items.
3.
Provide ground connections to equipment using ground plates imbedded in

the concrete pad so that the equipment can be removed without damaging
grounding system. Provide a copper ground connection between ground
plates and the equipment.

A.
Tests: Conduct a witnessed test to determine the ground impedance for the entire
system using a ground loop impedance tester. Provide a maximum impedance of 2
ohms at any point of the test. Add additional grounding rods if necessary to meet
this requirement.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16060-5
Columbus PS
16060-6
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing materials for the identification of

electrical equipment, components, conduits, cables, wiring, and the furnishing and
installation of safety signs.
B.

1.
2.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
ANSI C2
ANSI Z535.1
ANSI Z535.2
ANSI Z535.3
OSHA
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

Safety Color Code
Environmental and Facility Safety Signs
Criteria for Safety Symbols
Occupational Safety and Health Act
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturer's catalog data for safety
signs, nameplates, labels and markers.
1.
C.
Furnish manufacturer's instructions indicating application conditions and

limitations of use; and storage, handling, protection, examination and
installation of product.
CONTRACTOR's Record Drawings: Furnish CONTRACTOR's record drawings

accurately showing actual location of markers for underground ducts, handholes
and manholes, at completion of the Project.
Columbus PS
16075-1
1.4

A.
1.5
Division 1.
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Furnish the following spare parts.

1.
B.
Six safety signs of each size and wording.
Packaging: Package spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating

contents. Identify all spare parts with information needed for reordering. Deliver
spare parts in original factory packages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
3.
2.2
Other
W. H. Brady Company
Seton
Thomas & Betts
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A.
General: Provide identification materials listed and classified by UL or tested by

an acceptable Electrical Testing Company certifying the equivalence of the
materials to UL listing requirements and OSHA approved.
B.
Laminated Plastic Nameplates: Provide engraved three layer laminated plastic

nameplates with black letters on white background and fastened with corrosionresistant screws. Do not use mounting cement for fastening nameplates.
1.
Provide nameplates with 1-inch high lettering for switchgears, motor control
centers, control panels, relay panels, contactor panels, panelboards, and
similarly grouped equipment, transformers and disconnect switches.
2.
Provide nameplates with 1/2-inch high lettering for individual components

of a group such as main breakers, switchgear units, motor control center
units and similar devices.
3.
Provide nameplates with 1/4-inch high lettering for remote motor

controllers, control stations, relays and similar equipment.
Columbus PS
16075-2
C.
D.
4.
Provide nameplates for each motor identifying service or function and

lettering of an appropriate size to suit each motor.
5.
Provide approved laminated directories of circuits with typewritten

designations of each branch circuit in each panelboard.
6.
Provide smaller lettering for a neat, legible nameplate where the amount of
lettering causes excessively large nameplates.
Wire Markers: Identify wire bundles and each individual wire.

1.
Wire bundles: Provide a brass or rigid fiber identifying tag attached with
nylon self locking "Ty-Raps".
2.
Wire identification markers: Provide a printed white, heat-shrink, seamless

tubing type with black bold lettering for wires size No. 10 AWG and
smaller. Provide a printed self-laminating white, vinyl type with black bold
lettering for wires No. 8 AWG and larger.
Safety Signs: Provide safety signs in accordance with OSHA standard meeting the
requirements of ANSI C2, ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2 and ANSI Z535.3.
1.
Provide safety signs manufactured from vinyl having a minimum thickness

of 60 mils with red and black letters and graphics on a white background.
2.
Size: 10 inches by 14 inches except signs 7-inch by 10-inch may be

provided where the larger size cannot be applied.
3.
Mount safety signs using corrosion-resistant screws. Do not use mounting

cement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Surface Preparation:
labels.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install nameplates on the front of equipment, parallel to the equipment

lines and secured with corrosion resistant screws.
Columbus PS
16075-3
1.
Install laminated nameplates identifying:

a.
b.
B.
Wire Markers: Identify wire bundles and each individual wire with identification
tags as follows:
1.
Wire Bundles: Install an identifying tag engraved with the conduit number
where conduits enter motor control centers, switchgear, switchboards,
control panels, terminal boxes and the like.
2.
Wire identification markers: Provide wire identification markers on each

wire at all termination points.
3.
C.
Each electrical equipment enclosure

Individual equipment and devices
a.
On power and lighting circuits: The branch circuit or feeder number

as indicated on drawings
b.
On control circuits terminated in motor control centers, switchgears,

control panels and alike: The field device and terminal number of the
opposite end connection.
c.
On control circuits at each field device: The panel or compartment

number and terminal number of the opposite end connection.
Oversize wire markers so that after heat shrinking the wire marker can be
rotated on the wire. Rotate wire markers so that wire identification number
is visible.
Safety Signs: Provide safety signs as follows or as shown:

1.
2.
Columbus PS
Type DS-2
a.
Wording: DANGER - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT,

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
b.
Location: At each entrance to electrical rooms, and enclosed outdoor

electrical equipment.
Type DS-3
a.
Wording: DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP OUT
b.
Location: At each entrance to electrical rooms, and enclosed outdoor

electrical equipment operating at over 600 Volts. Also, on the sides
of fences or walls which enclose outdoor equipment operating at over
600 Volts.
16075-4
3.
4.
5.
6.
Type DS-4
a.
Wording: DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
b.
Location: Outside all equipment operating at over 600 Volts.
Type DS-5
a.
Wording: DANGER - POWERED FROM MORE THAN ONE

SOURCE
b.
Location: Outside all equipment that operates from more than one
power source.
Type DS-6
a.
Wording: NOTICE - KEEP DOOR CLOSED
b.
Location: On all doors with another safety sign installed.
Type DS-7
a.
Wording: CAUTION - CONTROLS & INTERLOCKS POWERED

FROM MULTIPLE SOURCES
b.
Location: On all control panel doors.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16075-5
Columbus PS
16075-6
SECTION 16080
ELECTRICAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements of field acceptance testing of materials and

equipment provided under various other sections to determine suitability for
installation and energization. Requirements of field testing and certification of
electrical equipment and materials provided under various other sections to assess
their equivalence to UL Inc. listing/labeling.
B.

1.
1.2
All relevant electrical sections.
REFERENCES
A.

1.
2.
1.3
NETA NIST -
InterNational Electrical Testing Association

National Institute of Standards and Technology
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Furnish all submittals including the following, as specified in Division 1

and Section 16050.
1.
Acceptance Testing Reports: Furnish acceptance testing reports for all

equipment and materials including the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Summary of the test

Description of material or equipment tested
Description of test including acceptable test values
Test results
Analysis of test results with recommendations
2.
UL Testing: Furnish standard test parameters in accordance with the

acceptable codes and standards for all the equipment and materials tested for
equivalence to UL listing.
3.
UL Test Reports and Certificates: Furnish test reports and certificates for all
equipment and materials tested for equivalence to UL listing, for approval.
Columbus PS
16080-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
TESTING COMPANIES
A.
Acceptable Testing Companies: Acceptable testing companies are as listed below:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
MET Electrical Testing Co., Inc.

ASET Power Systems Services, Inc.
Electric Power Systems, Inc.
Electro-Test, Inc.
High Voltage Maintenance Corp.
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Other OSHA and NETA approved testing facilities

A.
Tests: Furnish all testing and certification in accordance with the latest NETA,
ANSI, IEEE and NEMA Standards to meet the UL requirements, NFPA Standards
and NEC.
B.
Test Equipment: Furnish all testing equipment, cables and appurtenances required
to perform all tests and certifications in accordance with the following:
1.
Use instruments that have been calibrated, to assure that they are within
rated accuracy in accordance with NIST.
2.
Select test instruments that are appropriate for the variable being measured.
3.
Field Quality Control: Provide field quality control for verification of all
device adjustments in accordance with the requirements of NEC 110.9.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
UL TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

A.
3.2
General: Furnish the test reports and certifications for UL equivalence prior to
acceptance of all materials and equipment requiring such tests and certifications.
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A.
General: Furnish acceptance test reports prior to acceptance of all materials,

equipment and installations requiring such tests.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16080-2
SECTION 16085
SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Short circuit and coordination study for the entire power
distribution system.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2

Section 16273 - Pad-Mounted Transformers
Section 16430 - 480 Volt Switchgear
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
IEEE 242, "IEEE Recommended Practices for Protection and Coordination

of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems"
2.
IEEE 399, "IEEE Recommended Practices for Industrial and Commercial

Power Systems Analysis"
3.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Requirements: Furnish a short circuit and coordination study for the entire
distribution system for the Columbus Pumping Station. Include the following in
the short circuit study:
1.
One-line diagram of the entire distribution system identifying all

components considered and ratings of all power devices. Use ANSI device
numbers to identify all protective devices.
2.
Calculation of momentary and interrupting fault duties for each bus.
3.
Calculation of bus-to-bus impedance values reduced to a common MVA

base.
Columbus PS
16085-1
4.
Individually consider all motors 100 horsepower and greater. Group motors
less than 100 horsepower into one equivalent motor at the motor control
center bus or power panelboard.
5.
A table indicating the rating of each interrupting device related to the

calculated duty and suggest changes when appropriate.
6.
A table showing settings for all adjustable devices. Furnish these settings as
a practical compromise between protection of equipment and coordination
of downstream devices.
7.
Time-current coordination curves to illustrate the protection and

coordination achieved. Furnish these curves that include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
8.
1.4
Appropriate NEC protection points

Appropriate ANSI protection points
Transformer magnetizing inrush and through-fault protective curve
Motor starting characteristics
Cable damage limit levels
One-line diagram of system plotted
Short circuit current levels
Analysis and recommended settings for all adjustable overvoltage,

undervoltage and voltage unbalance protective devices. Include voltage and
time delay settings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Furnish all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 1.

1.
An executive summary of the study results and data
2.
A tabulation of all protective device ratings compared with calculated fault

duties
3.
A tabulation of settings for all adjustable protective devices
4.
Copies of all time-current coordination curves
5.
Analysis of the data that led to the conclusions and recommendations

included in the executive summary
6.
The one-line diagram of the system studied, including all rating and
identifications
7.
Copies of all computed results referenced to the one-line diagram and the
impedance listing
Columbus PS
16085-2
1.5
8.
Furnish six bound copies of the final report
9.
Furnish four CD-ROM containing the following:

a.
Complete copy of the report in PDF format
b.
Acrobat Reader
c.
Distribution system one-line diagrams in AutoDesk AutoCAD latest

version drawing format.
d.
All short circuit and coordination study input data and component
library files in format suitable for input into SKM PowerTools.
e.
All voltage data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications: Conduct the study using a power-system engineering, study or

analysis organization with the following qualifications:
1.
Five or more years experience on this type of work
2.
A proven computer program for performing 3-phase fault-duty calculations
3.
Demonstrated capability for calibrating and setting protective devices.
4.
Furnish the services of a lead individual for the study who has a minimum of
five years experience in performing 3-phase, fault-duty calculations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
General: Gather the necessary data to complete the short circuit and protective
curve coordination calculations. Obtain from field surveys and shop drawings
informational data pertaining to product manufacturer, type and rating of PT's,
CT's circuit breakers, fusing, relays, auxiliaries, and the like.
Columbus PS
16085-3
B.
3.2
Data: Estimate the lengths and sizes of cables shown on the one-line diagrams
from the Contract Drawings or from field observations and measurements.
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION
STUDY
A.
General: Include in the input data for the short circuit study the power company's
short circuit contribution, resistance and reactance components of the branch
impedances, the X/R ratios, base quantities selected, and other source impedances.
B.
Calculations: Calculate the three-phase, bolted, short circuit and single-phase,

line-to-ground short circuit current values. Calculate close and latch duty values
and interrupting duty values on the basis of calculated three-phase, bolted, short
circuit currents at each bus. Buses include, but are not limited to, transformers,
switchgears, medium-voltage motor control centers, switchboards, low-voltage
motor control centers, distribution panelboards, pertinent branch circuit panels and
other significant locations throughout the system. Include in the short circuit
tabulations symmetrical fault currents and X/R ratios. List for each fault location,
the total duty on the bus, as well as the individual contribution from each
connected branch, with its respective X/R ratio.
C.
Protective Device Evaluation Study: Perform a protective device evaluation study

to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, molded case switches, automatic
transfer switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of
these devices with the calculated fault currents. Apply appropriate multiplying
factors based on system X/R ratios and protective device rating standards.
3.3
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A.
General: Perform a protective device coordination study to provide the necessary

calculations and logic decisions required to select or to check the selection of
power-fuse ratings, protective-relay characteristics and settings, ratios and
characteristics of associated current transformers, and low-voltage, breaker trip
characteristics and settings.
B.
Study Items: Include in the coordination study all medium and low voltage classes
of equipment from the building or plant service protective devices down to and
including the highest rated device in the low-voltage motor control centers and
panelboards. Include the phase and ground overcurrent protection as well as the
settings of all other adjustable protective devices.
C.
Plotted Data: Plot the time-current characteristics of the specified protective

devices on log-log paper. On the plots, include complete titles, representative oneline diagram and legends, significant motor starting characteristics, complete
parameters of transformers, and the complete operating bands of low-voltage,
circuit breaker, trip curves and fuses. Indicate the types of protective devices
selected, proposed relay taps, time dial and instantaneous trip settings, transformer
Columbus PS
16085-4
magnetizing inrush and ANSI transformer withstand parameters, cable thermal

overcurrent withstand limits and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault
currents. Adhere to all restrictions of the National Electrical Code and proper
coordination intervals and maintain separation of characteristic curves. Furnish the
coordination plots for phase and provide ground protective devices on a system
basis. Use a sufficient number of separate curves to clearly indicate the
coordination achieved.
D.
Tabulation of Data: Furnish the selections and settings of the protective devices
separately, in tabulated form, listing circuit identification; IEEE device number;
current transformer ratios and connection; manufacturer and type; range of
adjustment and recommended settings. Furnish a tabulation of the recommended
power fuse selection for the medium-voltage fuses where applied in the system.
E.
Settings: Furnish the protective relay characteristics; tap and time dial settings
required by the coordination study to the switchgear manufacturer for selection of
protective devices.
3.4
STUDY REPORT
A.
General: Summarize the results of the power system study in a final report.
B.
Presentation of Report: Include the following sections in the report.
3.5
1.
Executive Summary
2.
Description, purpose, basis and scope of the study and a one line diagram of
that portion of the power system which is included within the scope of the
study
3.
Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings

versus calculated short circuit duties, and commentary regarding the same
4.
Protective-device, timeversus-current, coordination curves; tabulations of

relay and circuit breaker trip settings; fuse selections, and commentary
regarding the same
5.
Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for

interpretation of computer printout
PROTECTIVE DEVICE ADJUSTMENTS

A.
General: Adjust protective devices based on the recommendations contained in the

protective device coordination study after the study has been approved by the
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16085-5
Columbus PS
16085-6
SECTION 16121
WIRES AND CABLES - 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing all wires and cables rated at 600
volts and below for complete electrical systems as shown.
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ASTM B 3
- Standard Specifications for Soft or Annealed Copper

Wire
2.
ASTM B 8
- Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded

Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
3.
TIA/EIA 568-A
- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Furnish all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 1

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturer's catalog data for each type
of wire and cable furnished.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Furnish wire and cable in accordance with applicable IEEE and NEMA
standards, meeting the requirements of the NEC and UL listed.
B.
Tests: Furnish cables factory tested prior to shipment in accordance with ICEA
standards for the insulation specified.
Columbus PS
16121-1
1.5

A.
General: Deliver, store and handle wire and cable in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Division 1.
B.
Storage: Store cable reels on concrete or other hard surface or on 2x4 wood
laggings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Wire and Cable

a.
b.
c.
2.
Instrumentation Cable
a.
b.
c.
3.
The Okonite Company

Southwire Company
Wire Connectors
a.
b.
c.
Columbus PS
Belden
Alpha
Multiconductor Cable
a.
b.
5.
Belden
Dekoron
The Okonite Company
Data (Local Area Network) and Data Highway Cable

a.
b.
4.
American Insulated Wire Corporation

Southwire Company
The Okonite Company
Thomas & Betts

3M/Electrical Products Division
Ideal
16121-2
Other
6.
Color Coding Marker

a.
b.
2.2
W. H. Brady Company
Thomas & Betts
MATERIALS
A.
Conductors: Provide soft drawn or annealed copper conductors with 98 percent

minimum conductivity, meeting requirements of ASTM B 3 (solid) or ASTM B 8
(stranded). Use stranded conductors except solid No. 12 and No. 10 AWG may be
used in lighting fixture and convenience outlet wiring.
B.
Insulation: Provide wires and cables with insulation as follows:

1.
Power, control and lighting wiring

a.
Single Conductor: Provide insulation as follows:

Conductor
Size
Nos. 14, 12 and 10
AWG
NEC Type
Letter
Insulation
Material
XHHW
Cross-linked Polyethylene
RHW
Cross-linked Polyethylene
No. 8 AWG and

Larger
b.
2.
Columbus PS
Multiconductor Cables: Insulate individual conductors with 15 mils

of polyethylene or PVC and 4-mil nylon jacket. Wrap the conductors
with type binder and an outer jacket not less than 45 mils of PVC.
Use ICEA Method 1 for color coding wires.
Instrumentation Wiring: The manufacturers name and catalog number

shown below are for the purpose of establishing quality and general
configuration.
a.
Two conductor or single pair: Stranded No. 16 AWG wire, 600 volt
polyethylene insulation, twisted conductors, tinned copper drain wire,
overlapped metalized tape overall shield providing 100 percent shield
coverage and outer jacket of PVC. Belden Cat. No. 8719.
b.
Three Conductor: Stranded No. 16 wire, 600 volt polyethylene

insulation, twisted conductors, tinned copper drain wire, overlapped
metalized tape overall shield providing 100 percent shield coverage
and outer jacket of PVC. Belden Cat. No. 8618.
c.
Multiple Pairs or Triads: Provide individually shielded pairs or triad

of stranded No. 16 AWG wire with overall shield. Insulate each wire
16121-3
for 600 volts with 15 mils of PVC and a 4-mil nylon jacket.
Assemble pairs or triads with tinned copper drain wire and metalized
tape shield providing 100 percent shield coverage. Cable pairs or
triads together with tinned copper drain wire and overall metalized
tape shield.
3.
Data (Local Area Network) Cable: The manufacturers name and catalog
number shown below are for the purpose of establishing quality and general
configuration.
a.
4.
Data Highway Cable: The manufacturers name and catalog number shown
below are for the purpose of establishing quality and general configuration.
a.
C.
Twinaxial: Provide Data Highway Cable (DHC) stranded No. 20

AWG tinned copper wire (9.5 ohms/mile), 78 ohm nominal
impedance, 300 volt polyethylene insulation, tinned copper drain
wire, overlapped metalized tape overall shield providing 100 percent
shield coverage and 55 percent tinned copper braid shield (4.1
ohms/mile) and outer jacket of blue PVC. Belden Cat. No. 9463.
Printed Data on Covering: Provide the following information printed on the

surface of all wires and cables at regular intervals throughout the entire length.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Category 5: Provide cable having third party verification to TIA/EIA

568-A Category 5 (CAT5) requirements and constructed of four pair
of stranded No. 24 AWG solid copper wire, polyethylene or
polypropylene insulation, stranded No. 24 AWG tinned copper drain
wire, overlapped metalized tape overall shield providing 100 percent
shield coverage and outer jacket of gray PVC. Belden Cat. No.
1624R.
Manufacturer or trade name.

Size of conductor.
Type of insulation.
Voltage classification.
WIRE CONNECTIONS AND CONNECTING DEVICES

A.
Connectors for No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Provide insulated compression type
butt connectors.
B.
Connectors for No. 8 AWG and Larger: Provide UL, Inc. listed compression type
tube connectors for parallel or butt splices. Provide companion preformed plastic
insulating covers or tape to provide insulation equal to conductor insulation.
C.
Miscellaneous Connectors: Provide preinsulated spring connectors for lighting

and receptacle splices and pigtails.
Columbus PS
16121-4
D.
Solderless Lugs: Provide solderless terminal lugs for stranded and multiple solid
conductors at connection to terminals or use UL listed crimp tool compression
style lugs.
E.
Control Wire Terminations: Provide spade lug or pressure type control conductor
connection terminations for control wiring terminations. Provide lug bolting at
devices or bus bars with a flat washer, a Belleville washer and a locknut.
2.4
COLOR CODING
A.
General: Use a vinyl impregnated cloth tape resistant to oil, dirt and heat for
conductor color coding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Swab new and existing conduits to be used to clear debris and remove
moisture before conductor installation. Install conductors in raceways with no
splices between boxes.
B.
Pulling Equipment: Pull conductors using proper equipment without exceeding

manufacturer's recommendation for maximum pulling tension. Protect conductor
insulation jacket at all times from twists, kinks, scrapes, punctures and other
damage. Replace damaged conductors. Pull wires and cables into ducts and
conduit without the use of lubricants, except where such use is necessary and
approved by the cable manufacturer and the ENGINEER. Use UL listed
lubricating compound compatible with the conductor insulated jacket and with the
raceway.
Use lines of nylon or polypropylene, propelled by carbon dioxide, or compressed
air, to snake or pull wire and cable into conduits. Do not use flat steel tapes or
steel cables.
C.
Conductor Support: Support conductors in vertical risers with woven grips to

prevent loading on conductor connectors.
D.
Seals: Provide a seal between the conductor and conduit for conduits entering
buildings or from areas where the temperature change may cause condensation or
moisture. Seal the conduits after the conductors are in place.
E.
Identification: Identify all cables as specified in Section 16075.
Columbus PS
16121-5
F.
Color Coded Tape: Apply color coding tape at all terminations and splices with
overlapping turns for a minimum length of two inches, starting two inches back
from the termination point. Provide color code tape in all boxes and manholes.
Provide color coding throughout the entire network for service, feeder, branch,
control and low energy signal circuit conductors. Use the following color code for
conductors unless an existing color code for the facility exists.
PHASE A
COLOR CODING
PHASE B PHASE C
NEUTRAL
GROUND
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
480/277
three
phase
Brown
Orange
Yellow
White
Green
Control
and lowenergy
signal
Red
---
---
White
Green
Gas and
Fire Detection
Systems
Pink
---
---
---
---
Instrumentation
Tan
---
---
---
---
dc
circuits
Olive
---
---
---
---
SYSTEM
208/120
three
phase
G.
Terminations: Leave a minimum of six inches of free conductor at each connected

outlet and a minimum of nine inches at unconnected outlets.
H.
NEC Requirements: Install wiring in accordance with applicable provisions of

National Electrical Code, and as indicated.
I.
Conductor Sizing: Size conductors in accordance with the NEC and the following:
1.
Columbus PS
Size for branch lighting circuits so that the greatest voltage drop between
lighting panel and center of load does not exceed two percent at rated load.
16121-6
2.
Size conductors to limit the maximum conductor temperature to less than 75

degrees C, except where specifically stated otherwise.
3.
Use minimum conductor sizes as follows:
4.
a.
Power and lighting branch circuits, No. 12 AWG.
b.
120-volt control circuits, No. 14 AWG.
c.
Instrumentation and signal wiring, 2 or 3 conductors No. 16 AWG

stranded shielded.
Size conductors as shown or as required by the actual load to be served,

whichever is larger.
J.
Splicing: Install continuous cables without splices in all duct systems.
K.
Instrumentation wiring: Install instrumentation wiring as follows:
L.
3.2
1.
Wherever possible provide continuous instrumentation wiring without

splices from field device to instrument. Where connections are required,
make all connections in terminal boxes.
2.
Terminate instrumentation wiring at terminal blocks only.
3.
Where instrumentation wire is required to be connected in a terminal box,

provide an isolated terminal for each shield.
4.
Ground instrumentation shields and drain wires only at the panel end of
loop.
5.
Install clear, heat-shrink, seamless tubing over exposed shields and drain
wires in all terminal boxes, junction boxes, panels and field devices.
Accuracy of Information: The number and sizes of wires and conduits indicated
are for guidance only and are not necessarily the correct number and sizes
necessary for actual equipment installed. Install as many wires and conduits of the
required size as necessary for a complete electrical system, and provide adequately
for the equipment actually installed.
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION
A.
Labeling: Label each wire at both termination points and at each splice point in
junction boxes. Carry individual conductor or circuit identification throughout,
with circuit numbers or other identification clearly stamped on terminal boards and
printed on directory cards in distribution cabinets and panelboards.
Columbus PS
16121-7
B.
Identification: Where the total number of control and signal wires is three or more
and no terminal board is provided, identify each wire in junction boxes and
cabinets by means of plastic slip-on wire marker.
C.
Plastic Tags: In manholes, identify each wire by laminated plastic tag located so it
can be easily seen.
D.
Color Coordination: Connect circuit conductors of the same color to the same
phase throughout the installation.
3.3
WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

A.
3.4
General: Provide electrical connections to all equipment in strict accordance with

the manufacturer's approved wiring diagrams, the Plans, or as approved. Repair or
replace any damaged equipment resulting from erroneous connections.
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL LUG INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
UL Requirements: Install all connectors and terminal lugs in accordance with UL

requirements and manufacturer's recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Field Tests: Test the following 600-volt wires and cables after installation but
before final connections are made up:
1.
All secondary feeders from the pad mount transformers.
2.
All feeders between and from the low voltage switchgear assemblies.
3.
All feeders from motor control centers to motors 30 hp and larger.
4.
All feeders from variable speed drive units.
5.
All feeders from motor control centers, to lighting panels and dry-type
transformers.
6.
For the above listed cables, apply a test voltage of 1,500 volts ac for a period
of 1 minute between all conductors in the same conduit, and between each
conductors and ground.
B.
Test Results: Make all tests and submit certified test results. Replace any cables
that fail the tests.
C.
Continuity Test: Perform continuity test to demonstrate proper cable connection.

END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16121-8
SECTION 16122
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing single conductor medium voltage

cables and accessories as indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Also included are the requirements for three-conductor interlocked armored
medium voltage cable for providing temporary wiring.
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.2
Section 16050 - Basic Electric Materials and Methods

REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ASTM B 8
Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
2.
ASTM B 496 -
Standard Specification for Compact Round ConcentricLay-Stranded Copper Conductors
3.
AEIC CS6
Specifications for Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated

Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 through 69 KV
4.
UL 1072
Medium Voltage Power Cables
5.
IEEE 400
IEEE Guide for Making High-Direct-Voltage Tests on

Power Cable Systems in the Field
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish physical and electrical catalog data for all
cables and cable components and working drawings for splice kits and
terminations.
Columbus PS
16122-1
C.
Quality Control: Furnish certified Shop Test Reports for all cable lengths shipped,
and AEIC Qualification Test Reports.
D.
Number of Copies: Submit six copies of certification and warranties as described.
1.4

A.
Division 1 and as follows:
B.
Handling: Handle the cables carefully to avoid twists and kinks or other damage
to the insulation.
C.
Storage: Store cable reels on concrete or other hard surface or on 2 x 4 wood

lagging.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Written Warranty: Furnish a written 40-year minimum warranty from the cable
manufacturer that the cable is free of any factory-incurred defects.
B.
Replacement if Found Defective: In the event the cable is found defective in

design, material, or workmanship within the 40-year design life of the cable,
remove and replace the defective portion of the cable with another cable meeting
the original design specifications for the failed cable. Provide the replacement
cable with the same warranty as the replaced cable and at no additional cost to the
OWNER.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Medium voltage cable

a.
b.
2.2
Other
The Kerite Company

The Okonite Company
CABLE FOR PERMANENT WIRING

A.
General: Provide single medium voltage power cable consisting of stranded

copper conductors, conductor screen, insulation, insulation screen, metallic shield
and outer jacket, suitable for use in wet and dry locations in conduit, underground
Columbus PS
16122-2
concrete encased ducts, directly buried, and aerial installation. Provide cables
rated 90 degrees C for continuous operation, 130 degrees C for emergency
overload operation and 250 degrees C for short circuit conditions, UL listed as
Type MV-105 in accordance with UL 1072 and manufactured in accordance with
AEIC CS6.
B.
Conductors: Provide soft drawn, annealed and uncoated copper conductors with
98 percent minimum conductivity in accordance with the requirements of ASTM B
8, with Class B stranding or compact stranding meeting the requirements of ASTM
B 496. Provide conductor sizes as scheduled and as required.
C.
Conductor Screen (Shield): Provide conductor screen of an extruded layer of

semiconducting, thermosetting compound.
D.
Insulation: Provide conductor insulation other than black or grey in color of a

compound based on a thermosetting ethylene-propylene elastomer extruded in
tandem with and inseparably bonded to the conductor screen. Provide insulation
resistant to heat, moisture, impact, ozone and electrical discharge. Provide the
insulation thickness as shown below:
1.
For nominal 13.2 kV applications

a.
b.
c.
Voltage rating
Insulation thickness
Insulation level
15,000 volts
220 mils
133 percent
E.
Insulation Screen (Shield):

Provide insulation screen of an extruded
semiconducting compound. Provide insulation screen that is easily removed
without requiring the use of heat or special tools.
F.
Metallic Shield: Provide 5-mil thick helically applied coated copper tape shield
over insulation screen with a 20 percent minimum overlap.
G.
Outer Jacket: Provide an outer jacket of heavy-duty thermoplastic black polyvinyl

chloride (PVC).
2.3
CABLE FOR TEMPORARY WIRING

A.
General: Provide a three conductor interlocked armor cable consisting constructed

of three single medium voltage power cables, ground wire, fillers and binders,
interlocked armor and outer jacket suitable for use exposed in wet and dry
locations. Each single cable consisting of stranded copper conductors, conductor
screen, insulation, insulation screen, metallic shield. Provide cables rated 90
degrees C for continuous operation, 130 degrees C for emergency overload
operation and 250 degrees C for short circuit conditions, UL listed as Type MV105 in accordance with UL 1072 and manufactured in accordance with AEIC CS6.
Columbus PS
16122-3
B.
Conductors: Provide soft drawn, annealed and uncoated copper conductors with
98 percent minimum conductivity in accordance with the requirements of ASTM B
8, with Class B stranding or compact stranding meeting the requirements of ASTM
B 496. Provide conductor sizes as scheduled and as required.
C.
Conductor Screen (Shield): Provide conductor screen of an extruded layer of

semiconducting, thermosetting compound.
D.
Insulation: Provide conductor insulation other than black or grey in color of a

compound based on a thermosetting ethylene-propylene elastomer extruded in
tandem with and inseparably bonded to the conductor screen. Provide insulation
resistant to heat, moisture, impact, ozone and electrical discharge. Provide the
insulation thickness as shown below:
1.
For nominal 4.16 kV applications

a.
b.
c.
Voltage rating
Insulation thickness
Insulation level
5,000 volts
115 mils
133 percent
E.
Insulation Screen (Shield):

Provide insulation screen of an extruded
semiconducting compound. Provide insulation screen that is easily removed
without requiring the use of heat or special tools.
F.
Metallic Shield: Provide 5-mil thick helically applied coated copper tape shield
over insulation screen with a 12 percent minimum overlap.
G.
Interlocked Armor: provide interlocked armor of either corrugated aluminum or

galvanized steel.
H.
Outer Jacket: Provide an outer jacket of heavy-duty thermoplastic black polyvinyl

chloride (PVC).
2.4
COMPONENTS
A.
2.5
Connections: Provide splice and connections made up with closed end

compression connectors and terminal lugs. Provide fittings and compression tools
of the circular or hexagonal compression type rated for the voltage of the cable.
A.
General: Perform the following shop tests in accordance with the requirements of
AEIC and furnish certified test reports for all cable lengths shipped.
1.
2.
Columbus PS
Qualification tests
High voltage ac and dc tests
16122-4
3.
4.
B.
Insulation resistance test

Partial discharge test
Test Reports: Furnish certified test report for all cable lengths shipped.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Conduit Preparation: Mandrell all new and existing conduits and duct lines before
installation and swab to remove accumulated moisture and debris before cables are
pulled.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install all medium voltage cables in accordance with the manufacturer's
B.
Initial Pulls: Use lines of limited stretch to pull wire and cable into conduits. Do
not use flat steel tapes and steel cables.
C.
Lubricants: Provide cable lubricants recommended by the manufacturer when

pulling the cables into ducts and conduits.
D.
Pull Setup Approval: Obtain approval for the complete cable pulling setup,
including winches, cable reel, support frames, turning sheaves, guides and the like,
before the cables are pulled.
E.
Tension Meters: Connect a pulling tension meter to the pulling setup. Arrange the
pulling equipment and apply pulling methods so that pulling tensions do not
exceed the manufacturer's permissible limits for the cable furnished.
F.
Cable Groupings: Arrange cables securely tied, neatly bundled and racked in
manholes.
G.
Splices: Do not make splices within the conduit system. Do not make splices
within handholes or manholes except for temporary wiring where indicated.
H.
Fireproofing: Fireproof all medium voltage cables installed in manholes and

pullboxes. Provide fireproofing with approximately 30 mils thick by 3 inches wide
fireproofing tape and applied tightly around each cable spiral in one-half lapped
wrapping or in a butt jointed wrapping with a second wrapping covering joints of
the first wrapping. Smooth irregularities in cables, such as at splices, with
insulating putty before applying fireproofing tape. Install the tape with coated side
toward the cable to extend not less than one inch into conduit. Install a random
wrapping of glass cloth electrical tape around installed fireproofing tape to prevent
Columbus PS
16122-5
unravelling. Provide fireproofing tape consisting of a flexible, conformable fabric

with one side coated with a flame retardant, flexible, polymeric coating or a
chlorinated elastomer. Provide tape that is noncombustive and noncorrosive to the
cable sheath.
I.
Terminators: Install medium voltage termination as recommended by the cable

manufacturer.
J.
Lug Bolting: Provide connections at terminals, devices and bus bars made up of a
flat Belleville or equal washer, and a locknut.
K.
Unacceptable Connections: Do not use indentor type compression fittings.

Mechanical splices or lugs are not acceptable.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION OF CIRCUITS
A.
General: Identify all cables in accordance with the requirements contained in

Section 16075 and as follows.
B.
Color Code: Color code the cables with the following color code scheme.
C.
3.4
Phase A
Brown
Phase B
Orange
Phase C
Yellow
Neutral
White
Ground
Green
Coding Tape: When using color coding tape apply the tape with overlapping turns
for a minimum length of 2 inches starting 2 inches back from the termination
point.
A.
Inspection: Arrange inspection of the cable (including splices and terminations)

installation by the manufacturer. Furnish manufacturer's certificate that the cable
was installed property.
B.
Field Tests: Arrange the performance of following field tests in presence of the
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER after terminations have been made up, but before
final connections are made to equipment terminals.
1.
Columbus PS
Cable continuity test using a test light or a buzzer.
16122-6
2.
Cable insulation level (high voltage dc) test using approved dc HI-POT
equipment in accordance with IEEE 400 for the voltage rating and insulation
thicknesses given below; by an independent testing agency:
Voltage
Rating
Insulation
Thickness
dc Test
Voltage
Time of
Application
15,000 volts
220 mil
65 kV
15 Minutes
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16122-7
Columbus PS
16122-8
SECTION 16130
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing electrical raceway systems as

indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.2

Section 16132 - Underground Electrical Distribution System
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ANSI C80.1
Specifications for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated
2.
ANSI/NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
3.
NEMA RN1
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated

Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate
Metal Conduit.
4.
NEMA TC2
Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40

and EPC-80)
5.
UL 1
Flexible Metal Conduit
6.
UL 6
Rigid Metal Conduit
7.
UL 360
Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
8.
UL 651
Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
Columbus PS
16130-1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes: Provide all materials and workmanship to meet the requirements of

ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL listed components.
1.5

A.
Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Rigid steel metal conduits:

a.
b.
c.
2.
PVC coated steel conduits fitting and boxes:

a.
b.
c.
3.
Carlon Company
Certainteed Corporation
National Pipe Company
Liquidtight flexible steel conduit:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Columbus PS
Robroy Industries
Occidental Coating Company
Perma-Cote Industries
Rigid nonmetallic conduits:

a.
b.
c.
4.
Allied Tube and Conduit

Wheatland Tube Company
LTV Steel Tubular Products Company
Electri-Flex Company
The International Metal Hose Co.
Alflex Corp.
Anamet, Inc.
16130-2
Other
5.
Conduit Fitting and Connectors

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
Boxes and Enclosures:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
7.
3M/Electrical Products Division

International Protective Coatings
Nelson Electric
Terminal Blocks
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Allied Tube and Conduit

B-Line Systems, Inc.
Kindorf
Enduro
Strut Tech
Unistrut
Fire Stop System

a.
b.
c.
9.
Appleton Electric Company

Raco/Bell
Crouse Hinds Company
Thomas & Betts
Hoffman
Hope
OZ/Gedney Company
Strut Channel and Fittings

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
8.

Thomas & Betts
Crouse Hinds Company
OZ/Gedney Company
Killark
Adalet-PLM
Phoenix Contact
Entrelec
Weidmuller
RACEWAYS
A.
General: Provide minimum 3/4-inch raceways.
B.
Raceway Requirements: Provide raceways meeting the following requirements:
Columbus PS
16130-3
2.3
1.
Provide rigid steel, heavy wall, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the
requirements of UL-6 and ANSI C80.1.
2.
Provide PVC coated rigid steel in accordance with the requirements for rigid
steel raceway herein and with 40 mils bonded PVC exterior coating meeting
requirements of NEMA RN-1. Provide a nominal 2 mil urethane interior
coating and a clear urethane coating over the galvanized threads.
3.
Provide rigid nonmetallic Schedule 40 PVC in accordance with

requirements of NEMA TC2 and UL 651 with solvent cement joints.
4.
Provide liquidtight flexible single strip steel, hot-dip galvanized conduit

with PVC jacket in accordance with requirements of UL 1. Provide a
continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between convolutions
on the inside of the conduit meeting requirements of UL 360 for conduit
sizes 1-1/4-inch and smaller.
FITTINGS
A.
General: Provide fittings of similar material as raceways.
B.
Fittings Requirements: Provide fittings meeting the following requirements:

1.
Set screw or indenter type fittings are not acceptable. Provide threaded
connectors for all rigid metal conduits.
2.
Provide solvent cement connections for all rigid nonmetallic conduits.
3.
Provide insulated connectors for liquidtight flexible conduit.
4.
Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
5.
Columbus PS
a.
Provide a deflection and expansion coupling for rigid metal conduits

that have a inch movement in all directions from normal and a 30
degree angular deflection. Provide coupling that includes internal
bonding jumper.
b.
Provide a nonmetallic expansion coupling for nonmetallic conduits

that have a 4-inch maximum expansion.
Bushings
a.
Provide insulated nonmetallic bushing rated 105 degrees C for all

installations where bonding is not required.
b.
Provide insulated metallic grounding and bonding bushing rated 150

degrees C where bonding is required.
16130-4
2.4
WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS

A.
B.
2.5
Watertight:
1.
For conduit penetrations in new exterior walls or floors provide watertight

sealing sleeves consisting of a steel sleeve with pressure ring and clamps.
2.
For conduit penetrations in existing walls or floors, provide watertight

sealing bushing consisting of a neoprene sealing ring between two PVC
coated steel pressure discs. Provide stainless steel captive screws for sealing
ring compression.
Fire-proofing Through Fire Rated Construction:

1.
Provide a permanent fire stop system for all penetrations through fire-rated
walls, partitions and floors.
2.
Design fire stop system to maintain the integrity of the wall or floor
assembly for its rated time period.
3.
Arrange fire stop system to allow normal pipe movement without being
displaced.
4.
Do not utilize asbestos in fire stop systems.
5.
Provide an intumescent fire stop system when exposed to flame or heat.
BOXES AND CABINETS

A.
B.
Outlet Box Requirements:

1.
Provide galvanized cast iron boxes for galvanized rigid steel metal conduit
systems.
2.
Provide nonmetallic boxes and covers in PVC conduit systems.
3.
Provide PVC coated boxes and covers in PVC coated conduit systems.
4.
Provide watertight gasketed covers held with nonferrous screws for all cast
metal boxes.
Junction and Pull Box Requirements:

1.
Columbus PS
Provide cast aluminum boxes with mounting lugs, threaded hubs and gasket
covers for surface mounted boxes.
16130-5
C.
2.
Provide fabricated sheet metal boxes when cast metal box weight exceeds 50
pounds. Construct box from 1/8-inch thick galvanized sheet steel or
aluminum with sides return channel flanged around cover opening. Provide
angle or channel supporting frame. Provide continuously welded and
ground smooth seams. Provide mounting lugs and threaded conduit hubs.
3.
Provide cast steel or fabricated 10-gauge Type 316 stainless steel for boxes
either partially or fully encased in concrete. For partially encased boxes
provide sides return channel flanged around cover opening. For fully
encased boxes provide flush covers. Provide continuously welded and
ground smooth seams. Provide mounting lugs and threaded conduit hubs.
4.
Provide watertight gasketed covers held with stainless-steel captive screw

slot bolts.
5.
Provide two padlocking hasps for boxes containing medium voltage cables.
6.
Provide steel barriers in all boxes that isolates instrumentation wiring from
all other wiring systems
7.
Provide fabricated boxes located indoors meeting NEMA 13 requirements.
8.
Provide all boxes located outdoors meeting NEMA 4 requirements.
Terminal Box Requirements:

1.
Provide minimum 12 gauge stainless steel fabricated box with mounting

lugs, floor stand, and hinged doors.
2.
Provide the door with continuous piano hinge and 3 point lockable latch.
Provide print pocket on inside of door.
3.
Provide back plate fabricated from 12 gauge minimum steel with white
enamel finish for mounting terminals and wire troughs.
4.
Provide wire troughs consisting of plastic ducts with snap slot design and
removable covers. Run all wiring within wire troughs.
5.
Furnish a schedule of terminals with the following information

a.
b.
c.
Source
Type of Signal
Function
6.
Provide removable jumpers to allow operation of the equipment.
7.
Separate analog terminals from all other terminals.
Columbus PS
16130-6
2.6
8.
Provide number of terminals shown. Where the number of terminals are not
shown, provide sufficient terminals for each wire entering the terminal box
plus 20 percent but not less than 10 spare terminals.
9.
Terminals:
a.
All catalog numbers refer to Phoenix Contact Type for the purpose of
establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.
b.
Provide symmetrical type steel mounting rails, DIN-EN50022.
c.
Analog Signals: Provide terminals in enclosed housing suitable for

wires from 22 to 12 AWG rated 600 volts with gray body, knife
disconnect and test connection socket on both sides of disconnect,
Phoenix Contact Type UK 5-MTK-P/P.
d.
Control and Alarm Signals: Provide terminals suitable for wires from
30 to 10 AWG rated 18 amperes at 600 volts, blue body, Phoenix
Contact Type UK5N BU.
e.
120-Volt Power Wiring: Provide terminals suitable for wires from 18

to 10 AWG rated 30 amperes at 600 volts, hot (black body), neutral
(white body), ground (green body) , Phoenix Contact Type UK5N
BK, UK5N WH & UK5N GN, respectively.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Raceway Supports:
requirements:
Provide raceway supports meeting the following
1.
Do not use perforated straps or plumbers tape for conduit supports.
2.
Provide expansion bolts or inserts for fasteners in concrete, toggle bolts for
hollow masonry or frame construction, and preset inserts for prestressed
concrete.
3.
Conduit Straps and Backs:
Columbus PS
a.
For metallic conduits, provide steel or malleable iron.
b.
For nonmetallic and PVC coated conduits, provide PVC coated

malleable iron with stainless steel anchors and bolts.
16130-7
4.
5.
6.
7.
Conduit Hangers
a.
For metallic conduits, provide steel adjustable conduit hangers or

clevis hangers.
b.
For nonmetallic and PVC coated conduits, provide PVC coated

adjustable conduit hangers with stainless steel hardware.
Beam Clamps:
a.
For metallic conduits, provide malleable iron with steel bolt.
b.
For nonmetallic and PVC coated conduit, provide PVC coated

malleable iron with stainless steel bolt.
Trapeze Hangers:
a.
For metallic conduits provide 12 gauge 1-1/2-inch square steel

channels with steel channel straps to secure conduits.
b.
For nonmetallic or PVC coated conduit, provide either PVC coated 12

gauge 1-1/2-inch square steel channels or 1-5/8-inch square fiberglass
channels. Provide PVC coated straps with stainless steel bolts for
securing conduits.
c.
Provide addition channels welded together to limit the deflection to

1/240th of span.
Thread Rod
a.
Provide thread rod with the minimum size as follows:

(1)
Conduit Hangers
(a)
(b)
(c)
(2)
Columbus PS
3/4-inch to 1-1/2-inch conduit: 1/4-inch thread rod

2-inch to 3-1/2-inch conduit: 3/8-inch thread rod
4-inch and larger: 1/2-inch thread rod
Trapeze Hangers: Provide thread rod of sufficient size to

support the load. Provide a minimum of 3/8-inch thread rod.
b.
For Metallic Conduit Systems:

galvanized steel rod.
c.
For Nonmetallic or PVC Coated Conduit Systems:

continuous threaded PVC coated galvanized steel rod.
16130-8
Provide continuous threaded
Provide
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
General: Install electrical equipment and material of the size, type and general
routing as shown or required.
B.
Coordination with Reinforcing: Install raceway, fittings, boxes and cabinets free
from direct contact with reinforcing steel.
C.
Alignment: Provide fasteners, anchor bolts, anchorage items and supports as

required to insure proper and rigid alignment. Attach equipment with fasteners
sized according to size and weight of the equipment and the thickness of the
supporting surface.
D.
Aluminum Coating: Where aluminum is placed in contact with dissimilar metal or

concrete, separate contact surfaces with gasket, nonabsorptive tape or coating as
specified in Section 09900 to prevent corrosion.
E.
Grounding: Make metallic raceways electrically and mechanically continuous and

ground as required. Install conduits continuous between outlets, boxes, cabinets
and panels.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, install conduits exposed, parallel or

perpendicular to building floors, ceilings and walls, and to avoid interference with
other work. In architecturally finished areas, conceal conduits within finished
walls, ceilings and floors. Cut conduits square and deburr the cuts to the same
degree as the conduit manufacturer. Fasten conduit securely to outlets, junction,
pull and terminal boxes. Provide caps and seals to prevent the entrance of foreign
material and moisture during installation and before pulling wire.
1.
Where conduit size is not shown, provide conduits one size larger than
indicated in Table 4, Chapter 9 of the NEC.
2.
Support raceways concealed above suspended ceilings from the slab above
suspended ceiling in same manner as exposed raceways. Do not support
raceways from suspended ceiling supports.
3.
Keep conduit at least six inches away from high temperature piping, ducts,
flues and surfaces. For mounting on concrete and masonry surfaces provide
a minimum of 1/4 inch air space between conduit and mounting surface.
Support and fasten conduit to building structural members spaced in
accordance with electrical codes. Support conduit at least every eight feet or
less in accordance with NEC requirements.
Columbus PS
16130-9
B.
4.
When two or more exposed conduits are in the same general routing,
provide parallel installation with symmetrical bends and for three or more
provide trapeze hangers. Size trapeze hangers with space for 25 percent
additional conduits.
5.
Make changes in direction with bends or fittings. Use factory-made bends

or elbows wherever possible. Make field bends and offsets with a hand
bender or conduit-bending machine. Provide a bending radius not less than
36-inches for conduits containing medium voltage cables.
6.
Run conduit in buildings with no more than the equivalent of (three) 90

degree bends between pull points. Provide no more than (125) feet of
conduit runs between pull points. Provide pull boxes where shown,
specified or wherever required to install conductors and to meet the above
requirement.
7.
Install pull and junction boxes in accessible locations with working space in
front of and around the installation. Obtain approval to locate boxes in
finished areas.
8.
Install an expansion fitting when a conduit crosses a building structural

expansion joint.
9.
Unless otherwise approved, install conduits to cross at right angles to

building structural expansion joints.
10.
Where approved for encased installation, install conduits in slabs as close to

the middle of concrete slabs as practicable without disturbing reinforcement.
Do not use conduit with an outside diameter exceeding one-third of the slab
thickness. Do not place conduits closer than three diameters on centers,
except at cabinet locations where the slab thickness is increased.
11.
Pitch conduits to outlet boxes to avoid trapping moisture. Where dips are
unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, install drain fitting at low point.
Conduit Material Types: Provide conduit as follows:

1.
Provide PVC coated rigid steel conduits in all outdoor installations.
2.
Provide rigid steel conduits in all indoor installations exposed and concealed
in structures, concrete encased within structures or under structures.
3.
Provide rigid nonmetallic Schedule 40 conduits underground, concrete

encased or direct buried, unless specifically detailed otherwise.
Columbus PS
16130-10
C.
Connections to Equipment
1.
Provide double locknuts and bushing for all boxes, enclosures and cabinets
located in dry areas.
2.
Provide watertight hub fittings for all boxes, enclosures and cabinets located
below grade or in wet, damp or corrosive areas.
3.
Provide rigid conduit connection where equipment is fixed and not subject
to adjustment, mechanical movement or vibration. Provide union fittings to
permit removal of equipment without cutting or breaking conduit.
4.
Provide liquidtight flexible conduit connection where equipment is subject

to adjustment, mechanical movement or vibration.
5.
Coat all threads in steel conduit runs with zinc dust in oil or other corrosionpreventive compound before making connections.
D.
Underground Conduits: Provide underground conduits meeting the requirements

of Section 16132.
E.
Penetrations: Make concealed penetrations for single conduits not more than 1/4inch larger than the diameter of the conduit. Make penetrations through walls,
ceilings and floors other than concrete for exposed conduits not more than 1/4-inch
larger than the diameter of the conduit. Fill the voids around conduit with caulking
compound and finish the surface the same as the wall, ceiling or floor.
F.
1.
Where a conduit enters through a concrete roof or membrane waterproofed

wall, floor or ceiling, provide a watertight sealing sleeve that can be
tightened from one or both sides. If the sealing sleeve is not placed with the
concrete, core drill the proper size hole to provide a mechanically watertight
installation.
2.
Where a conduit enters through a concrete non-waterproofed wall, floor or

ceiling, provide a galvanized steel sleeve, Schedule 40, and fill the space
between the conduit and sleeve with a plastic expandable compound. If the
sleeve is not placed with the concrete, drill the hole not less than 1/2-inch
nor more than one inch larger than the sleeve, center the sleeve and grout the
sleeve for the total depth of penetrated concrete with non-shrink grout,
polyurethane or silicone sealant.
Spare Conduit: Provide spare conduits for future use as shown or required.
Provide a minimum 200 pound strength nylon pull line in each spare conduit and
identify the origin and termination of the conduit at each end. Terminate spare
conduits in equipment, boxes or by couplings plugged flush with the inside of
building surfaces.
Columbus PS
16130-11
G.
3.3
Boxes: Provide boxes of the proper dimensions for the size and quantity of
conductors enclosed.
1.
For boxes mounted on steel, concrete and masonry surface, provide a

minimum 1/4-inch non-metallic spacer to hold the box away from the
surface.
2.
Provide pressed metal boxes in all partition constructed walls.
3.
Provide separate support for boxes and bolt units to buildings with
expansion anchors, toggle bolts or appropriate screws. For lighting fixture
outlet boxes, provide supports adequate to support the weight of the fixture
to be mounted on the box.
4.
Remove debris including dust, dirt, wire clippings and insulation from the
interior of boxes. Replace boxes with open conduit holes. Repair or replace
damaged boxes as directed.
5.
Unless otherwise indicated, mount outlet boxes flush with the finished wall
or ceiling, with the long axis vertical. Unless otherwise shown or specified,
provide mounting heights measured from the finished floor to centerline of
the outlet box as follows:
a.
For switches: 4'-6". Mount the box for lighting switches on the strike
side of the door.
b.
For duplex convenience outlets:

unfinished areas 2 feet.
c.
For fixtures and equipment: As shown.
d.
For desk telephone outlets: 12 inches.
e.
For wall telephone outlets: 57 inches.
Finished areas 12 inches and

A.
Field Painting: Paint conduits meeting the requirements of Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16130-12
SECTION 16132
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing and installing underground

electrical raceway system consisting of concrete encased conduits, direct buried
conduits and cables, manholes, handholes, and outdoor electrical equipment pads
as shown.
B.
Related Work Specified in Other Section Includes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.2
Section 02218 - Landscaping Work

Section 02316 - Excavation - Earth and Rock
Section 02317 - Backfilling
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
Section 16122 - Medium Voltage Cables
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements: Provide precast manholes and handholes that withstand the
earth and hydrostatic pressures and the vehicular load of 20,800 lbs total = H20
AASHTO truck loading, rear wheel load of 16,000 lbs plus 30 percent impact
(4,800 lbs).
B.
Performance Requirements: Route conduits to allow pulling-in of conductors as

indicated without exceeding the conductor's tension limits.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturer's data for conduits, manholes
and handholes and all accessories.
Columbus PS
16132-1
C.
Contractors Shop Drawings: Furnish working drawings for underground electrical

raceway system showing conduits, concrete encasement, manholes, handholes,
electrical equipment pads and reinforcing. Indicate designation, type, size,
location, elevations and slope.
D.
Quality Control: Furnish a signed and sealed certification from a professional

engineer registered in the state of Virginia stating that the design calculations and
drawings for the precast concrete manholes and handholes were prepared by that
professional engineer or under his direct supervision.
1.4

A.
1.5
Division 1.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Conditions: Examine record drawings to determine the location of all

obstructions along the conduit or cable route and at the sites of manholes,
handholes and outdoor electrical equipment pads.
B.
Field Measurements: Field survey, and in critical areas, excavate test pits to verify
locations of probable obstacles along the conduit or cable route and at the sites of
manholes, handholes and outdoor electrical equipment pads.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Conduit Spacers
a.
b.
2.
Precast Manholes and Handholes

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Columbus PS
Carlon Company
Underground Devices, Inc.
Penn-Cast Products, Inc.

Hartford Concrete Products, Inc.
Jensen Precast
Rockway Precast
Strongwell - Quazite
16132-2
Other
3.
Manhole and Handhole Frames and Covers

a.
4.
Buried warning tape

a.
b.
5.
Thomas & Betts

W. H. Brady Company
Manhole Accessories (pulling irons, cable rack and supports, insulators)

a.
b.
2.2
Neenah Foundry Co.
Cooper Power Systems Division

A.B. Chance Company
MATERIALS
A.
Conduit: Provide conduits meeting the requirements of Section 16130.
B.
Cable: Provide cables meeting the requirements of Section 16121 and 16122.
C.
Spacers: Provide rigid plastic, conduit spacers to maintain conduit separation as

indicated.
D.
Reinforcing Steel: Provide reinforcing steel meeting the requirements of Section

03200.
E.
Concrete: Provide concrete meeting the requirements of Section 03310. Dye all
concrete used for duct bank encasements red.
F.
Manhole Frames and Covers: Provide waterproof cast iron manhole frame and
solid bolted cover suitable for H-20 truck load. Cast the word "ELECTRIC" in the
cover. Provide frame with a clear opening of 36 inches, unless otherwise shown.
G.
Grounding: Provide grounding meeting the requirements of Section 16060.
H.
Underground Warning Tape: Provide 6-inch wide detectable type plastic tape in
red (electric), yellow (utility) and orange (communications) colors with suitable
warning describing the type of buried electrical lines.
2.3
MANHOLE ACCESSORIES
A.
Pulling-in Irons:
galvanized steel.
B.
Cable Racks and Supports: Provide racks and supports constructed of heavy-duty,
hot-dip galvanized steel.
Columbus PS
Provide pulling-in irons constructed of hot-forged, hot-dip
16132-3
C.
Insulators: Provide insulators made of high grade, dry process porcelain with
smooth glazed surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install underground, concrete encased and direct buried conduits as

indicated.
B.
Conduit Route: Establish and mark exactly conduit or cable routing. Resolve
routing near existing obstacles and coordinate with other sitework. Maintain a 12inch minimum longitudinal clearance from the conduit bank encasement or direct
buried conduit to adjacent utility lines. Maintain a 6-inch minimum vertical
clearance from the conduit bank encasement or direct buried conduit to utility lines
at crossovers. Adhere to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions as shown.
Deviations from the minimum clearances due to existing conditions must be
approved by the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.
C.
Trench Excavation: Perform excavation work in accordance with the requirements

of Section 02316.
D.
Workmat: Install concrete mat on trench bottom to provide an even base for
concrete encased conduit bank in accordance with the requirements of Section
03310.
E.
Bedding: Provide a sand cover on trench bottoms for a firm and smooth surface
for direct buried conduits.
F.
Spacers: Locate spacers at intervals of approximately four feet and stagger

locations at each conduit tier to provide not less than 12-inches of longitudinal
separation.
G.
Conduit: Place conduit in straight lines and with a minimum slope of 0.25 percent
(3 inches per 100 feet). Slope conduit down to manholes, handholes and
structures. Install expansion fittings in straight runs exceeding 100-feet. Secure
conduits in place to prevent floating and movement.
H.
Bends: Install 12-foot minimum radius bends in horizontal turns and vertical
deflections. For bends used at ends of conduit runs install elbows with 4-foot
minimum radius for 6-inch and 5-inch conduits, and elbows with 3-foot minimum
radius for 4-inch and smaller conduits. Deviations to accommodate existing
conditions must be approved by the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.
I.
Inside Cleaning: Pull a standard flexible mandrel not less than 12-inches long,
having a diameter approximately 1/4-inch less than the inside diameter of the
Columbus PS
16132-4
conduit, through each conduit, then pull a brush with stiff bristles through each
conduit. Replace conduit runs that do not allow the passage of the mandrel at no
increase in Contract Price. Use the pneumatic method to draw into conduit the
nylon or polypropylene pull line. Plug and seal all conduits after cleaning.
J.
Concrete Reinforcing: Install concrete reinforcing meeting the requirements of

Section 03200. Provide ductbanks with No. 5 reinforcing, spaced 12 inches on
centers, top and bottom, with No. 3 ties at 18 inches, unless otherwise shown.
K.
Concrete Formwork:
Section 03100.
L.
Outside Cleaning: Remove dirt, sand and debris around conduits and from
workmat, prior to concrete placement.
M.
Concrete Placement: Place concrete meeting the requirements of Section 03310.
N.
Connections to Structures: Install as shown.
O.
Backfilling: Backfill meeting the requirements of Section 02317. Provide a sand

cover that is 6 inches over direct buried conduits or cables.
P.
Underground Warning Tape: Install one underground warning tape for each trench
up to 18 inches wide. For trenches wider than 18 inches provide two underground
warning tapes, one at each edge of the trench. Place the tape or tapes 12 inches
below the finished grade.
Q.
Surface Finish: Restore existing pavements and curbs with materials and
construction to match existing. Restore landscaped areas meeting the requirements
of Section 02218.
3.2
Install concrete formwork meeting the requirements of
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A.
General: Provide precast reinforced concrete manholes and handholes as shown.
B.
Location: Establish and mark manhole and handhole locations exactly. Resolve
locations near existing obstacles and coordinate with other sitework. Adhere to
orientation, elevations and dimensions as indicated.
C.
Hole Excavation: Install hole excavations meeting the requirements of Section

02316.
D.
Precast Manhole and Handhole Installation: Place a 6-inch high compacted

crushed stone base on the hole bottom under entire floor slab.
Columbus PS
16132-5
E.
Manhole Entrance: Install concrete rings and frame with cover. Adjust position of
frame and cover to protrude 1-inch above adjacent unpaved ground or to be flush
with the finished surface of pavement.
F.
Backfilling: Backfill meeting the requirements of Section 02317.
G.
Accessories: Install pulling-in-irons, cable racks with supports and insulators,

grounding system and other items as indicated.
3.3
OUTDOOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PADS

A.
General: Provide reinforced concrete pads for supporting Outdoor Electrical

Equipment as shown.
B.
Location: Establish and mark pad locations exactly. Resolve locations near
existing obstacles and coordinate with other sitework under this Contract. Adhere
to orientation, elevations and dimensions as shown.
C.
Site Excavation: Provide site excavation meeting the requirements of Section

02316.
D.
Pad Construction: Install pad construction meeting the requirements of Sections

03100, 03200 and 03310.
E.
Conduit Entrances: Install conduit risers and laterals under pads prior to
placement of pads. Separate conduits from pads as shown.
F.
Grounding: Install grounding conductors through pads meeting the requirements

of Section 16060.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16132-6
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing, wiring devices and appurtenances

as indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.2

Section 16130 - Electrical Raceway System
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
Fed Spec WC 596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle and

Cable Outlet
2.
Fed Spec WS 896 - Toggle and Lock, Flush Mounted Switches
3.
CSA C22.2-182.1 - Industrial-type, Special-Use

Receptacles and Connectors
4.
UL 20
- General - Use Snap Switches
5.
UL 498
- Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
6.
UL 508
- Industrial Control Equipment
Attachment
Plugs,
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

and Section 16050.
A.
Division 1.
Columbus PS
16140-1
1.5
SPARE PARTS
A.
B.

1.
Six 20-ampere, 125-volt, 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type plugs, NEMA 520P, nylon housing, Hubbell Cat. No. HBL5366C
2.
Six 20-ampere, 125-volt, 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type plugs, NEMA 520P, corrosion resistant, yellow nylon housing, Hubbell Cat No. HBL
53CM66C
3.
Ten percent but not less that 5 matching plugs for each type and rating of
receptacle furnished
Packaging: Package spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating

contents. Identify all spare parts with information needed for reordering. Deliver
spare parts in original factory packages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Standard of Quality and General Configuration: Use of manufacturer's name and

model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the desired.
B.
Configuration And Rating: Provide NEMA specification grade wiring devices in

the type, color, configuration and electrical rating for the service indicated.
C.
Symbols: See the electrical symbol list shown for identification of all device
types.
D.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Columbus PS
Hubbell Inc. Wiring Device/Kellems Division

Bryant
Pass and Seymour
Cooper Wiring Devices
Crouse-Hinds Company
Tay Mac Corporation
Thomas & Betts
16140-2
Other
2.2
LIGHTING TOGGLE SWITCHES

A.
General: Provide toggle switches of specification grade rated 20- amperes, 120277 volts ac conforming to Fed. Spec. WS 896 and UL Standard 20. Manufacture
switches with back and side wired binding screw type terminals, one piece spring
contact arm and terminal plate with silver alloy contacts, one piece steel mounting
strap with an assured grounding clip, thermoset body color coded for identification
by amperage and a brown toggle. Provide ivory toggles in finished areas.
B.
Types:
DESCRIPTION
C.
2.3
HUBBELL CAT. NO.
Single pole
HBL1221
Two pole
HBL1222
Three way
HBL1223
SPDT center off

momentary contact
HBL1557
Accessories: Provide a flush neon "ON" pilot light in conjunction with switches
controlling equipment whose operation is not evident at the switch location.
Provide an engraved nameplate to identify equipment controlled.
CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES
A.
General: Provide specification grade convenience receptacles conforming to Fed.

Spec. WC 596 UL listed, with nylon impact resistant face, one piece metal wrap
around mounting strap with assured grounding clip, back and side wired binding
screw type terminals, brass power contacts and a heavy duty heat stabilized
thermoset plastic base. Provide brown devices in unfinished areas and ivory
devices in finished areas unless otherwise specified.
B.
TYPES:
Columbus PS
DESCRIPTION
Single
RATING
NEMA 5-20R
20A, 125V, 2P, 3W
COLOR
Brown/
Ivory
HUBBELL
CAT. NO.
HBL5361/
HBL5361I
Duplex
NEMA 5-20R
20A, 125V, 2P, 3W
Brown/
Ivory
HBL5362/
HBL5362I
Singlecorrosionresistant
NEMA 5-20R
20A, 125V, 2P, 3W
Yellow
HBL53CM61
16140-3
2.4
DESCRIPTION
Duplexcorrosionresistant
RATING
NEMA 5-20R
20A, 125V, 2P, 3W
COLOR
Yellow
HUBBELL
CAT. NO.
HBL53CM62
Quadraplex
NEMA 5-20R
20A, 125V, 2P, 3W
Brown/
Ivory
HBL420H/
HBL420HI
SPECIAL USE RECEPTACLES

A.
General: Provide special use receptacles of specification grade in accordance with

applicable Fed. Specs., UL, ANSI and CSA Standards.
B.
Types:
DESCRIPTION
Duplex-ground
fault circuit
interrupter
2.5
RATING
NEMA 5-20R
20A, 125V, 2P, 3W
COLOR
Brown/
Ivory
HUBBELL
CAT. NO.
GF5362/
GF5362I
TELEPHONE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A.
General: Provide non-metallic single gang telephone/data communication outlets

consisting of a two or three hole straps for mounting modular telephone jacks or
Category 5 data jacks.
B.
Types:
2.6
DESCRIPTION
Two hole strap
COLOR
Ivory
HUBBELL
CAT. NO.
FCX2441
Three hole strap
Ivory
FCX3441
Telephone Modular Jack

(RJ25)
Ivory
TS6UI
Category 5 Modular Jack

(T568B Wired)
Ivory
TS8A5I
BOXES
A.
Outlet Boxes: Provide outlet boxes in accordance with the requirements specified
in Section 16130.
Columbus PS
16140-4
2.7
PLATES AND COVERS

A.
General: Provide covers and plates for the various areas as follows:
1.
Architectural Finished Areas: Provide Type 302/304 stainless steel plates

and covers for devices.
2.
Areas Below Grade, Wet and Damp Areas:

a.
For switches provide weatherproof, gasketed, covers with external

operating handle.
b.
For receptacles provide a weatherproof, gasketed, clear, flameretardant, jumbo, polycarbonate cover a minimum of 5.4-inches deep,
suitable for use with a 10-3 cord that allows the cover to be closed
even when the receptacle is in use.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install all wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and approved shop drawings as specified in Division 1.
B.
Toggle Switches: Install toggle switches applicable for the area environment for
switching lighting or other branch circuit loads.
C.
Receptacles: Install receptacles applicable for the area environment.
D.
Grounding: Ground all devices in accordance with the requirements specified in

Section 16060.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16140-5
Columbus PS
16140-6
SECTION 16210
ELECTRICAL UTILITY COORDINATION AND REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for arrangement and coordination with the Utility
Company for the permanent electrical power service. City will pay all DVP costs
for changes to the DVP power supply system to the Columbus Pumping Station.
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.2
Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

Section 16085 - Short Circuit and Coordination Study
Section 16266 - Adjustable Frequency Drives
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Utility Company: Dominion Virginia Power

7500 West Broad Street
Richmond, VA 23294
B.
System Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
13,200 - Volts
3 - Phase
3 - Wire
Solidly Grounded Neutral
The existing electrical service to the Columbus Pumping Station consists of a

primary metered 13.2kV underground feeder serving the City owned pad mount
1,500 kVA transformer adjacent to the pump station which steps the voltage down
to 4160V, 3-phase to serve 4.16kV Switchgear CSG-1 inside the pump station. The
design intent is to retain primary metering and to re-use portions of the existing
13.2kV duct bank and constructing new duct bank portions for installing a new
upgraded primary feeder. The new primary feeder will serve a new 13.2kV-480V,
3-phase pad mount 2,000 kVA transformer which will feed the new 480V
Switchgear CSGR-1 in the Electrical Building. Arrange for and provide any
upgrades needed for the primary metering.
Columbus PS
16210-1
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Correspondence: Furnish copies of all correspondence with the Utility Company

including available short circuit currents and X/R ratings for each feeder.
C.
Utility Company Drawings: Furnish Utility Company prepared drawings.
D.
Layout Drawings: Furnish the following drawings:

1.
2.
1.4
Equipment pad details

Equipment mounting details.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
General: Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company's written

requirements and standards.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility

Company drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
UTILITY METERING
A.
Existing Metering: If the existing metering is suitable for retrofit to accommodate

the service upgrade, provide new metering transformers, meter base and wiring as
required in accordance with the Utility Company's standards. Otherwise, provide
new facilities as follows:
B.
Revenue Meters: Meters will be furnished by Utility Company.
C.
Meter Base: Provide meter base in accordance with the requirements of the Utility
Company.
D.
Metering Transformer Cabinet: Provide a metering transformer cabinet and

appurtenances in accordance with the requirements of the Utility Company.
Columbus PS
16210-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
General: Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized.

PREPARATION
A.
Utility Company Arrangements: CONTRACTOR to make arrangements with

Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.
B.
Utility Company Access: Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to

provide proper access.
C.
Coordination: Coordinate schedule of Utility Company's facilities with all other

work.
D.
Coordinate the sequencing of the service upgrade to minimize the down time for
the Utility service.
E.
Utility Company System Information: Obtain all information required to perform

the Harmonic Analysis as specified in Section 16266 and the Short Circuit and
Coordination Study specified in Section 16085.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install Electrical Power Service in accordance with the Utility

Companys recommendations and approved shop drawings and as specified in
Division 1.
B.
Metering Transformer Cabinet and Meter Base: Modify existing or install new
metering transformer cabinet and meter base in accordance with the Utility
Company requirements and as shown.
C.
Concrete Pads: Provide cast-in-place concrete pads for Utility Company

equipment, pad mount transformer and other service related equipment.
D.
Carefully remove the concrete pad for the existing pad mount transformer and
associated secondary conduits into the pump room.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16210-3
Columbus PS
16210-4
SECTION 16220
ELECTRIC MOTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for electric motors as specified.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
AFBMA 10 - Metal Balls

NEMA CP1 - Shunt Capacitors
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information:

motor.
C.
Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings for each motor detailing arrangement,
wiring, conduit boxes, and motor application.
D.
Certificate of Compatibility: For each motor controlled by an adjustable frequency

drive, furnish a certificate that the motors are compatible with the adjustable
frequency drives and the equipment loads to be driven.
E.
Quality Control: Furnish test reports for motors as follows:

1.
Columbus PS
Furnish manufacturer's catalog data for each
Certified standard commercial test reports for motors 5 hp through 200 hp.
16220-1
F.
1.4
2.
Actual shop test reports for motors over 200 hp.
3.
Witnessed test reports as specified.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish operation and maintenance

manuals for all motors as specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the Regulatory Agencies

having jurisdiction over this Project.
1.5

A.
Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Other
General Electric Company

Louis Allis
Magnetek
Reliance Electric
Siemens
U.S. Electrical Motors
TECO/Westinghouse Corp.
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide motors and accessories with the equipment as specified under the
equipment sections.
B.
Motor Requirements: Unless otherwise specified, provide motors as follows:

1.
Polyphase motors of the high energy efficiency and high power factor type.
2.
Motor nameplate horsepower as specified for the driven equipment.
Columbus PS
16220-2
C.
2.3
3.
Motors that operate continuously over the entire load range of the driven
equipment without loading motor in excess of nameplate rating and its
specified temperature limit.
4.
For motors rated hp to 500 hp operating at 460 volts, 3-phase, 60-hertz,

provide squirrel cage induction type.
5.
For motors less than hp, provide 115-volt, single phase, 60-hertz type.
6.
Motors that are suitable for continuous operation with a line voltage
variation within 10-percent of rated voltage.
7.
Motors that operate continuously in a 40 degrees C ambient.
8.
Inverter duty motors when powered from an adjustable frequency drive.
Frequent Start Requirements: Provide motors for frequent starting as specified.

MECHANICAL PROTECTION
A.
Indoor Locations:
1.
For motors located in dry, clean and well ventilated areas provide open dripproof type.
2.
For motors located below grade, provide totally-enclosed, fan-cooled type

with removable drain plug.
3.
For motors located in wet, damp or dusty areas, provide totally-enclosed,

fan-cooled type with removable drain plug.
4.
In corrosive areas as defined in Section 16050 or as shown, provide totallyenclosed, fan-cooled type with removable drain plug.
B.
Outdoor Locations: For motors located outdoors, provide a totally-enclosed, fancooled type with removable drain plug.
C.
Submersible Locations: For operation in an hazardous location, provide a

completely sealed submersible motor.
2.4
BOXES
A.
General: Provide oversized conduit boxes on motors to facilitate conductor

installation and auxiliary components as required.
1.
Columbus PS
Provide separate boxes for motor power leads, accessory terminals and RTD
leads.
16220-3
2.5
2.
Make conduit box NEMA enclosure ratings compatible with motor

enclosures.
3.
Where shown, provide additional space in the power terminal box for the
mounting and wiring of the current transformers furnished under the motor
protection system.
NEMA DESIGN AND INSULATION

A.
Design Classification: Provide NEMA Design B, unless otherwise specified with

NEMA Class F moisture resistant insulation and NEMA Class B, 80 degrees C
temperature rise at rated nameplate load.
B.
Variable Speed Operation: Provide insulation to protect against adverse affects of

a nonsinusoidal waveform.
2.6
WINDINGS
A.
2.7
General: Provide copper windings unless otherwise specified.

BEARINGS
A.
Ball and Roller Bearings: Use antifriction ball or roller type bearings at
manufacturer's option, unless otherwise specified.
B.
Regreasable Bearings: Use regreasable bearings with support side thrust loadings,
with a AFBMA B-10 bearing life rated at least 100,000 hours, based on a
reliability of 90 percent.
2.8
SERVICE FACTOR AND LOADINGS

A.
Service Factor: Provide 1.15 service factor for sinusoidal voltage waveforms and
1.0 for nonsinusoidal voltage waveforms unless otherwise specified. Where
motors with a 1.0 service factor are furnished, provide motors rated at least 15
percent greater than required brake horsepower.
B.
Shaft Loading: Provide steady state shaft loading not to exceed 100 percent of full
load rating under maximum load, excluding the service factor, unless otherwise
specified.
2.9
SPEED
A.
General: Provide motor speed as specified for the driven equipment.
B.
Multispeed: Provide multispeed motors as specified for the driven equipment.
Columbus PS
16220-4
C.
2.10
Adjustable Speed: Provide motors specifically designed and rated for use with the
adjustable speed device furnished.
TORQUE
A.
General: Provide breakdown torque of 200 percent or more of motor full load
torque.
B.
Locked Rotor: Provide locked rotor torque of 80 percent or more of motor full
load torque.
C.
Inertia: Provide necessary WK2 data for special loads to coordinate with motors.
D.
Special Motors:
standard design.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
Supply special motors where torque requirements exceed
SLIDE RAILS AND SOLE PLATES

General: Provide slide rails and sole plates as required for proper installation.
SINGLE PHASE FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS
Small Motor Requirements: Provide capacitor or open split phase start, for smaller
than 1/2 hp motors unless otherwise specified.
THREE-PHASE MOTORS
Induction Motors: Provide horizontal or vertical squirrel cage induction motors for
continuous duty with full voltage starting except as otherwise specified.
EFFICIENCY
General: Provide motor meeting the requirements as stated in Table of Full Load
Efficiency of Energy Efficient Motors in NEMA MG1-12.
POWER FACTOR
General: Provide motors having the following minimum power factor ratings:
Horsepower
1
1-1/2
2
3
Columbus PS
Percent
At 1800 RPM At 1200 RPM
Power Factor
Power Factor
74.3
76.5
70.3
79.9
16220-5
69.7
62.0
70.1
73.7
Horsepower
5
7-1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
450
2.16
A.
2.17
Percent
At 1800 RPM At 1200 RPM
Power Factor
Power Factor
83.8
82.4
85.0
85.0
84.6
84.5
84.2
84.2
85.0
86.8
86.6
88.3
89.3
88.5
88.5
75.8
78.2
76.4
81.1
81.9
82.0
82.5
83.3
84.9
85.7
86.0
86.4
85.8
87.5
87.9
95.0
NOISE
General: Limit motor machine noise to sound power levels listed in NEMA MG 112.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Identification:
16075.
B.
Space Heaters: Where specified or shown, provide motor space heaters to prevent
moisture condensation when the motor is not operating. Provide space heaters
suitable for 115-volt, single phase, 60-hertz operation.
C.
Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs): Where specified or shown, provide

motor bearing and winding RTDs of the 100-ohm platinum, three-wire type.
2.18
Provide identification meeting the requirements with Section
A.
Shop Tests: Perform actual job motor shop tests for motors over 200 hp. Include
standard commercial and additional tests listed below, and special tests listed in
other sections.
B.
Standard Commercial Tests:

NEMA standards.
Columbus PS
Perform the following tests in accordance with
16220-6
C.
1.
No load running current and speed
2.
Locked rotor current
3.
Dielectric routine tests
4.
Motor efficiency tests
5.
Motor power factor tests
Additional Testing: Perform the following additional tests in accordance with

NEMA standards.
1.
Winding resistance
2.
Bearing inspection
3.
Power factor at full, 3/4 and 1/2 load
4.
Efficiency at full, 3/4 and 1/2 load
5.
Motor starting torque
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General: Install motors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

and approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1. Make all necessary
adjustments to equipment to provide a complete operational system.
A.
Inspections and Tests: Perform field preliminary and final inspection and testing
for motors as specified in Division 1 and as follows:
1.
Columbus PS
Preliminary Inspection:
a.
Demonstrate that each motor has been properly connected.
b.
Check for proper rotation by bumping prior to connecting motor to

driven equipment.
16220-7
2.
3.3
Final Test:
a.
Measure motor applied voltage and current with equipment operating

at full load.
b.
Operate equipment as specified.

A.
Shop Painting: Paint the motors in accordance with the requirements of Section
09900.
B.
Field Painting: Clean and touch up marred surfaces to match the original finish.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16220-8
SECTION 16230
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing a packaged engine generator system

to supply emergency and standby electrical power as specified and shown. The
system consists of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.2
Diesel engine-driven generator and radiator mounted on a structural steel

base.
Exhaust silencer and fittings.
Fuel storage day tank, fuel pipelines and fittings.
Generator control and instrument panel.
Generator circuit breaker.
Battery and charger including battery rack.
Vibration isolators.
General purpose enclosure
Section 01820 - Training

Section 13201 - Aboveground Fuel Oil Storage Tank and Accessories
Section 13312 - Process Controller System
Section 16430 - 480 Volt Switchgear
REFERENCES
A.
Codes and Standards: Codes and standards referred to in this section:

1.
Columbus PS
ASTM A 185
- Specification for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric,

Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
16230-1
1.3
2.
ASTM A 615/A615M
- Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet

Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
3.
NFPA 30
- Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
4.
UL 142
- Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and

Combustible Liquids
5.
UL 1709
- Rapid Rise Fire Tests of Protection Materials for

Structural Steel
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General: The generator unit is to function as an emergency/standby power source

for use in the event of failure of the incoming normal power service and during
normal exercising operations. Generator unit consists of a diesel, engine-driven,
generator mounted on a structural steel base, complete with instrument panel,
generator circuit breaker, generator control panel, starting system, governor,
engine jacket-water cooling system, exhaust silencer, radiator, voltage regulator,
and all appurtenances necessary for a complete functioning generation system.
The fuel storage tank is to provide for continuous 48-hour operation of the system
in the event of failure of normal power service. Provide a generator unit that is
UL2200 listed and labeled.
B.
Minimum Generator Capacity: Provide a minimum generator capacity of 1250 kW

at 480volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz, 0.8 power factor and 1800 rpm; at an elevation of
100 feet above sea level; at an ambient temperature ranging between -10 degrees to
110 degrees F. Provide a generator system capable of starting and running the
following motors in the sequence and with the starting device indicated, with a 76
kVA incidental load already on the generator bus and a voltage drop not exceeding
20 percent under the following conditions:
1.4
1.
Starting one squirrel-cage induction 500 hp motor by an adjustable

frequency drive with two squirrel-cage induction 500 hp motors operating at
80-percent loading by an adjustable frequency drive.
2.
Operating three squirrel-cage induction 500 hp motors operating at 90percent loading by adjustable frequency drive units.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Furnish all submittals including the following as required in Division 1

and Section 16050.
1.
Columbus PS
Furnish calculations to support the generators capacity to start and operate

the motors listed in Subsection 1.3 B. This calculation is required for review
of the equipment submittal.
16230-2
2.
Furnish starting battery sizing calculations.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish product data and information showing
dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams
for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust
silencer, vibration isolators, fuel tank, cooling system, and remote annunciator.
C.
Contractor's Shop Drawings: Furnish Contractor's shop drawings showing plan

and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel
consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air
requirements, and electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection
diagrams.
D.
Quality Control: Furnish the manufacturer's certified, shop-test report including

the following tests:
1.
Generator tests in accordance with IEEE Test Code for synchronous

machines including heat run at rated output, insulation resistance and high
potential.
2.
Engine generator tests in accordance with specifications including the

following:
a.
b.
c.
Two hours continuous operation at full load.

One-half hour at 75 percent of full load.
One-half hour at 50 percent of full load.
Furnish test reports indicating voltage, amperes, kilovolt-amperes, kilowatts,

rpm and fuel consumption for each load condition as curves; and containing
statements on temperature rise of oil and cooling water, vibration and other
objectionable performance conditions. Furnish test data showing voltage
drop and frequency fluctuations when block loads are added and removed in
25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent and 100 percent increments.
3.
Furnish manufacturer's installation instructions, in accordance with the

provisions of Division 1.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's operation and

maintenance manuals, as required in Division 1.
F.
Record Documents: Furnish record documents, in accordance with the provisions

in Division 1, accurately indicating the locations of engine generator and
mechanical and electrical connections.
Columbus PS
16230-3
1.5
DELIVERY
A.
1.6
General: Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as required in
Division 1.
SPARE PARTS
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Two auxiliary relays and contactors of each type used.

Two fuse replacements of each type used.
Two replacements of all types of indicating lamps and color caps used.
Two time delay relays of each type used.
One current transformer of each type used.
One potential transformer of each type used.
Two Start/Stop push buttons and selector switch of each type used.
One automatic voltage regulator.
Three full sets of fuel, air and oil filters
Two complete sets of V-belts
Three 12-ounce spray cans of the final finish for touch-up
Packaging: Pack spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating

contents and related pieces of equipment. Deliver spare parts in original factory
packages. Identify all spare parts with information needed for reordering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are listed below. Other

1.
Engine generator set and accessories

a.
b.
c.
2.
Generator Circuit Breaker

a.
b.
c.
Columbus PS
Caterpillar Inc.
Cummins Power Generation
Kohler Power Systems

Square D Company
Cutler-Hammer
16230-4
3.
Fuel Oil Day Tanks

a.
b.
c.
4.
Battery and Charger

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Tramont
Pryco
E&CA
Alcad Inc.
Chloride Inc.
SAFT Nife
LaMarche
MATERIALS
A.
Engine: Provide vee type, water-cooled, diesel engine with, with a minimum of 12
cylinders, turbo-charged, four-stroke cycle compression operating on No. 2D
diesel fuel oil. Provide an engine equipped with fuel, lube-oil and air-intake filters
with replaceable elements; lube-oil cooler, gear-driven coolant pump, fuel-priming
pump, fuel-transfer pump, engine-jacket water heater and pressure relief and
bypass valves. Provide an engine having exhaust-valve seats replaceable with
inserts. Provide a standby power unit that is EPA Tier III certified. Provide the
engine directly connected to the generator and the set mounted on a common
structural-steel base.
1.
Engine fuel/water separator: Provide a fuel/water separator mounted ahead

of the fuel pump on the engine generator set to remove fuel day tank
condensation and to prevent water from entering the engine fuel system.
2.
Engine Lubrication: Provide an engine-driven, gear-type, lubricating oil

pump with removable suction screen to force oil under pressure to all main,
connecting rod, piston, wrist pin and cam shaft bearings, timing gears and
governor operating mechanism. Provide a full-flow, lubrication oil filter of
the replaceable cartridge type and lubrication oil cooler for the engine.
Provide a bypass valve in the filter assembly to allow engine lubrication in
case the filter is clogged. Fill the engine crank case with an approved
lubricating oil in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction.
3.
Engine Speed Governor: Provide an electronic, isochronous governor to

control the engine speed and maintain a steady-state frequency regulation
within 0.25 percent (0.15 hertz) from no load to full load.
4.
Engine Jacket Water Heater:

Provide an enginemounted, thermal
circulation type, water heater incorporating a thermostatic switch to
maintain the engine jacket water at 90 degrees F. Provide a single 9 kW at
208 volt heater with circulating pump.
Columbus PS
16230-5
5.
Engine Exhaust Pipe and Silencer: Provide an exhaust pipe and silencer
suitable for residential grade installation, fabricated of welded Schedule 40
steel pipe and sweep elbows with the horizontal piping pitching downward
away from the engine. Provide exhaust pipe with a rain cap. Provide No.
316 stainless steel flexible connectors to connect the engine exhaust silencer
and exhaust stack. Provide a valved silencer drain with a drip pocket having
a minimum capacity of two gallons. Provide "Metal-On" insulation a
minimum 2-inch thick with aluminum cover over exhaust pipe and silencer.
6.
Engine Jacket Cooling System: Provide a corrosion-inhibited cooling

solution of water and ethylene glycol rated for 40 degrees F operating
temperature for the cooling system.
a.
7.
B.
Engine mounted radiator: Equip the engine with an engine-mounted

radiator, blower fan and close fitting shroud, sized to provide cooling
for the engine jacket water, lubricating oil and after-cooler water
cooling requirements. Provide a rigid guard to enclose both the top
and sides of all moving parts between the engine and the radiator.
Provide the radiator with a duct flange.
Air-intake Filter: Provide the air intake filter with a pressure loss gauge.
Generator:
1.
Provide each generator rated for continuous standby service at 1250 kW,
1500 kVA at 0.8 power factor, 480 volts, three phase, four wire, wye
connected, 60 Hertz, 1800 rpm, with a temperature rise not exceeding 125
degrees C in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C.
2.
Provide each generator as a 4 pole, salient pole, synchronous, revolving

field, static regulated, brushless exciter with Class H insulation in a totally
enclosed fan-cooled enclosure connected to the engine through a flexible
coupling and a ring bolted to the flywheel housing.
3.
Provide each generator with the rotor dynamically balanced within .0005 in.
peak-to-peak amplitude displacements at both ends of the shaft, capable of
sustaining 25 percent overspeed.
4.
Provide each generator with stator and rotor windings of the layered random
wound design with amortisseur windings furnished in pole faces having
welded-type connections.
5.
Provide each generator excitation system consisting of a rotating rectifier

assembly, 3-phase ac exciter and solid-state voltage regulator. Provide
exciters that consist of a stationary field structure and a revolving armature.
Provide surge suppressors to protect the rotating rectifiers.
Columbus PS
16230-6
C.
D.
6.
Provide each generator capable of withstanding 10 percent overload current

for one minute without injurious heating at the rated power factor and the
exciter field set for normal rated load excitation.
7.
Provide each generator having a minimum combined efficiency of 95

percent with the exciter and voltage regulator at rated, full-load current.
8.
Provide each generator, exciter and regulator with radio and TV noise
suppression.
9.
Connect the engine and generated with a flexible coupling with a minimum
service factor of 1.25. The coupling shall be in static and dynamic balance.
Automatic Voltage Regulator:

1.
Provide an automatic, high-speed, solid-state, static voltage regulator

mounted in the generator control panel arranged to monitor the generator
output voltage in all three phases and apply corrections to generator
excitation for variations in the voltage due to changes in generator load
current, engine speed and load power factor.
2.
Provide the voltage regulator to maintain generator output voltage within

plus or minus one percent of the rated voltage from no load to full load, and
momentary voltage drop at a maximum of 20 percent of rated voltage when
full load is applied.
Generator Circuit Breaker: Provide an enclosed circuit breaker to act as a service

disconnect and overcurrent protection with the following ratings and features:
1.
2500 ampere frame, 480-volt, 3-pole, 600-volt class, fixed-mounted,

molded-case circuit breakers, with solid-state trip units rated as shown
having a minimum 65,000 rms amperes interrupting rating.
2.
Provide circuit breaker with a 100-percent ampere rating.
3.
Provide true rms sensing and microprocessor-based logic circuitry having

the following features for tripping the circuit breaker:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Long time pick-up

Short time pick-up and time delay
Instantaneous pick-up
Ground fault pick-up and time delay
Generator Control and Instrument Panel:

1.
Columbus PS
Provide an illuminated, generator control and instrument panel of solid-state

or microprocessor-based design housed in a NEMA 12 enclosure and
16230-7
mounted on the engine-generator set base containing, but not limited to, the
following:
a.
Oil pressure gauge with low pressure cut-off switch.
b.
Water temperature gauge with high temperature cut-off switch.
c.
Emergency stop button.
d.
Frequency meter and running time meter.
e.
Overspeed and overcrank alarms.
f.
Ammeter and voltmeter and phase switches for the generator.
g.
Governor and voltage controls.
h.
Manual ON and OFF switch.
i.
Common alarm contact to signal failure of unit.
j.
Alarm panel with six LED type alarm lights or digital readout with
fault code program and output contacts, as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
2.
Columbus PS
High water temperature

Engine over crank
Low lube oil pressure
Engine overspeed
Selector switch "off"
Emergency stop
k.
Two-wire, remote, start/stop termination.
l.
Oil low-level switch.
m.
Water low-level switch.
n.
Battery charger.
o.
Indicating lights.
p.
"Push to Test" button and circuitry to test all indicating lights.
Provide all safety devices necessary for the protection of the engine
generator set that alarm and shut down the set.
16230-8
3.
Provide dry contacts rated at 5 amp, 24 vdc, each to provide the following
status and alarm signals from the generator control panel to the PLC system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
Generator running
Generator battery voltage low
Generator alarm
Generator operable (from H-O-A switch)
Dc Engine Starting System:

1.
Provide a dc powered, engine starting system with dual starters consisting of

batteries and battery charger operating at 24-volt dc.
a.
Batteries
(1)
b.
Battery Charger
(1)
G.
Provide a set of lead-acid storage batteries of the heavy-duty,

diesel starting type having the required system dc voltage and
adequate ampacity for six series of four cranking cycles of 15
seconds "ON" and 10 seconds "OFF" at the worst ambient
temperature without recharging. Provide the battery set
mounted on a metal battery rack with the necessary cables
and clamps.
Provide an automatic-float battery charger consisting of a

silicon controlled rectifier to provide a constant voltage
output, with the necessary transformer to operate from a 115volt, 1-phase, 60 Hertz lighting circuit. Provide a charger
having a dc voltmeter, dc ammeter, equalizer timer and
control switch, and sufficient ampere rating to maintain the
charge on the engine starting battery. Provide a charger with
protection against short circuits, overloads and reverse battery
connections. Provide a charger capable of fully recharging
the completely dead batteries in 8 hours time.
Day Tank: Provide a heavy-gauge, steel day tank of 120 gallon capacity with dual
integral pumps and level control, a 150-percent double wall rupture basin and a
pump-mounted check valve. Provide the day tank with a removable top cover,
epoxy coated inside, rust-proofed and finish-painted outside in ASA No. 6 grey.
Provide redundant pumps with 1/3 hp 120-volts, single phase, 60-hertz thermallyprotected motors that operate through an automatic duplex system electronic
control module containing pump controllers with automatic alternator, fuel level
sensor, LED indicators for fuel level indication and five alarm conditions (High
Fuel, Low Fuel, Low Fuel Shutdown, Fuel in Rupture Basin and Electronic
Control Module Fault), auxiliary relays for remote monitoring of each alarm
condition and mode pushbuttons for OFF-ON-TEST-Internal TEST modes of
Columbus PS
16230-9
operation. Provide the day tank with a fuel inlet, five 1-inch NPT threaded pipe
connections, tank drain and inspection port.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install the engine generator set, fuel storage tank and day tank on
concrete mounting pads or structures as shown; in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Grounding and Power Connections: Install local ground.

electrical power, ground and control connections
C.
Fuel: Make and test all fuel pipeline connections. Fill storage and day tank with
fuel, bleed fuel pipelines to remove air and prime fuel pumps as per manufacturer's
instructions.
3.2
Make and test all

A.
Initial Test Run: Test start and run the engine generator set at no load for at least
30 minutes to check dc starting system, vibration free installation, fuel line leaks,
all gauges and meters, engine rpm, generator voltage and to warm up the engine
generator for the load test, as per the manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Inspections: Inspect all engine generator systems after initial test run for defects
and rectify in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Tests: Carry out a field test of the engine generator system for 4 hours at full load
in the presence of the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. Furnish dry type load
banks for the load test and provide precise incremental loading on engine generator
till full load. Check phase voltages, current frequency, vibration, and temperatures
as per manufacturer's instructions.
3.3
A.
General: Conduct field testing of the engine generator system prior to placing the
unit in service in accordance with the requirements of Division 1. The field testing
shall include all generator controls and protective systems.
B.
Manufacturer's Service Representative: Furnish the services of the engine

generator manufacturer's representative to assist in installation, start-up, field
testing, calibration, placing into operation and provide training, as specified in
Section 01820 including the acceptance test run of the set. Have the representative
carry out a thorough inspection of the installation; certify that the installation is
correct and complete in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions; to
Columbus PS
16230-10
confirm that the set is ready for acceptance test run; and to instruct operating
personnel in the operation and maintenance of the set.
C.
Acceptance Test Run: Have the manufacturer's service representative perform the
acceptance test run of the engine generator set in the presence of the
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. Perform the acceptance test run by simulating a
power failure and observing automatic engine generator startup, acceleration to
speed and assumption of available load at the site without any problems and as per
claimed performance. Demonstrate the compatibility of the engine generator with
the adjustable frequency drives and solid-state starters used for motors; and its
capability to start and operate the loads in the desired sequence. Also, demonstrate
that the engine generator is capable of starting and sustaining the load with a
voltage drop of not more than 20 percent of the rated value. Simulate and
demonstrate that the alarm and shut down features operate satisfactorily.
D.
Fuel Oil and Lubricants: Upon satisfactorily demonstrating the operation of the
generator and completion of all training sessions, refill the fuel oil storage tank to
capacity, check lubricant levels and top off as necessary.
E.
Final Test Run: Have the manufacturing service representatives perform a final
test run of the presence of the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER within four weeks
prior to the date the CONTRACTOR requests final completion for the entire
project. Perform the final test run using the same procedure described above for
the acceptance test run. If problems of deficiencies with the equipment are
identified during the test, the problems or deficiencies shall be corrected by the
CONTRACTOR and the final test re-run.
3.4

A.
Shop Painting: Paint the generator systems as specified in Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting: Touch up scratched and marred surfaces to match with original
finishes.
3.5
IDENTIFICATIONS
A.
General: Provide identifications meeting the requirements of Section 16075.
B.
Component Identification: Identify all system components, cables and wires by

applicable labels indicating unit numbers, circuit numbers.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16230-11
Columbus PS
16230-12
SECTION 16265
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing and testing uninterruptible power

supply (UPS) systems.
1.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Single-Phase Systems: Single-phase uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

systems consist of rectifier/battery charger, solid-state inverter, batteries
with associated controls, ac protection and alarms; housed in suitable metal
enclosures.

REFERENCES
A.
Codes and Standards: The following codes and standards are referred to in this
Section as follows:
1.
1.3
UL 486A -
Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper

Conductors
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Furnish all submittals, including the following, in accordance with the
requirements contained in Division 1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturers data on all equipment and
devices in the assembly, including voltages, number of phases, current ratings,
capacities, finishes for all the system components and other relevant data.
C.
Contractors Shop Drawings: Furnish contractors shop drawings for the shop
assembled equipment, including the following:
Columbus PS
16265-1
1.
Layout drawings of the assembly showing accurately scaled basic equipment

sections, auxiliary compartments, combination sections and location of
various system components and their interconnection. Show special
relationships of assemblies to associated equipment, including plan and front
views of the equipment and layout dimensions. Provide a bill of materials.
2.
Wiring diagrams for assemblies showing connections to electrical power.

Clearly differentiate between shop-installed portions of wiring and field
installed portions.
3.
Furnish construction drawings for equipment requiring field assembly.

Clearly differentiate between shop-assembled portions and field assembled
portions.
4.
A schematic control diagram for the entire system showing connections to

other related systems.
5.
Manufacturer's installation, testing and commissioning instruction for the

entire system.
D.
Quality Control: Furnish manufacturers test reports and certified performance

records of all equipment installed. Furnish field test reports after equipment is
installed.
E.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish Operations and Maintenance

Manuals of all equipment and assemblies in accordance with Division 1. Include a
copy of the UPS control settings program with all software, hardware, and cables
needed to allow the UPS control settings to be installed into the unit.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
requirements.
1.5
Comply with applicable Regulatory Agency

A.
1.6
General: Deliver, store and handle all products and materials in accordance with
the requirements contained in Division 1.
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Provide the following spare parts:

1.
2.
Columbus PS
One set of each type of fuses.

Two batteries of each type and rating.
16265-2
B.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are as listed below. Other

manufacturers of equivalent products may be submitted for approval for review.
1.
Single-phase UPS system including batteries.

a.
b.
2.2
MGE UPS Systems Inc.

American Power Conversion Corp.
SINGLE-PHASE UPS SYSTEMS

A.
Operating Parameters: Provide on-line UPS systems, UL Inc. listed having

extended backup time with the following operating parameters:
1.
Nominal Power Rating: 1540W/ 1920VA
2.
Electrical Power input: 120-volt, 1-phase, 60-hertz
3.
Electrical Power output: 120-volt, 1-phase, 60-hertz (adjustable 5%)
4.
Surge Protection: 240 joules
5.
Voltage Regulation: Automatic
6.
Batteries: Maintenance-free sealed lead-acid
7.
Acoustical Noise: Less than 40dB at 3 feet
8.
User Displays:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9.
Columbus PS
On ac Power
On Battery
Replace Battery
Overload
Load and Battery bar-graphs
Recharge time (maximum): 4 hours
16265-3
10.
Temperature: 0 degrees C to +35 degrees C (+32 degrees F to +95 degrees

F)
11.
Minimum Battery Backup Time:

a.
b.
B.
2.3
UPS-A 75 minutes at full load, 155 minutes at half load

UPS-B 75 minutes at full load, 155 minutes at half load
Identification: Provide identification meeting the requirements of Section 16075.

A.
General: Provide complete Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems

designed, assembled, wired and tested at the point of manufacture in accordance
with the latest NEC (NFPA), NEMA, UL, IEEE and ANSI standards.
B.
Alarms: Provide dry contacts rated at 5 amp, 24 vdc to provide the following
alarm signals to the PLC system:
1.
2.
No input power alarm.

Low output voltage alarm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install all equipment as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and comply with requirements of NEMA Standards, NEC,
project-applicable portions of NECA's Standard of Installation and applicable
ANSI Publications.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate with other work including cabling and wiring work as
necessary to interface installation of shop assembled equipment with other work.
C.

tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque
D.
Grounding Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for the shop

assembled equipment as indicated on the Drawings. Tighten connections in
accordance with UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
E.

complete and satisfactory operation upon completion of the Contract.
Columbus PS
16265-4
3.2

A.
General: Perform field inspection and testing for each UPS system to demonstrate
that each unit meets the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Has not been damaged during transportation and installation.

Has been properly installed.
Has no mechanical defects.
Has been properly connected.
Tests: Perform field tests as follows:

1.
Inspect and test the installation with respect to the safety requirements of
NEC pertaining to grounding and insulation resistance.
2.
Demonstrate proper operation of each UPS system by simulating conditions

by conducting an operational test in accordance with the requirements of
Division 1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
C.
UPS recharge time

UPS low voltage alarm
UPS loss of input power alarm
UPS battery time at half loading
Repair or replace defective materials at no cost to the OWNER.
Manufacturers Field Services: Provide the services of a qualified representative

of each manufacturer of the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems to
inspect the installation of equipment, make any necessary adjustments and instruct
the operating personnel about operation, maintenance and provide training as
specified in Section 01820.
1.
Provide a service engineer when the equipment is placed into operation.
2.
Provide a service engineer at the jobsite as often as necessary until all

problems are corrected and the equipment installation and operation are
satisfactory.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16265-5
Columbus PS
16265-6
SECTION 16266
ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing, installing and testing the 480-volt
adjustable frequency drives. Provide drives in individual free standing enclosures
as shown. Furnish harmonic studies as specified.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.2

Section 11215 - Split Case Centrifugal Pump
Section 16055 - Electrical Requirements For Shop-Assembled Equipment
REFERENCES
A.

1.
NEMA ICS 1
- General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
2.
NEMA ICS 2
Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors

and Overload Relays Not More than 2000 Volts AC or
750 Volts DC.
3.
NEMA ICS 3
Industrial Control
Assemblies
4.
NEMA ICS 7
- Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed

Drives
5.
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for
Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable
Speed Drive Systems
Columbus PS
16266-1
and
Systems
Factory
Built
1.3
6.
NEMA 250
- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
7.
NFPA 70
- National Electrical Code
8.
IEEE 85
- Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on

Rotating Electric Machinery
9.
IEEE 519
- IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for

Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems
10.
UL 845
- Motor Control Centers
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements:
1.
Provide adjustable frequency drives to vary the speed of NEMA standard, 3phase, 460-volt, induction motors and driven equipment by varying the
frequency and voltage applied to the motors.
2.
Provide adjustable frequency drives that fit in the space shown. Units
exceeding the dimensions shown will not be acceptable.
3.
Provide adjustable frequency drives that automatically restart when power is

restored after a power outage. Provide control logic so the drive is allowed
to restart when power is restored.
4.
Provide adjustable frequency drives with across-the-line bypass starters and

microprocessor based motor protection relays.
5.
Provide each adjustable frequency drive with line and load side isolation
contactors.
B.
Rated Output Power: Provide adjustable frequency drives with an output that is at
least 3 percent greater than the driven motors full nameplate rating.
C.
Torque Output: Provide variable torque or constant torque output drives as

required by driven equipment.
D.
18-Pulse Drive Technology: Provide adjustable frequency drives serving motors

100 HP or larger that utilize 18-pulse drive technology.
Columbus PS
16266-2
E.
Performance Requirements: Provide adjustable frequency drives to meet the

following requirements of IEEE 519:
1.
Total harmonic distortion THD (Voltage): Maximum of five percent for

general distribution systems as measured at the point of common coupling.
2.
Total current harmonic distortion: Not to exceed the values in Table 10.3,
Current Distortion Limits for General Distribution Systems (120 V through
69000 V) of IEEE-519 at the point of common coupling.
3.
Capacitor traps for controlling harmonics that require tuning to the power
system are not acceptable.
4.
Operate at a minimum efficiency of 95 percent at rated load.
5.
Operate from a 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz supply with a voltage variation

of plus 10-percent or minus 20-percent and a frequency variation of plus or
minus 2-hertz.
6.
Input power factor: Maintain a 95 percent minimum power factor over a 20

to 100 percent speed range.
7.
Operate an induction motor as specified, including a high-efficiency, highpower factor, premium-duty motor, with no detriment to motor life.
8.
Operate an induction motor without exceeding a motor sound and power

level of 96-decibels, A-weighted, when measured in accordance with IEEE
85.
9.
Operate under the following ambient conditions:

a.
b.
1.4
Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C

Humidity: 0 to 95 percent
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish catalog data including rating and
descriptive literature of all components and systems.
C.
Shop Drawings: Furnish the following shop drawings customized for the project:
1.
Columbus PS
Bill of materials including manufacturers name and catalog number
16266-3
D.
2.
Outline drawings showing dimensions, arrangement, elevations,

identification of components and nameplate schedule for all units
3.
Interconnection wiring diagrams
4.
Individual schematic control diagrams for each unit
5.
One line diagrams
6.
Obtain and enter full performance data for all motors shown
7.
Certification that the adjustable frequency drives are compatible with the
motors and the equipment loads to be driven
System harmonic distortion study: Furnish a system harmonic distortion study as

follows:
1.
Obtain data on utility services, plant loads and plant operation. Verify
electrical service rating including transformer size, short circuit capacity and
X/R ratio.
2.
Prepare a harmonic distortion study of plant electrical system to determine

voltage and current harmonics at the point of common coupling for worst
case speed and load settings.
3.
Confirm that the submitted adjustable frequency drives limit the electrical
disturbances below the 5 percent THD (voltage) and below the harmonic
current distortion per Table 10.3 as established by IEEE 519.
4.
Point of Common Coupling: The point of common coupling is the

switchgear directly upstream of the adjustable frequency drive.
5.
Include analysis of all data with recommendations.
E.
Quality Control: Furnish test reports, certificates of inspection and manufacturer's

instructions.
F.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals:

manuals as specified in Division 1.
1.5
Furnish operations and maintenance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Provide all adjustable frequency drives manufactured in accordance

with referenced standards.
B.
UL Label: Provide a UL Inc. Label or certification of listing by C.S.A. or other

recognized testing organization for each adjustable frequency drive.
Columbus PS
16266-4
C.
Codes: Manufacture and install each adjustable frequency drive in accordance with
the NEC and local codes.
D.
Failure to Meet the Harmonic Requirement: Failure to meet the harmonic

requirement as determined by field measurement: If the installed adjustable
frequency drives fail to meet the harmonic limits specified, modify the adjustable
frequency drives as follows:
1.6
1.
Perform work at no additional cost to the OWNER
2.
Install additional harmonic reduction equipment until the specified limit is

achieved.
3.
In the event that harmonic distortion limits cannot be achieved, replace the
adjustable frequency drive equipment with equipment that conforms to this
specification.

A.
Division 1.
B.
Shipping and Packing: Rigidly brace and protect against weather, damage, and
undue strain, all structures, equipment and materials.
C.
Storage and Protection: Furnish clean storage facilities for all equipment delivered
but not installed. Provide conditioned air for storage facilities in accordance with
the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
D.
Spare Parts: Furnish spare parts at the same time as pertaining equipment. Deliver
the spare parts to the OWNER at final completion for the entire project.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Furnish the following spare parts per each group of similar sized units
1.
Columbus PS
All parts recommended by the manufacturer in published literature as spare

parts. As a minimum, provide the following:
a.
Six of all sizes and types of power and control fuses
b.
Six LED displays of each color
c.
One speed indicator meter relay
d.
Two of each type of push button and selector switch used

16266-5
B.
e.
Two keypads of each type used
f.
Two printed circuit boards of each type used
g.
Four filter capacitors of each size used
h.
Four diodes of each type used
i.
Four transistors, gate turn off thyristors IGBTs or SCRs of each type
used
j.
Packaging: Package spare parts in containers bearing labels and identify all spare
parts for reordering. Deliver spare parts in original factory packages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturer is listed below.

1.
2.2
Toshiba
DESIGN
A.
Input Disconnect: Provide an input circuit breaker with an interrupting rating of

65,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
B.
Input Reactor: Provide input reactor or isolation transformer, if required, as

determined by system harmonic distortion analysis.
C.
Converter Section: Provide input section that converts 480-volts, 60-hertz, 3phase input to a fixed dc voltage using diodes, bridged rectifiers or SCRs.
D.
Filter Sections: Provide dc link reactor and filter capacitors as required.
E.
Inverter Section: Provide adjustable frequency drive inverter section that converts
the fixed dc voltage to an adjustable frequency output utilizing a pulse-width
modulation inverter. Maintain a constant volts per hertz ratio on the output with
voltage boost for startup as required.
F.
Control Devices: Provide a digital operator keypad located on the front door to
allow setting of all programmable parameters and the following control functions:
Columbus PS
16266-6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
G.
Control Features: Provide a control system for each drive that allows the
following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Remote, isolated 4-20 ma speed control input

Isolated 4-20 ma speed output
Alarm outputs
ON/OFF status output
Additional features and controls as specified with the driven equipment
Internal Control Adjustments: Include the following control adjustments for each
drive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Start push button

Stop push button
"Local-Remote" control selection
Speed control settings
Speed meter with hertz and 0-100 percent scales
Output ammeter
Elapsed time meter
Diagnostics package with fault indication and reset push button
One set of air filters for each unit provided
Acceleration time, 4 to 60 seconds

Deceleration time, 4 to 60 seconds
Minimum speed limit
Maximum speed limit
Inverter current limit
Protection Features: Provide the following drive protection features:

1.
Input line current limiting fuses rated 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes
short circuit current.
2.
Electronic overcurrent protection for instantaneous overload
3.
Overfrequency protection
4.
Phase loss protection
5.
DC overvoltage protection
6.
Line-to-line and line-to-ground output short circuit protection
7.
Line-to-line and line-to-ground surge arresters sized for 480-volt 3-phase

grounded wye system
Columbus PS
16266-7
J.
2.3
8.
Overload capability of 110% of the motor FLA based on the NEC ratings for
60 seconds
9.
Control circuit fuses
10.
Overtemperature protection
11.
Diagnostics module to indicate protection trip conditions
Communications: Provide an addressable communication card capable of

transmitting the following data over a ethernet network to the PLC system:
1.
Status (ON, OFF, TRIPPED, NO COMMUNICATION)
2.
Input and output current in each phase
3.
Output frequency
4.
Input and output kW
5.
Cause of trip
COMPONENTS
A.
General: Provide circuit breakers, fuses, transformers, push buttons, switches,

indicating lights, relays and timers as specified in Section16491.
B.
Power Solid State Components: Provide power solid state switching components
with a one minute current rating greater than 110 percent of rated current for
variable torque drives or 150 percent of rated current for constant torque drives.
C.
Control Power Transformer: Furnish a constant voltage control power transformer

to maintain control power with supply voltage variations from 70-110 percent
nominal.
D.
Printed Circuit Boards: Apply a clear conformal coating of acrylic to all printed
circuit boards.
2.4
ENCLOSURES
A.
General: Provide adjustable frequency drive drives in NEMA 1 filtered and

gasketed enclosures with full rear cover plates. Provide drives with replaceable air
intake filters.
Columbus PS
16266-8
2.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
General: Provide identification of the adjustable frequency drives and their

components as specified in Section 16075.
B.
Nameplates: Install nameplates for devices located on doors so they are readable to
a person 5'-8 tall standing 3'-0" in front of the equipment.
C.
Location: Locate nameplates so that they are readily associated with items labeled.
D.
Additional Nameplate: Where nameplates are installed on removable relay or

device doors, install an additional nameplate within the relay or device.
E.
Additional Engraving: Where nameplates are located on other compartments than

those served, add additional engraving to identify units served.
2.6
WIRING
A.
General: Provide internal wiring with stranded switchboard wire having 600-volt
rated, flame-resistant, type SIS insulation. Use No. 14 AWG wire for control
interconnections. Provide power connections as required for the service.
B.
Wire Marker: Provide wire markers at each end of all wires.
C.
Wiring to Door Mounted Devices: Where wiring connections are made to

equipment mounted on hinged doors, provide connections with extra flexible wires
suitably cabled together and cleated.
D.
Terminal Blocks: Provide wiring of all control connections to all external

connections through individual, positive-latch, pull-apart type control terminal
blocks rated 600-volts. Locate terminal blocks for front access.
E.
Terminal for External Connections: Provide sufficient terminals for all devices
external to the adjustable frequency drive.
2.7

A.
Shop Test: Shop test each adjustable frequency drive in accordance with IEEE and
NEMA standards, including high potential tests and other standard tests for that
particular class of equipment. Notify the OWNER fourteen (14) days prior to start
of factory testing so that the OWNER, at his option, may witness the testing.
1.
Columbus PS
After final assembly, test each adjustable frequency drive at full load with
application of line-to-line and line-to-ground bolted faults and show that the
adjustable frequency drive trips electronically without device failure.
16266-9
2.
After all tests have been performed, burn-in each adjustable frequency drive
for 40 hours at 100 percent inductive or motor load.
3.
After the burn-in cycle is complete, subject each adjustable frequency drive
to a 30 minute cycling motor load test before inspection and shipping.
B.
Factory Operational Tests: After the equipment has been completely assembled,
perform factory operational test to determine operating conditions and circuit
continuity. Provide pushbuttons and selector switches to simulate all control input
contacts and indicating lights to indicate all control outputs. Provide a 4-20ma
signal generator to simulate analog signals.
C.
Test Equipment: Provide all equipment, devices, instrumentation, and personnel

required to perform the tests. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, submit two
(2) certified copies of the test report to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.
Component failure during testing will require repeating any test associated with the
failure or modified components to demonstrate proper operation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
B.
Protective Adjustments: Set all circuit breakers per the approved short circuit and
coordination study.
C.
Operational Adjustments: Set all operational devices for proper system operation.
D.
Cable Connections: Terminate and label all field wiring per approved drawings.
3.2

A.
Inspections: Inspect, adjust and check the installation for physical alignment,
cable terminations and ventilation.
B.
Tests: Perform the following field tests:

1.
Close and open each circuit breaker to test operation
2.
When site conditions permit, energize and de-energize each equipment item
served by each drive, testing the complete control sequence of each item
including acceleration and deceleration over complete operating range.
Columbus PS
16266-10
C.
3.3
3.
Harmonic Measurement:
Perform a harmonic system analysis to
demonstrate full compliance with IEEE 519 voltage and current harmonic
distortion requirements specified. Accurately measure the amplitude of the
harmonic current imposed on the 60 hertz sine wave with a harmonic
spectrum analyzer. Provide additional harmonic reduction equipment to
meet the specified limits. If the harmonic distortion limits are not achieved,
replace the adjustable frequency drive equipment with equipment that
conforms to this specification.
4.
Operate each adjustable frequency drive with driven equipment at full load
and test for hot spots.
5.
Communication System: Test the operation of the Ethernet communication

system to demonstrate that it operates to perform design functions.
6.
Test Reports: Furnish detailed test reports of all tests indicating test
performed, discrepancies found, and corrective action taken.
Manufacturers Field Services Representative: Provide the services of a factorytrained service engineer, specifically trained on the adjustable frequency
equipment to assist in installation, start-up, testing, calibration, placing into
operation and provide training, as specified in Section 01820.
1.
Provide a service engineer when each drive is placed into operation.
2.
Provide a service engineer at the jobsite as often as necessary until all

problems are corrected and the equipment installation and operation are
satisfactory.
3.
Provide service engineer at the job site as often as necessary to assist in the
programming of the DPC system in accessing the memory map of each
device.

A.
Shop Painting: Paint the adjustable frequency drive equipment as specified in

Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting: Furnish three 12-ounce spray cans of the final finish for touch-up.
Touch-up scratched and marred surfaces to meet the requirements of Section
09900.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16266-11
Columbus PS
16266-12
SECTION 16273
PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing pad-mounted transformers, each

with primary line disconnect, fuses, secondary circuit breaker and all accessories
and appurtenances necessary for a complete installation and shop and field tests.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.

1.
1.3
UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General: Provide live front, liquid filled pad-mounted transformers with tap
changer, high and low voltage cable and device compartments, load make and load
break primary line disconnect switch, fuses, secondary main circuit breaker and all
required accessories.
B.
Rating: Provide transformers with the following ratings:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Columbus PS
Primary Voltage
Primary Connection
Secondary Voltage
Secondary Connection
kVA
BIL
Impedance
Phases(s)
Hertz
13.2kV
Delta
480/277 volts
Wye 4 wire (with insulated ground)
As shown
95
5.75 7-1/2%
3
60
16273-1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Shop Drawings: Furnish working drawings customized for the project, including
arrangement and erection drawings of the equipment and equipment operating
characteristics. Furnish submittals to include:
C.
D.
1.5
1.
Manufacturer's data showing service voltages, number of phases, kVA

ratings, voltage taps, temperature rise, BIL, weight and standard accessories.
2.
Layout drawings showing accurately scaled basic equipment sections and

openings for cable and conduit. Include plan and front views.
3.
Bills of material.
4.
Catalog data for all accessories and appurtenances.
5.
Spare parts list.
Quality Control: Furnish the following:

1.
Manufacturers certificates for insulation rating, temperature rise, impedance

and high potential tests of the primary and secondary connections.
2.
Certified copies of the factory and shop test results.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

manuals, as specified in Division 1.
Furnish operation and maintenance

A.
B.
Packing and Shipping: Suitably pack all structures and equipment, rigidly braced
and protected against weather, damage and undue strain during shipment.
1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Furnish the following spare parts:

1.
Two complete sets of power fuses for each transformer.
2.
Test jumpers as required.
Columbus PS
16273-2
3.
Two hook sticks.
4.
One Transformer oil test kit.
5.
One neon tube test stick with neon tubes and ground cable and clamp.
6.
Any other parts or material that may be necessary for the proper
maintenance and operation of the transformer.
7.
Circuit breaker test kit.
8.
Three 12-ounce spray cans of the final finish for touch-up.
B.
Special Tools: Provide a set of special wrenches as required for each transformer.
C.
Packaging: Plainly tag and mark spare parts for identification and reordering, and
properly box and wrap spare parts to prevent deterioration. Completely identify
the box on the outside.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Pad mounted transformer assembly

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Other
RTE (Cooper Power Systems)

ABB Power T&D Company Inc.
Square D Company
TRANSFORMERS
A.
General: Provide transformers and accessories and appurtenances designed,

assembled and tested in accordance with applicable IEEE, ANSI and NEMA
standards. Provide all electrical equipment suitable for operation at their standard
nameplate ratings in accordance with applicable IEEE and ANSI standards.
1.
Provide suitable structural base members to permit plumb and level

installation of the padmount transformer on its concrete pad.
2.
Provide pad-mounted transformer assembly completely packaged, outdoor,

enclosed, tamper-resistant units with transformers, primary and secondary
Columbus PS
16273-3
protective devices, and accessories as specified herein, as shown and as

required.
3.
Construct each transformer liquid filled, mineral oil insulated, self-cooled,

designed for 55 degrees C average temperature rise above a 30-degree C
average ambient over 24 hours and 40-degree C maximum ambient at full
load continuous operation. Provide transformer with 112 percent kVA
rating at 65 degrees C. Provide a sealed tank with required cooling fins and
a welded cover for each transformer. Design tank to be of sufficient
strength to withstand a pressure of 7 psi without permanent damage.
4.
Fabricate high voltage and low voltage windings from copper conductors.
5.
Provide wye connected secondary windings with the neutral point

connection brought out and insulated for remote grounding.
B.
Tap Changer: Provide primary windings with an oil immersed tap changer with
four full capacity 2-1/2 percent rated kVA taps, two above and two below rated
primary voltage. Provide externally operated tap changer suitable for de-energized
operation with the operating handle within the high voltage compartment.
C.
Miscellaneous: Provide all accessories completely tamper resistant and vandal

resistant. Install all valves, fill and drain devices within the locked enclosures.
D.
Accessories: Provide as a minimum, the following transformer accessories:

1.
Lightning arrestors (live front units only).
2.
Magnetic liquid level gauge.
3.
Dial-type thermometer.
4.
Pressure vacuum gauge.
5.
One filling and filter connection - 1-inch male pipe fitting.
6.
One drain valve, one-inch screw and globe type with 3/8-inch sampling
valve.
7.
Ground pad in high and low voltage compartments.
8.
Mechanical pressure relief device that will automatically vent when pressure
reaches 10 ( 2) psi and recloses and seals when pressure falls to 6 psi.
9.
Provision for rolling or skidding in any direction.
10.
Diagrammatic nameplate.
Columbus PS
16273-4
2.3
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Compartments: Construct each high and low voltage cable compartment with not
less than 11-gauge stretcher level welded sheet steel, complete with outdoor
weathertight doors. Furnish and install structural steel channels, angles and sills
for structural rigidity, mounting, self-supporting and alignment of the
compartments. Provide a welded sheet steel barrier between the high and low
voltage sections of each overall compartment. Furnish the high voltage section on
the left as one faces the unit.
Provide nonferrous metal or approved rust resistant finished screws, nuts, bolts
and similar items.
B.
Doors: Arrange and mechanically interlock the high and low voltage section doors
on each compartment so that access to the high voltage section can be gained only
after opening the low voltage section door. Hold the high voltage section door
closed by captive bolts which are exposed only after the low voltage section door
has been opened. Provide the low voltage door with a three point latching
mechanism with vault-type handle with provisions for a single padlock. Equip the
doors with liftoff stainless steel hinges so all doors can be removed. Provide door
stops to hold doors open while working in the compartments. Provide removable
door sill to permit rolling or skidding the unit into place over conduit stubs in the
foundation.
C.
High Voltage Section: Locate the following in the high voltage section:
D.
E.
1.
Radial feed live front construction with externally clamped high voltage
bushings suitable to handle 1 1/0 AWG cable per phase.
2.
Load break switch with operating handle for hook switch operation.
3.
Fuses.
Low Voltage Section: Locate the following in the low voltage section:
1.
One close coupled circuit breaker with the line side connected to the
transformer secondary terminals, and with closed end compression type load
side terminals for secondary cable connections. Provide a barrier for line
side connections to the transformers.
2.
One insulated transformer secondary neutral lead.
3.
All required control and protective relaying connection terminal blocks.
Temperature Rise: Provide temperature rise of switching devices within the

enclosure not exceeding that permitted by standards of such devices. Design
Columbus PS
16273-5
enclosure so that the average temperature inside the enclosure will not exceed 15
degrees C over an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C outside the enclosure.
Provide temperature rise of buses and connections and the primary and secondary
disconnecting devices not exceeding 35 degrees C over the average air temperature
inside the enclosure.
F.
2.4
Shop Tests: Provide certified test reports for the following shop tests:
1.
Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection.
2.
Ratio test on all windings on all tap positions.
3.
Ratio test on the rated voltage connection and on all panel connections.
4.
Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection.
5.
No load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
6.
Excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
7.
Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection.
8.
Applied potential test
9.
Induced potential test.
PRIMARY DISCONNECT SWITCH

A.
B.
Disconnect Switches: Provide oil immersed, gang-operated load-make, load-break

primary disconnect switch with quick make, quick break unit rated as follows:
1.
15kV Class, 3-pole, 200-amperes continuous current.
2.
95kV BIL.
3.
Momentary interrupting ratings of 10,000 amperes rms asymmetrical.
4.
Fault rating of 16,000 amperes rms asymmetrical.
Operating Mechanism: Provide switch with two positions, open and closed, with
an intermediate position impossible. Provide operating mechanism with sufficient
power to overcome the magnetic blow-out forces when closing the switch into a
fault.
Columbus PS
16273-6
2.5
HIGH VOLTAGE FUSES

A.
Fuses: Provide bayonet-type fuse assembly of the hook-stick-operable, drawout,

load break design. Provide either overload-sensing or fault-sensing fuses with an
internal isolation link in series. Size the fault sensing link to operate only in the
event of a transformer failure. Size the overload-sensing link for protection from
secondary system faults or prolonged overload conditions.
Provide fuses with continuous current ratings sized per the manufacturer's
recommendation for the indicated kVA, impedance and primary voltages. Install
each fuse with provision for easy replacement from within the high voltage
compartment without the need for special tools.
2.6
SECONDARY BREAKERS
A.
Secondary Protective Breakers:

Provide 3-pole, close coupled secondary
protective circuit breakers, 100% rated with solid state sensor logic circuitry,
molded case breakers with manual operating handles, shunt trip device and pushto-trip buttons. Rate the breakers for current rating as shown and 65,000 amperes
IC symmetrical.
B.
Programming Features:
programming features:
Furnish each breaker with the following protection
1.
Fixed instantaneous
2.
Adjustable long time delay
3.
Adjustable short time pickup, time delay and I2t response
4.
Adjustable ground fault pickup, time delay and I2t response
5.
Short time and ground fault zone interlocking
C.
Breaker Protection:
Provide breaker protection programming set points
coordinated with loads served.
D.
Neutral Current Transformer: Provide neutral ground fault current transformer.
2.7
WIRING
A.
General: Provide transformer completely assembled, wired and tested at the

factory, including buses, connections, insulators, cleats, terminals and terminal
blocks. Insulate all current carrying parts. Provide terminal blocks with approved
covers and mounted so that wires to them can be grouped and laced together in a
neat and workman like manner. Furnish cup washers for wires No. 12 and smaller
Columbus PS
16273-7
and solderless lugs for larger sizes. Provide No. 14 AWG or larger stranded
copper, NEC Type SIS, 600 volt insulated low voltage wire.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install pad-mounted transformer in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and approved shop drawing and as specified in Division 1.
B.
Conformance: Install transformer assembly as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; comply
with NEMA Standards, NEC, applicable ANSI Publications and local codes.
C.
Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including cabling/wiring, as necessary

to interface installation of transformer.
D.

tightening requirements for equipment connectors. Where manufacturers' torquing
requirements are not included, tighten connectors and terminals in accordance with
UL Standard 486A.
E.
Grounding Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for the

transformers and appurtenances. Tighten connections in accordance with UL
Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
F.
Adjustments: Make all necessary adjustments to the transformer to provide

complete and satisfactory operation.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Nameplates: Provide nameplate on transformer identifying the circuit or unit

controlled. Identify all terminals and equipment by nameplates or other acceptable
markings.
1.
Provide nameplates made of laminated plastic with white printed characters

engraved through a black top layer, and fastened with corrosion-resistant
screws as required. Do not use mounting cement.
2.
Nameplate Lettering: Provide nameplates with one-inch high lettering for

transformers and disconnect switches.
Columbus PS
16273-8
3.3

A.
Manufacturers Representative: Provide a factory-trained experienced, competent,

and authorized representative of the transformer manufacturer to visit the site of
the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment
installation as specified in Division 1. Provide all instruments necessary to
conduct required tests and adjustments. Have the manufacturer's representative
utilize prepared comprehensive check sheets covering inspections, checks and tests
required for the transformer assembly. Submit copies of these documents executed
and signed by the manufacturer's representative. Have the representative's present
when the equipment is placed in operation. Provide representative service as often
as necessary until all problems are corrected and the equipment is installed and
operating satisfactorily.
B.
Certified Report: Furnish a written report certifying that the equipment (1) has
been properly installed, (2) is in accurate alignment, (3) is free from any undue
stress imposed by connections or anchor bolts, and (4) has been operated under full
load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.
C.
Testing: Subject the transformer to an ac or dc 5-minute high potential test applied

after the installation is complete for all substation equipment. Provide test voltages
in accordance with the IEEE and NEMA Standards for the voltage class of
equipment and components to be tested. Provide tests for all bus, cable, wire,
switches, breakers, transformer, and control devices.
3.4

A.
Shop Painting: Paint the adjustable frequency drive equipment as specified in

Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting: Furnish three 12-ounce spray cans of the final finish for touch-up.
Touch-up scratched and marred surfaces to meet the requirements of Section
09900.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16273-9
Columbus PS
16273-10
SECTION 16413
DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
Requirements for providing and installing enclosed,
disconnecting circuit breakers for use as feeder and branch circuit switching and
disconnect devices for motors and equipment.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
NEC
2.
UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturer's data indicating circuit

breakers ratings, enclosure type and dimensions.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes: Provide disconnect circuit breakers meeting the requirements of NFPA

Standards, the National Electrical Code and local codes.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Provide all circuit breakers designed, manufactured and

tested in accordance with latest ANSI, IEEE and NEMA Standards, and UL listed.
Columbus PS
16413-1
1.5

A.
Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
3.
2.2
Other
Square D Company
Cutler Hammer
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide molded case, automatic, nonadjustable, high instantaneous trip

only disconnect circuit breakers.
B.
Breaker Ratings: Provide disconnect circuit breakers with the voltage, number of
poles and current ratings based on the connected load and a withstand capacity of
not less than 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical at 480 volts ac.
C.
Breaker Housings: Provide disconnect circuit breakers housed in NEMA rated

enclosures with provisions to padlock the operating handle in the OFF position as
follows:
AREA
ENCLOSURE
Outdoor, Corrosive, Indoor

Below Grade
NEMA 4X Watertight, corrosion resistant

stainless steel.
Above grade indoor
NEMA 12 Industrial
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install all disconnect circuit breakers in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation and approved shop drawings and as specified in
Division 1. Comply with requirements of NEC and local electrical codes.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate with other work including cabling and wiring.
Columbus PS
16413-2
C.
3.2
Torque Requirements: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including

screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers', published torque
tightening recommendations. Where manufacturers' torquing requirement are not
available, tighten connectors and terminals in accordance with UL Standard 486 A.
A.
Painting: Paint the disconnect circuit breaker enclosures in accordance with the
requirements of Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16413-3
Columbus PS
16413-4
SECTION 16430
480 VOLT SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing, installing and testing 480-volt

switchgear including the following major components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.2
Stationary structure including bus bars

Main and tie power air circuit breakers
Distribution power air circuit breakers
Control, protection, monitoring and metering equipment

Section 16085 - Short Circuit and Coordination Study
Section 16210 - Electrical Utility Coordination and Requirements
Section 16230 - Package Engine Generator System
REFERENCES
A.

1.
NEC
- National Electrical Code (NEC).
2.
IEEE C37.13
- Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures
3.
IEEE C37.20.1 - Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
4.
ANSI C37.51
Columbus PS
- Conformance Testing of Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage

AC Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear Assemblies.
16430-1
5.
IEEE C37.90
- IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay-Systems Associated

with Electric Power Apparatus
6.
NEMA SG3
- Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.
7.
IEEE C62.41
- IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low

Voltage AC Power Circuits
8.
IEEE C62.45
- IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected

to Low Voltage AC Power Circuits
9.
MIL-STD-220A - Method of Insertion-loss Measurement 12/1/59; with N1

and N2 (Fed/mil H-q)
10.
NEMA SG5
- Power Switchgear Assemblies.
11.
UL 486A
- Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors
12.
UL 1283
- Electromagnetic Interference Filters
13.
UL 1449
- Transient voltage surge suppressors
14.
UL 1558
- Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

Switchgear
B.
Material Workmanship Requirements: Provide all materials and workmanship

meeting the requirements of NFPA Standards and Codes.
C.
Design and Testing Requirements: Provide all switchgear components designed,

manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA, IEEE and ANSI
Standards; and UL listed.
D.
Installation Requirements:
Install the switchgear assemblies meeting the
requirements of NEC and local Electrical Codes.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in

Division 1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish the following.

1.
Columbus PS
Manufacturers catalog data on switchgear assemblies and on each

component detailing materials, ratings, type, model and reference number.
16430-2
C.
1.4
2.
Layout drawings customized for the project including physical details,

dimensions, clearances, mounting, elevations, sections, and nameplates.
3.
Electrical control schematics, wiring diagrams, internal interconnection

diagrams and interconnection diagrams, including equipment external to the
switchgear.
4.
Terminal lists for all connections.
5.
Furnish instruction booklets and time-current curves for each circuit breaker
supplied.
6.
Furnish microprocessor-based metering system and overload protection

systems address, memory map and instruction booklets.
7.
Furnish the following information on transient voltage surge suppressors

(TVSS):
a.
Verification that TVSS devices comply with UL 1449 and UL 1283

SVR.
b.
Actual let through voltage test data in the form of oscillograph results
for both the ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 (combination wave) and
B3 (ringwave) tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
c.
Spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test

procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying that the device's
noise attenuation exceeds 50 dB at 100 kHz.
d.
Test reports from a recognized independent testing laboratory

verifying the suppressor components can survive published surge
current ratings on both a per mode and per phase basis using the IEEE
C62.41, 8 x 20 microsecond current wave. Note: Test data on
individual modules are not acceptable.
Contractors Drawings: Furnish switchgear installation details including concrete

pad details, mounting details, conduit and cable termination details and shipping
section split field connection details.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test Reports: Furnish the manufacturer's certified shop test report and field test
report for the 480-volt switchgear.
Columbus PS
16430-3
1.5
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.
1.6
Furnish operation and maintenance manuals, including spare parts lists, as

A.
Division 1.
B.
Storage and Protection: Store all equipment in a dry, covered, heated and
ventilated location. Provide any additional measures in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.

1.
One transfer truck with fixed and swivel wheels and rubber tires suitable for
moving the largest circuit breakers.
2.
One portable circuit breaker test kit.
3.
Two auxiliary power modules to power breaker trip units when breaker is
not in the "connected" position.
4.
One complete solid-state sensor unit for each size furnished.
5.
Six replacement indicating light color lens for each color furnished.
6.
Three current transformers of each type and rating.
7.
Two potential transformers of each type and rating.
8.
Twelve potential transformer primary fuses.
9.
Twelve potential transformer secondary fuses.
10.
One ANSI 27 relay complete in a protective case.
11.
One ANSI 27X auxiliary relay.
12.
One ANSI 60 relay complete in protective case.
13.
One ammeter switch.
14.
One voltmeter switch.
Columbus PS
16430-4
B.
15.
Two sets of control jumpers.
16.
One hand crank per switchgear for circuit breaker withdrawal and insertion.
17.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
480-Volt Switchgear
a.
Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal Enclosed

Switchgear with Magnum DS drawout power circuit breakers with
Digitrip RMS solid state tripping units.
b.
General Electric Company AKD-10 Low Voltage Switchgear with

Wave-Pro drawout power circuit breakers with MicroVersa Trip Plus
solid state tripping units.
c.
Square D Company (Power-Zone 4 Low Voltage Metal Enclosed

Switchgear with Masterpact drawout power circuit breakers with
Powerlogic RMS solid state tripping units.
Microprocessor Based Protective Relays and Metering Systems

a.
b.
c.
3.
Cutler-Hammer IQ-4000
General Electric Company Multilin
Square D Company Powerlogic
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS):

a.
b.
Columbus PS
Other
Cutler-Hammer
Advanced Protection Technology
16430-5
2.2
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
Main Breakers Structures: The normal power (Utility source) supply to the
switchgear will be from the secondary of pad mount transformer T-1. Coordinate
the circuit breaker trip unit with the incoming feeder protection. The standby
emergency power (Generator source) supply to the switchgear will be from
Generator CG-1. Coordinate the circuit breaker trip unit with the generator feeder
protection.
B.
Switchgear:
1.
C.
2.3
Provide switchgear with the following features:

a.
Individually mounted, drawout power air circuit breakers
b.
Full insulated and isolated bus
c.
Insulated run back bus
d.
Circuit breakers rated for 100 percent continuous ampere when

installed in the switchgear enclosure
e.
Interrupting rating of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at rated

voltage
2.
Label the switchgear suitable for use as service entrance equipment where
appropriate.
3.
Provide all components required for complete functioning units as specified

and as shown using factory built standardized units, completely dead front,
totally enclosed and freestanding. Each unit comprises a stationary structure
and a drawout circuit breaker.
4.
Design, manufacture and test all equipment in accordance with the NFPA
70, NEMA SG3, and SG5; IEEE C37.13, C37.20.1 and C37.51 and UL
1558 Standards.
5.
Provide the required number of units based on the necessary controls and
metering as shown and specified.
Distribution System: Connect the switchgear to 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz, 3wire, solidly grounded neutral power system.
COMPONENTS
A.
Stationary Structure:
follows:
Columbus PS
Construct the stationary structure of the switchgear as
16430-6
1.
Build each unit out of bolted structural steel members, together with formed
or fitted sections of smooth sheet steel approximately 90 inches high.
2.
Form completely enclosed compartments for various combinations of circuit

breakers and auxiliary equipment.
3.
Provide sufficient structural strength to support all the equipment mounted

within, withstand the handling and shipment of the units, maintaining the
proper alignment, and be rigid and freestanding.
4.
Provide a formed front door panel for each compartment consisting of

concealed type hinges.
5.
Reinforce panels as required to retain alignment and to support instruments,

relays, and control equipment mounted thereon.
6.
Provide removable plates to permit access to all compartments individually.
7.
Isolate circuit breaker, buses, and incoming or outgoing cables with separate
compartments formed by sheet steel barriers.
8.
Provide a circuit breaker cubicle that allows the front face of the circuit
breaker to extend to the front of the switchgear enclosure or be enclosed
behind the circuit breaker compartment door.
9.
Provide suitable ventilation for the individual compartments to keep the

temperature of devices and buses within the permissible temperature limits
as specified by the Standards.
10.
Include insulated buses, fixed portion of primary disconnect devices,

insulated connections, instrument transformers, control devices and fuses in
the stationary structure. Provide removable boots to give access to bus joint
for inspection and maintenance.
11.
Provide a positioning mechanism for moving the removable circuit breaker

to or from the connected position.
12.
Provide guides for proper alignment of all engaging parts during movement
of circuit breakers between the connected or disconnected position.
13.
Provide stationary structure and circuit breakers that are interchangeable

with every other circuit breaker of the same rating.
14.
Extend the control and potential buses across all units of the switchgear.
15.
Fully isolate the main bus compartment from the circuit breaker
compartment and cable terminations.
Columbus PS
16430-7
B.
16.
Provide main buses rated not less than shown, consisting of rigidly
supported insulated copper bars of suitable design and cross-sectional area
to satisfactorily carry the rated current without exceeding the temperature
rise as specified in the IEEE and NEMA standards.
17.
Connect the bus with bolts having Belleville type lock washers.
18.
Silver plate the copper bars at current-carrying connections.
19.
Insulate all standard bus joints with preformed insulating boots secured by
nylon hardware. Insulate nonstandard joints with tape and insulating
compound.
20.
Equip each switchgear unit with a 1/4-inch by 2-inch bare copper ground
bus with a momentary rating at least equal to the highest momentary rating
of the units circuit breakers. Extend the ground bus the entire length of the
structure and comply with all applicable codes and regulations.
21.
Ground each stationary unit directly to the ground bus.
22.
Provide suitable lug terminals on the ground bus for connections to the
station grounding system.
23.
Construct and arrange the stationary structure so that circuit breakers are
completely isolated from each other within the same section and that
sections are isolated from adjoining sections.
24.
Provide steel floor channels suitable for embedding into the concrete floor
for leveling and anchoring the switchgear. Drill and tap the floor channels as
required. Provide bolts, nuts, and washers for anchoring the switchgear to
the channel.
Switchgear Enclosure:
1.
C.
Provide switchgear suitable for installation indoors.
Drawout Circuit Breakers and Tripping Units:

1.
Provide 480 volt, 3-pole, 600-volt class, drawout-type, power air circuit
breakers with solid-state trip units rated as shown, having 65,000 rms
amperes interrupting rating without current limiting fuses. Provide breakers
having a 100 percent ampere rating when installed in the switchgear
enclosure.
2.
Provide circuit breakers with trip free, manual-operating handles, storedenergy type trip mechanism and push-to-trip button; rated for 40 degrees C
Columbus PS
16430-8
ambient operation. Provide main and tie circuit breakers with key interlocks
as shown.
3.
Equip the circuit breaker with mechanical interlocks to prevent moving the
circuit breaker to and from the connected position without the circuit breaker
open.
4.
Provide circuit breakers that cannot be closed at any point between the
operating and test positions or when the key interlock is engaged.
5.
Provide means to padlock the circuit breaker in the disconnect position.
6.
Provide manually-operated distribution circuit breakers and electrically

operated main and tie circuit breakers.
7.
Provide electrically operated circuit breakers suitable for 120 volts ac

operation. Provide all auxiliary relays, electrical interlocks and cell position
switches to accomplish the operation shown or specified.
8.
Provide control connections between the stationary structure and removable

circuit breaker that have floating terminals mounted in the stationary
structure and engaging mating contacts on the breaker that are engaged
when the breaker is in either the connected or test position.
9.
Provide all circuit breakers with true rms sensing and microprocessor-based
logic circuitry having the following protection features for tripping the
circuit breaker.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
D.
Trip Indicators
Long time setting and time delay
Short time setting, time delay and I2t response.
Instantaneous setting (distribution circuit breakers only).
Ground fault setting, time delay and I2t response.
Short time and ground fault zone interlocking.
Switchgear Connections and Terminals:

1.
Construct all current-carrying connections of copper having suitable

capacity, bracing, insulation, temperature rating as the main bus.
2.
Connect current transformers in such a way that the transformers may be

removed and changed without damaging the connection.
Columbus PS
16430-9
E.
Instrument Transformers:
1.
2.
Columbus PS
Current Transformers
a.
Provide dry type current transformers, suitable for indoor service and
rated as shown.
b.
Provide sufficient thermal and mechanical capacity to withstand the

maximum momentary current rating of the circuit breaker.
c.
Provide solderless, clamp type shorting terminal blocks for secondary

connections.
d.
Properly identify the polarity of all current transformers with standard

marking symbols.
e.
Provide current transformers having an accuracy suitable for the

instruments and meters specified using the normal burdens of the
various devices, and not less than ANSI Standard requirements.
Potential Transformers
a.
Provide dry type potential transformers, suitable for indoor service.

single-phase, 60 hertz, 120 volts.
b.
Provide potential transformers that fit into and coordinate with the
complete switchgear units, and with the instruments, relays, meters,
and devices specified.
c.
Rate the potential transformers not less than 100-volt-amperes at 55

degrees C ambient or 150-volt-amperes at 30 degrees C ambient
thermal rating.
d.
Provide potential transformers that can withstand a secondary short

circuit for at least one second.
e.
Provide the transformers meeting the requirements of the ANSI

Standard accuracy classifications.
f.
Provide current-limiting type primary fuses.
g.
Provide secondary fuses sized for the protection of potential

transformers.
16430-10
3.
F.
H.
a.
Ground current and potential transformer secondaries with copper

conductors not smaller than No. 10 AWG and connecting to the
ground bus.
b.
Ground potential transformer neutrals, where shown or required with

a 600-volt green insulated copper conductor not smaller than No. 10
AWG.
c.
Provide connections to the bus that can be easily disconnected and

isolated for field testing individually.
d.
Install each ground wire as a continuous run without intervening

splices or terminal blocks.
e.
Ground secondary circuits of metering and relaying transformers at

one point only.
f.
Effectively ground meter, relay and instrument transformer cases.
Lightning Arresters and Surge Capacitors:

1.
G.
Grounding
Provide lightning arresters and surge capacitors for each incoming service.
Control Devices:
1.
Provide control switches of the standard rotary, multistage type suitable for
the use specified.
2.
Provide auxiliary relays, switches and mechanisms required for the

particular manufacture of the breaker.
3.
Provide a manually-operated trip bar or lever for each circuit breaker.
4.
Provide provisions for manual closing of each circuit breaker.
Instruments:
1.
Columbus PS
Provide flush- or semiflush-mounted instruments with cases of similar

design in accordance with the following:
a.
Antiglare glass fronts,
b.
Antiparallax scales consisting of white faces with black numerals and

markings.
16430-11
I.
c.
Length of the scale arc not less than 7 inches.
d.
Approximately 4-1/2 inches square.
e.
Scales based on the instrument transformers provided, unless

otherwise specified.
f.
Accuracy: One percent of full scale values.
g.
Drawout watthour meters with test disconnect facilities.
Microprocessor-Based Metering and Protection System:

Provide a
microprocessor-based metering and protection system having the following
features:
1.
UL recognized component meeting IEEE C37.90.
2.
Housed in a enclosure suitable for door mounting.
3.
Derive control power from metered line.
4.
Auto ranging metering of the following values:
5.
Columbus PS
a.
AC amperes in each phase, 0.5 percent accuracy
b.
AC voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, 0.5 percent accuracy
c.
Watts, 1 percent accuracy
d.
Vars, 1 percent accuracy
e.
Power factor, 2 percent accuracy
f.
Frequency, 0.5 percent accuracy
g.
Watt demand, 1 percent accuracy with programmable 5-, 10-, 15-, 30minute intervals
h.
Watt-hours, 1 percent accuracy
i.
Percent total harmonic distortion through the 31st harmonic
Protection system with the following functions:

a.
Voltage phase loss, less than 50% nominal line voltage
b.
Current phase loss, less than 1/16 of the largest phase

16430-12
c.
Voltage phase unbalance, 5 to 40% in 5% increments
d.
Phase voltage reversal
e.
Overvoltage, 105 to 140% in 5% increments
f.
Undervoltage, 95 to 60% in 5% increments
g.
Time delay for overvoltage, undervoltage, and phase unbalance, zero

to twenty seconds in one second intervals.
6.
Separate Form C (NO/NC) trip and alarm outputs contacts rated 10 amperes
at 115-volt ac or 30-volt dc resistive.
7.
Addressable communications card capable of transmitting data via an

Ethernet to the new Columbus Pumping Station PLC system for the
following signals:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
J.
Phase-to-phase voltage (3)

Phase current (3)
Power (kW)
Under voltage alarm
Phase failure alarm
Main breaker trip alarm
Main breaker closed

1.
Provide transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) equipment that

complies with UL 1449 and UL 1283.
2.
Provide units with a maximum continuous operating voltage that exceeds

115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage.
3.
Provide TVSS equipment suitable for wye-configured systems.
4.
Provide TVSS equipment having directly connected suppression elements

between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutral-ground (N-G).
5.
Provide TVSS equipment that distributes the surge current to all MOV
components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance and
provides equal impedance paths to each matched MOV.
6.
Provide high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filters that attenuate the

electric line noise at least 55 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL-STD-220A
insertion loss test method.
Columbus PS
16430-13
7.
Wire internal components with connections utilizing low impedance

conductors and compression fittings.
8.
Provide a monitoring panel for each system that incorporates the following
features:
9.
K.
a.
Green/red solid state indicator light to indicate which phase(s) have

been damaged.
b.
A flashing trouble light to indicate fault detection
c.
Transient event counter
d.
Audible alarm
e.
Form C dry contacts for remote indication of the unit status.
Provide each TVSS for service entrance or branch location application with
a minimum total surge current capable of withstanding 250kA or 160kA per
phase respectively or as shown.
Wiring:
1.
Completely assemble, wire and test each switchgear section at the factory,
including buses, phase, neutral and ground connections, insulators, cleats,
terminals, and terminal blocks.
2.
Insulate all current-carrying parts.
3.
Route all secondary wiring in the front of secondary compartments in wiring

troughs and terminate at approved, molded-type terminal blocks with
numbered marking strips, conveniently located with respect to the control
conduits.
4.
Provide terminal blocks with covers mounted so that the wires can be
grouped and laced together.
5.
Mark and identify all wiring in accordance with the manufacturer's wiring
diagrams.
6.
Label control wiring with an identification tag that indicates the terminal
number of the opposite end connection.
7.
Include wire labels and terminal numbers on schematic control and wiring
diagrams.
Columbus PS
16430-14
L.
2.4
8.
Provide spade connectors for wires No. 12 and smaller and solderless lugs
for larger sizes.
9.
Provide terminals for all connections and additional 15 percent spare

terminals for all control and instrument wiring.
10.
Provide No. 10 AWG stranded copper or larger with NEC Type SIS
insulation for all current transformer secondary wiring.
11.
Provide No. 14 AWG stranded copper or larger with NEC Type SIS
insulation for all other control wiring.
12.
Provide a fused switch or circuit breaker for the control power supply in
each breaker compartment.
Identification:
1.
Provide identification of the switchgear and its components as specified in

Section 16075.
2.
Install nameplates for devices located on doors so they are readable to a

person 5'-8" tall standing 3'-0" in front of the equipment.
3.
Locate nameplates so that they are readily associated with the items labeled.
4.
Where nameplates are installed on removable relays or removable device

doors, install a nameplate within the relay or device.
5.
Where nameplates are located on other compartments than those served, add
additional engraving to identify units served.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.5
Circuit Breaker Lifting Device: Provide a traveling type circuit breaker lifting
device rail mounted on the top of each switchgear assembly. Provide all
accessories required for lifting and lowering circuit breakers.
OPERATION SEQUENCE
A.
Microprocessor-Based Transfer System: Provide a microprocessor-based transfer

system having the following features.
1.
Housed in an enclosure suitable for door mounting.
2.
Provide LED lights to indicate the following:

a.
Columbus PS
Preferred Source Available

16430-15
b.
c.
d.
3.
Standby Source (Generator) Available

Preferred Source Connected
Standby Source (Generator) Connected
Design the transfer system to have the following features:

a.
A digital readout that displays each option as it is functioning and

include, but not limited to the following
(1)
(2)
(3)
Actual line-to-line voltage

Line frequency
Timers with count down timing
b.
Provide a operator keypad to allow setting of all programmable

parameters
c.
Provide a time delay to override a momentary power outage or

voltage fluctuation (0 seconds to 120 seconds).
d.
Provide a time delay transfer from the preferred source to the standby
source (0 seconds to 30 minutes).
e.
Provide a time delay transfer from the standby source to the preferred
source (0 seconds to 30 minutes)
f.
Provide a time delay for generator cool-down (0 seconds to 30

minutes)
g.
Provide a time delay for neutral position (0 seconds to 120 seconds)
h.
Under voltage sensing adjustable from 50 to 90 percent of nominal
i.
Under frequency sensing adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of

nominal
4.
Provide generator start contacts.
5.
Provide auxiliary relay contacts that are energized when the power is
available on the preferred source.
6.
Provide auxiliary relay contacts that are energized when the power is
available on the standby source.
Columbus PS
16430-16
B.
Design the main and tie circuit breakers to operate as follows:

1.
2.
With the Manual / Auto selector switch (IEEE/ANSI Device No. 43CS) in
the AUTOMATIC position:
a.
When the Microprocessor Based Transfer System (MTS) senses a

sustained undervoltage, trip open the Utility source main breaker and
send a signal to the Generator to start.
b.
The tie breaker shall remain closed after the Utility source main
breaker opens. If the undervoltage is due to a fault condition, the tie
breaker shall trip open when the Utility source main breaker trips
open.
c.
Upon sensing proper voltage on the Generator feeder, close the

Generator source main breaker.
d.
Send a signal to the PLC that the pumping station is on the generator
source.
e.
When the Utility source power returns, allow sufficient time for the
voltage to stabilize, trip open the Generator source main breaker,
allow for the operating pumps sufficient time to come to a full stop
and close the Utility source main breaker.
f.
Send a signal to the PLC that the pumping station is back on the
Utility source.
g.
The Generator shall continue to run unloaded for an adjustable cool

down cycle then shutdown automatically.
With the Manual / Auto selector switch (IEEE/ANSI Device No. 43CS) in
MANUAL position:
a.
Open and close the main and tie circuit breakers by using the breaker
control switch.
b.
Use this mode of operation when exercising the Generator to load.
3.
Provide electrical hard wired interlocks that allow only two of the three
breakers to be closed at one time to prevent paralleling the Utility and
Generator sources.
4.
Provide cell-switches that functionally indicate when a breaker is in either

the operating or test position. Incorporate cell switch contacts into the
breaker control circuit to allow testing a breaker in the test position without
affecting or tripping any other breaker.
Columbus PS
16430-17
2.6

A.
Tests:
1.
Conduct shop tests after the switchgear has been assembled to determine
general operating condition and circuit continuity, high voltage withstand
and other safety standards.
2.
Witness Tests: Carry out inspection and witness test of the completed
switchgear assembly to assess its state of workmanship and standard of
performance.
3.
Notify the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER of the proposed date of testing a

minimum of ten working days prior to the test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install the switchgears in accordance with the manufacturer's
B.
Conformance: Install the switchgears as shown, in conformance with

manufacturer's written instruction and recognized industry practices. Comply with
requirements of NEMA standards, and applicable ANSI publications.
C.
Coordination: Coordinate with other work including cabling and wiring work as
necessary to interface installation of switchgears with other work.
D.
Torque Requirements: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including

tightening values of equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing
E.
Fuses: Provide fuses in switchgear assemblies as required.
F.
Circuit Breaker Parameters: Set the circuit breaker protection parameters in

accordance with the protective coordination study specified in Section 16085.
G.
Grounding Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for the

switchgear as shown. Tighten connections in accordance with UL standard 486A
for permanent and effective grounding.
H.

complete and satisfactory operation of the system.
Columbus PS
16430-18
3.2

A.
Manufacturers Representative: Provide a factory-trained experienced, competent,

and authorized representative of the switchgear manufacturer to visit the site of the
Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, approve the equipment installation
and provide training as specified in Section 01820. Provide all instruments and
equipment necessary to conduct required tests, adjustments and training. Have the
manufacturer's representative utilize prepared comprehensive check sheets
covering inspections, checks and tests required for the assembly of the switchgear.
Submit copies of these documents executed and signed by the manufacturer's
representative. Have the representative present when each equipment item is
placed in operation. Provide representative service as often as necessary until all
problems are corrected and each equipment item is installed and operating
satisfactorily.
B.
Certified Report: Furnish a written report certifying that the equipment:

1.
Has been properly installed
2.
Is in accurate alignment
3.
Is free from any undue stress imposed by connections or anchor bolts, and
4.
Has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated
satisfactorily
C.
DPC Programming: Provide manufacturer's representative at the job site as often

as necessary to assist in the programming of the DPC system for accessing the
memory map of each device.
D.
Tests and Inspections: Perform the following tests and inspections. Record all
tests and submit a written report for approval. Retest as necessary.
1.
Check all breakers, relays, meters, power and control fuses and auxiliaries
for proper size, rating, and location. Clean control panels and cubicles.
Remove all shipping materials.
2.
Inspect equipment and each breaker and report installation or shipping

damage, loose materials, shipping blocks or contamination.
3.
Torque test bus connections where field joints are made.
4.
Test key interlock systems to demonstrate proper function.
5.
Check that all control and panel circuits are numbered and tagged and panel
door legends are engraved and installed as per drawings.
Columbus PS
16430-19
3.3
6.
Check equipment to determine that it is level, secured to foundations and

that doors operate properly.
7.
Test insulation of all control and relay circuits to ground with a suitable
megohmmeter.
Take suitable precautions where electronic devices,
instruments and instrument transformers are involved.
8.
After installation, but before any external connections are made to the
switchgear, subject the switchgear to a 10-minute high potential test applied
on the stationary structure and breakers. Use a test voltage of 75 percent of
the standard factory production tests.
9.
Test all bus, cable, wire and other equipment operating at the service voltage
that is energized by closing the incoming main line breakers. This test may
be witnessed by the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.
10.
Test protective relays to verify settings and determine proper operation.
GROUNDING
A.
System Inspections: Inspect ground system for compliance with the latest
approved drawings.
B.
Connection Inspections: Inspect all ground connections for evidence of looseness

and/or corrosion.
3.4

A.
Shop Painting: Paint the switchgear as specified in Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting: Touch up scratched and marred surfaces to match with original
finishes.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
General: Provide identification meeting the requirements of Section 16075.
B.
Component Identification: Identify all system components, cables and wires by

labels indicating unit numbers, circuit numbers and date of installation.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16430-20
SECTION 16443
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
Requirements for providing lighting and distribution
panelboards including circuit breakers and cabinets.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards
2.
UL 67
- Panelboards
3.
Fed. Spec.
W-P-115
- Power Distribution Panel
4.
UL 486A
- Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper

Conductors
5.
NEC
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish the manufacturer's catalog data for
panelboards, circuit breakers and accessories.
C.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish operation and maintenance

manuals for the panelboards as specified in Division 1.
Columbus PS
16443-1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Codes: Provide all materials and workmanship meeting the requirements of the
NFPA, the National Electrical Code and local codes.
1.
Design, fabricate and test the panelboards in accordance with applicable

ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards.
2.
Provide panelboards suitable for operation at their standard nameplate

ratings in accordance with ANSI standards.

A.
Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Panelboards
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Other

Square D Company
Cutler Hammer
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide factory-assembled fully rated dead-front type, panelboards,

suitable for surface or flush mounting with branch circuit breakers and a main
circuit breaker or main lugs as indicated.
1.
Provide panelboards with a full capacity separate ground bus and connected
to a three-phase four-wire or a single-phase three-wire service with insulated
neutral buses as indicated.
2.
Provide panelboards with the voltage, frequency and current ratings as

indicated conforming to NEMA Standard PB 1, Fed. Spec. W-P-115, UL 67
and the NEC.
3.
Provide panelboards with copper main, neutral and ground buses.
Columbus PS
16443-2
4.
Where required, label panelboards suitable for use as service entrance

equipment
B.
Bracing: Provide main bus bracing exceeding the lowest interrupting rating of any
circuit breaker installed.
C.
Fabrication: Fabricate panelboards using galvanized steel, continuously welded.

Provide cabinet fronts with doors over the circuit breakers. Provide doors fastened
with concealed hinges and equipped with flush type catches.
2.3
1.
Provide panelboards at least 20 inches wide, 5-3/4 inches deep, with wiring
gutters on both sides.
2.
Provide all panelboard trims exceeding five square feet in area with an
inside permanently secured angle to support the trim during fastening.
COMPONENTS
A.
Circuit Breakers: Provide bolt-on type branch and main circuit breakers.
1.
Furnish the frame sizes, trip settings and number of poles as indicated.
Mark ampere trip rating on the circuit breakers clear and visible.
a.
For lighting panelboards, provide 20-ampere, single-pole, 120-volt

circuit breakers unless otherwise shown or scheduled.
b.
For distribution panelboards, provide 20-ampere, three-pole, 600-volt

circuit breaker, unless otherwise shown or scheduled.
2.
Provide all breakers with quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanisms with

automatic thermal-magnetic, inverse time-limit overload and instantaneous
short circuit protection on all poles, unless otherwise indicated. Indicate
automatic tripping by the breaker handle assuming a clearly distinctive
position from the manual ON and OFF position. Design the breaker handle
to be trip-free on overloads.
3.
Interrupting Rating: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes for circuit breakers

on 240 volt systems or less, and 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes for circuit
breakers on 277 or 480 volt systems.
4.
Provide multipole breakers that utilize a common tripping bar.
5.
Provide ground fault interrupter circuit breakers for all circuits serving
receptacles located below grade and outdoors and as scheduled.
6.
Provide full module size single-pole breakers.

breakers in a single-pole module.
Columbus PS
16443-3
Do not install two-pole
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Directories: Provide directories in accordance with Section 16075.
B.
Circuit Breaker Handle Lock: Where shown provide circuit breakers with handle
clamp that holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.
C.
Keying: Key all panelboards alike.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install all panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's
in compliance with the requirements of NEMA standards, NEC, and applicable
ANSI Publications.
B.
Mounting Height: Mount all panelboards either surface or flush mounted as

shown such that the height of the top operating handle does not exceed 6 feet 6
inches from the floor. All panelboard mounting heights shall be approved by the
CM prior to panelboard installation.
C.
Coordination: Coordinate with other Work including cabling and wiring work to
interface the installation of the panelboards.
D.

screws and bolts, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's published
torque tightening values for the equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals in
accordance with UL 486A.
E.
Circuit Breaker Handle Lock: Install circuit breaker handle clamp on each circuit
breaker as shown.
F.
Directory: Provide a laminated typewritten directory with the following

information:
1.
Circuit number
2.
Area served
3.
Utilizing equipment
Columbus PS
16443-4
3.2

A.
Shop Painting: Paint the panelboards as specified in Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting: Touch up scratched and marred surfaces to match the original
finish.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16443-5
Columbus PS
16443-6
SECTION 16445
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing new motor control centers.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.

1.
IEEE C37.90
- IEEE Standard for Relay and Relay Systems Associated

With Electrical Power Apparatus
2.
IEEE C62.41
- IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low

Voltage AC Power Circuits
3.
IEEE C62.45
- IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected

to Low Voltage AC Power Circuits
4.
MIL-STD-220A - Method of Insertion-loss Measurement 12/1/59; with N1

and N2 (Fed/mil H-q)
5.
NEMA ICS 2
- Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors

and Overload Relays Not More than 2000 Volts AC or
750 Volts DC.
6.
NEMA ICS 3
- Industrial Control
Assemblies
Columbus PS
16445-1
and
Systems
Factory
Built
1.3
7.
NEMA 250
- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)
8.
UL 486A
- Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With

Copper Conductors
9.
UL 845
- Motor Control Centers
10.
UL 1283
- Electromagnetic Interference Filters
11.
UL 1449
- Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Design Requirements: Provide equipment capable of operating in an ambient

temperature range of 0 to 40 degrees C and humidity of up to 90 percent
noncondensing.
1.
Provide motor control centers designed for 480-volt, three-phase, three-wire,

60-hertz operation.
2.
Provide all control devices in the center suitable for operation at 120-volts,
60-hertz, unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.
Provide all control equipment and devices that meet the requirements of the
600-volt insulation class.
4.
Provide motor control centers to include the indicated number of 20 or 21inch deep sections and the components arranged as shown.
5.
Arrange the equipment for convenient and ready accessibility from the front
for inspection and maintenance of devices, terminals and wiring.
6.
Where shown or required, label the motor control center suitable for use as
service entrance equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information: Provide catalog data for all associated equipment
and devices.
C.
Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings customized to the project for motor
control centers to include the following:
Columbus PS
16445-2
1.
Outline drawings showing dimensions, weights, arrangement, elevations,

identification of components and a nameplate schedule for all units.
2.
Bill of materials including manufacturers' name and catalog number.
3.
Interconnecting wiring diagrams, where required.
4.
Individual schematic and wiring diagrams for each compartment.
5.
Furnish details showing electrical connections between main and tie circuit
breakers and corresponding main buses.
6.
Furnish instruction booklets and time-current curves for each circuit breaker
supplied.
7.
Furnish the following information on transient voltage surge suppressors

(TVSS):
a.
Verification that TVSS devices comply with UL 1449 and UL 1283

SVR.
b.
Actual let through voltage test data in the form of oscillograph results
for both the ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 (combination wave) and
B3 (ringwave) tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
c.
Spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test

procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying that the device's
noise attenuation exceeds 50 dB at 100 kHz.
d.
Test reports from a recognized independent testing laboratory

verifying the suppressor components can survive published surge
current ratings on both a per mode and per phase basis using the IEEE
C62.41, 8 x 20 microsecond current wave. Test data on individual
modules are not acceptable.
Obtain and enter full performance details on all motors and other equipment being
served on the above drawings.
D.
Quality Control: Furnish the following test reports and certificates as specified in
Division 1:
1.
Certified Shop Test Reports for motor control centers and related
components. Provide a minimum of 15 days written notice prior to shop
tests.
2.
Detailed field test reports of all tests indicating test performed as specified,
discrepancies found, and corrective action taken.
Columbus PS
16445-3
E.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish operation and maintenance manuals

as specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Provide motor control centers in accordance with NEMAICS 2, ICS 3,

and UL Standard No. 845.
B.
Codes: Provide motor control centers in accordance with the NEC and local
codes.
C.
UL Label: Provide a UL Label on each vertical section of each motor control

center.
1.6

A.
Division 1.
B.
Shipping and Packing: Provide all structures, equipment and materials rigidly
braced and protected against weather, damage, and undue strain during shipment.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store all equipment and materials in a dry, covered,
heated and ventilated location. Provide any additional measures in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.

1.
One set of contact tips, control power transformers and operating coils for
each six or less of each size of motor starter.
2.
One auxiliary contact unit or one set of auxiliary contact tips for each six or
less motor control units.
3.
Ten percent but not less than two complete control, latching and timing
relays of each type used in motor control centers.
4.
Two complete replacements of overload heater units for each catalog

number installed in motor control centers and motor starters.
5.
Two complete replacements of all LED indicating lamps and fuses used in
the installation.
Columbus PS
16445-4
B.
6.
One complete magnetic starter with motor circuit protector for each size
required.
7.
Two sets of replacement indicating light color lenses of each color

furnished.
8.
One circuit breaker test unit.
9.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Motor Control Centers:

a.
b.
2.
Cutler-Hammer 2100 Series

General Electric Company 8000 Line

a.
b.
2.2
Other
Cutler-Hammer
Advanced Protection Technology
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

A.
Basic Structural Components: Provide totally enclosed, dead-front, rigid, NEMA

12, gasketed, self-supporting and freestanding structures.
1.
Construct the various sections from channels not less than 12 gauge, formed
into proper shape, suitably reinforced and welded. Grind all internal welds
smooth and round off all corners to give a neat and pleasing appearance.
Construct doors and covers from a minimum of 14-gauge steel sheets.
2.
Provide steel bottom plates in each compartment section.
3.
Cover the rear of each structure with easily removable steel panels for rear
access.
Columbus PS
16445-5
B.
4.
Provide both ends of a completely assembled center so that extensions can

be easily added in the future.
5.
Provide hinges, screws, bolts, circuit breaker operating mechanisms,

nameplate mounting screws and other metallic appurtenances with a
noncorrodible metal covering.
6.
Install full height steel barriers on each side of the tie breaker structure to
prevent the passage of flames and ionized gases.
7.
Provide each motor control center with a three-phase bus compartment at the
top and a conduit and cable compartment at the top and bottom.
8.
Provide the cable compartments that run the full length of the motor control
center.
9.
Provide access to cable compartments by means of removable hinged doors.
10.
Provide each structure with a vertical wiring space between the starter cells
and side sheet for unit wiring.
11.
Equip the vertical wiring space with cable supports to hold the cables and
wiring in place.
Motor Control Center Enclosure:

1.
C.
Provide motor control centers suitable for installation indoors.
Bus Requirements: Provide main buses of silver plated copper bars across each
structure, sized in accordance with UL temperature rise of 50 degrees C based on a
40-degree C ambient temperature.
1.
Provide a 600-ampere minimum, main horizontal bus, unless otherwise

shown.
2.
Support all bus bars in each structure by means of bus supports fabricated
from an insulating material.
3.
Connect the horizontal bus to the incoming line circuit breakers and from
both sides of the tie breaker with copper bars securely fastened in place.
4.
Provide tin-plated vertical three-phase copper bus of sufficient size to carry

loads served.
5.
Insulate main and vertical buses over their entire length. Provide insulated
covers over all bolted connections.
Columbus PS
16445-6
D.
6.
Separate the bus bar compartments from breaker and controller cubicles by
insulated barriers or steel plates.
7.
Provide a 300-ampere uninsulated copper grounding bus with lugs for

connections to the plant grounding system in the bottom of each motor
control center.
8.
Brace all bus work suitably to withstand a minimum of 65,000 rms amperes
symmetrical short circuit current. Substantiate construction by a certified
laboratory test covering units of similar construction.
Individual Units: Provide motor control or circuit breaker units in combinations of

not less than 12-inch modular heights.
1.
Provide units of the plug-in or nonremovable type in accordance with the

manufacturer's standard for type and size of controller.
2.
Provide plug-in units within-plated, pressure-type line disconnecting stabs of

high strength copper alloy. Hold each plug-in unit in place and arrange the
units such that they can be removed or remounted readily without access to
the rear of the structure.
3.
Provide units that are totally enclosed and effectively baffled to isolate
ionized gases that may occur within each unit. In addition, ventilate each
unit so that it can be located anywhere within the structure using the same
overload heaters for the same load.
4.
Provide automatic shutter mechanism to cover the vertical bus stub area
when a unit is removed.
5.
Provide spaces for future equipment in unit structures with blank hinged
doors and removable metal barriers for isolation of the vertical buses.
6.
Construct doors to be drip-proof and dust-tight. Provide all doors with

hinges and screw fasteners for holding the doors closed. Fabricate each door
as a part of the structure and not part of the unit.
7.
Equip the doors for motor control compartments with a motor circuit
protector operating mechanism, thermal overload relay reset mechanism,
controls and indicating lights and other required devices as shown.
8.
Equip the doors for branch feeder equipment with a circuit breaker operating
mechanism.
9.
Provide mechanical interlocks between the compartment door and circuit

breaker operating mechanism to prevent opening of the door unless the
Columbus PS
16445-7
breaker is in the OFF position, and to prevent closing the breaker unless the
door is fully closed.
E.
10.
Provide circuit breaker operating mechanisms or handles that are

padlockable in the OFF position with room for a minimum of three
padlocks.
11.
Provide units having devices that are serviceable from the front, without
provisions for rear access.
12.
Provide control power transformers, relays, timers, alternators and

accessories for each unit as shown or specified.
Wiring:
1.
Provide NEMA Class II Type B wiring for the motor control centers,
including internal interlock and internal wiring between controller units and
devices.
2.
Provide internal wiring runs for interconnecting units with stranded

switchboard wire having 600-volt rated, flame-resistant, type SIS insulation.
Provide No. 14 AWG wire for control interconnections. Provide power
connections as required for the service.
3.
Provide No. 10 AWG or larger stranded copper wire with NEC Type SIS
insulation for all current transformer secondary wiring.
4.
Provide wire markers at each end of all wires.
5.
Where wiring connections are made to equipment mounted on hinged doors,

provide connections with extra flexible wires suitably cabled together and
cleated.
6.
Provide the wiring of all control connections to individual terminal blocks at

each motor starter. Locate terminal blocks for front access.
7.
Provide interlocking wiring between units of a motor control center or

between units of grouped centers as internal wiring with terminals provided
for external connections.
8.
Provide sufficient pull apart terminal blocks for all devices external to the
motor control center.
9.
Provide communication cables from the microprocessor-based metering

system and microprocessor-based overload protection systems to a single
terminal block located in the incoming line structure.
Columbus PS
16445-8
F.
Magnetic Starters:
Provide 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz across-the-line
combination motor circuit protector and magnetic starters having individual
control power transformers.
1.
Provide full-voltage nonreversing; full voltage two-speed nonreversing

two-winding; and full voltage two-speed nonreversing one-winding starters
as required.
2.
Provide starter contacts of the replaceable, spring-loaded, wedge type with

silver-cadmium oxide-plated contact surfaces. Provide replaceable coils of
the epoxy sealed type.
3.
Thermal Overload Elements: Provide each magnetic starter unit with a

Class 20 thermal overload element and all required accessories. Provide
size five and larger starters with current transformer operated overload
relays.
a.
Provide overload relays of the bimetallic type with an adjustment

knob that allow plus or minus 15 percent adjustment of the nominal
heater rating.
b.
Provide and adjust overload relays to match the associated motor

nameplate running current rating. Size the overload relays after
approval of the corresponding motor.
c.
Provide a set of isolated normally-open and normally-closed contacts

for each overload relay.
4.
Replaceability:
replaceable.
Provide starters having component parts that are easily
5.
Equip each starter with all required auxiliary contacts.
G.
Motor Circuit Protectors: Provide a motor circuit protector for each combination
starter using molded-case, air-break type designed for 600-volt, 60-hertz service
with an interrupting capacity of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 volts.
Provide three-pole motor circuit protectors with magnetic, adjustable-trip units
actuating a common tripping bar to open all poles when an overload or short
circuit occurs. Provide motor circuit protectors with no thermal elements. Provide
magnetic trip units capable of being adjusted from 700 to 1,300 percent of the
motor full load amperes.
H.
Contactors: Provide NEMA sized, 30 ampere minimum, contactors for electric

heating and other nonmotor loads equal to the motor starters except without
overload relays or heaters.
1.
Columbus PS
Provide motor circuit protector for short-circuit protection.

16445-9
I.
J.
Feeder Circuit Breakers: Provide molded-case type, two- or three-pole circuit

breakers as shown, with a minimum voltage rating of 600-volt ac.
1.
Interrupting Ratings: Provide an interrupting capacity of 65,000 rms

symmetrical amperes at 480 volts. Base interrupting rating on the IEEE and
NEMA Standard duty cycle for this class of equipment.
2.
Provide circuit breakers trip units as follows:

a.
Provide individual, thermal-magnetic trip units for all frame sizes

smaller than 400 amperes.
b.
Provide solid-state trip units for all frame sizes 400 amperes and
larger.
c.
Provide trip units that actuate a common tripping bar to open all poles
when an overload or short circuit occurs on any one.
d.
Provide trip elements with inverse time tripping and instantaneous

tripping at about ten times the normal trip device rating.
e.
Provide circuit breakers with trip-free handles.

1.
Provide transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) equipment that

complies with UL 1449 and UL 1283.
2.
Provide units with a maximum, continuous-operating voltage that exceeds

115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage.
3.
Provide TVSS equipment suitable for wye configured systems.
4.
Provide TVSS equipment having directly connected suppression elements

between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutral-ground (N-G).
5.
Provide TVSS equipment that distributes the surge current to all MOV
components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance and
provides equal impedance paths to each matched MOV.
6.
Provide high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filters that attenuate the

electric line noise at least 55 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL-STD-220A
insertion loss test method.
7.
Wire internal components with connections utilizing low impedance

conductors and compression fittings.
Columbus PS
16445-10
8.
9.
Provide a monitoring panel for each system that incorporates the following
features:
a.
Green/red solid state indicator light to indicate which phase(s) have

been damaged.
b.
A flashing trouble light to indicate fault detection.
c.
Transient event counter.
d.
Audible alarm.
e.
Form C dry contacts for remote indication of the unit status.
Provide TVSSs suitable for service entrance or branch location application

with a minimum total surge current capable of withstanding 250kA or
160kA per phase respectively or as shown.
K.
Control Power Transformers: Provide individual control power transformers for

each starter to derive the 120 volts for the unit's control circuit meeting the
requirements of Section 16491. Ground the unfused leg of the secondary to the
enclosure.
L.
Push Buttons, Selector Switches and Indicating Lights: Provide push buttons,
selector switches and indicating lights including legend plates having the same
type, appearance, shape and catalog number throughout each motor control center
meeting the requirements of Section 16491.
M.
Control Components: Provide control components including elapsed time meters,

control relays, latching relays, time delay relays, reset timers, repeat cycle timers,
alternators, phase failure and undervoltage relay, ground fault protection relays and
current sensor trip switches meeting the requirements of Section 16491.
N.
Feeder Cable Terminals: Provide closed-end, compression-type, solderless

connectors and terminals, suitable for copper conductors for terminating cables in
accordance with Section 16121.
O.
Wiring Schematic: Provide a schematic wiring diagram of each unit and affix it to
the inside of the door of that unit.
P.
Identification: Provide nameplates having the same type, appearance and shape
throughout each motor control center in accordance with the requirements of
Section 16075.
Columbus PS
16445-11
2.3

A.
Tests: Shop test each motor control center in accordance with IEEE and NEMA
standards.
1.
Operational Tests: After the equipment has been completely assembled,

perform operational tests to determine the general operating conditions and
circuit continuity. Also, perform high potential tests and other standard tests
for that particular class of equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's

B.
Adjustments: Set all motor circuit protectors and circuit breakers for the approved
short circuit and coordination study.
C.
Overloads: Adjust the thermal overloads on each phase of the starter units to the
actual motor installed.
D.
Cable Connections:
diagrams.
E.

screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers' published torque
tightening recommendations. Where manufacturers' torquing requirements are not
3.2
Terminate and label all field wiring per the approved

A.
B.
Tests: Perform the following field tests:

1.
Close and open each circuit breaker and motor circuit protector to test
operation.
2.
Energize the motor control center and test for hot spots.
3.
When site conditions permit, energize and de-energize each equipment item
served by each motor control center, testing the complete control sequence
of each item.
Columbus PS
16445-12
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
Manufacturers Representative: Furnish the services of a qualified, factory-trained

service engineer to assist in installation, start-up, field testing, calibration, placing
into operation and provide training of each motor control center, as specified in
Section 01820.
1.
Furnish the services of a service engineer when the equipment is placed into
operation.
2.
Furnish the services of a service engineer at job site as often as necessary

until all problems are corrected and the equipment installation and operation
are satisfactory.
Operation and Maintenance: Furnish operation and maintenance instructions as

A.
Shop Painting: Paint motor control centers in accordance with Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting: Clean and touch up any scratched or marred surface to match
original finish.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16445-13
Columbus PS
16445-14
SECTION 16460
GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for furnishing and installing ventilated, dry-type

transformers.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2

REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
ASTM D 635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time
of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal
Position
2.
NEC
3.
NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturer's data including:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Columbus PS
KVA ratings
Service voltages
Impedance and X/R ratio
Number of phases
Taps
Insulation class
Sound level
Dimensions
16460-1
9.
10.
C.
Weights
Mounting details
Quality Control: Furnish the following as specified in Division 1.

1.
Test Reports:
a.
2.
D.
1.4
Certified production reports for sound-level and temperature in

accordance with NEMA ST 20
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
Operations and Maintenance Manuals:

operations and maintenance manuals.
Furnish 6 copies of manufacturer's
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
UL Label: Provide UL listing label or mark.

A.
Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
3.
2.2
Other

Cutler Hammer
Square D Company
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide dry-type transformers suitable for indoor use.
B.
Insulation: Provide transformers above 15 kVA with 220-degree C temperature

insulation materials. Provide transformers 15 kVA and below with a minimum of
185-degree C insulation materials.
C.
Flame Retardant Materials: Provide transformers with flame retardant materials

that will not support combustion as defined in ASTM D 635.
Columbus PS
16460-2
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Transformer Taps: Provide transformers rated over 15 kVA with at least two 2-1/2
percent full capacity taps above and below nominal in the primary winding.
Provide transformers rated 15 kVA and below with two five percent taps or with
four 2-1/2 percent taps below rated voltage on the primary winding.
B.
Windings: Provide primary and secondary windings fabricated from copper

conductors.
C.
Voltage and KVA Ratings: Provide three-phase or single-phase transformers with

primary and secondary voltages and kVA ratings as specified.
D.
Connections:
1.
Three phase: Primary - 3-wire Delta; Secondary - 4-wire, solidly-grounded

wye.
2.
Single Phase: Primary - 2-wire; Secondary - 3-wire with mid-point solidlygrounded.
E.
Continuous Operations: Provide transformers suitable for continuous operation at

the rated kVA with a normal life expectancy as defined in NEMA ST 20 and the
performance obtained without exceeding 115 degrees C average temperature rise
by resistance or 145 degrees C hot spot temperature rise in 40-degree C maximum
ambient and 30-degree C average ambient. Do not provide transformers that
exceed 185-degree C maximum coil hot spot temperature.
F.
K-Factor: Provide transformers with a K-Factor not less than 13.
G.
Electrostatic Shields: Provide electrostatic shields between windings.
H.
Construction: Provide transformers with core mounting frames and enclosures of

welded and bolted construction with sufficient mechanical rigidity and strength to
withstand shipping, erection and short circuit stresses.
I.
Sound Levels:
levels:
Do not provide transformers that exceed the following sound
Average Sound Level in dB

NEMA ST 20
40
45
50
Transformer kVA
0 09
10 - 50
51 150
Columbus PS
16460-3
J.
Lifting Lugs and Jacking Plates: Provide lifting lugs and jacking plates as required
on the transformer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install all transformers and provide guards as specified by the latest NEC
and ANSI standards, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Clearances: Provide clearance around the transformer meeting the manufacturer's

recommendation.
C.
Supports: Provide suitable supports for all transformers. Mount transformers on

one inch of Korfund, or equal sound-absorbent material.
D.
Primary Disconnect: Provide primary disconnect circuit breaker or disconnect

switch as shown or required.
3.2

A.
Shop Painting: Paint transformers meeting the requirements of Section 09900.
B.
Field Painting: Clean and touch up scratched and marred surfaces to match the
original finish.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16460-4
SECTION 16491
CONTROL COMPONENTS AND DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing manual starters, motor controllers

and remote control stations. In addition, the requirements for control components
and devices for use in equipment provided under various other sections.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.2

Section 16055 - Requirements for Shop-Assembled Equipment
Section 16266 - Adjustable Frequency Drives
Section 16500 - Lighting
REFERENCES
A.
1.3

1.
NEMA ICS 2
Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
2.
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)
3.
UL 486A
Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With

Copper Conductors
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements: Provide equipment capable of operating in an ambient

temperature range of 0 to 40 degrees C and humidity of up to 90 percent
noncondensing.
B.
Motor Controllers: Provide motor controllers suitable for 480-volt, three-phase,

three-wire, 60-hertz operation.
Columbus PS
16491-1
C.
Control Devices: Provide control devices suitable for operation at 120-volts, 60hertz, unless specifically noted otherwise.
D.
Insulation Class: Provide control equipment and devices that meet the
requirements of the 600-volt insulation class.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.

and Section 16050.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish catalog data for all associated equipment
and devices.
C.
Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings customized to the project for manual
starters, motor controllers and remote control stations that include the following:
D.
1.5
1.
Outline drawings showing dimensions, identification of components and a

nameplate schedule for all units.
2.
Bill of materials including manufacturers' name and catalog number.
3.
Individual schematic and wiring diagrams for each motor controller
Equipment Ratings: Obtain and enter full performance details on all motors and
other equipment being served on the above drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes: Provide manual starters, motor controllers and remote control stations that
are in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.
1.
B.
1.6
Provide manual starters, motor controllers and remote control stations that
are in accordance with the NEC and local codes.
UL Listing: Provide UL-listed manual starters, motor controllers and remote

control stations.
A.
Division 1.
B.
Storage and Protection: Store all equipment and materials in a dry, covered,
heated and ventilated location. Provide any additional measures in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
Columbus PS
16491-2
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.

1.
2.
3.
B.
Two control stations of each type provided.

Three of each type of manual starter.
One of each type of motor controllers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Manuel Starters, Motor Controllers and Remote Control Stations:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Cutler-Hammer
Square D Company
Timing Relays:
a.
b.
2.2
Cutler-Hammer
Square D Company
Crouse-Hinds Company
Control Relays:
a.
b.
3.
Other
Agastat 7000 Series

Eagle Signal
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS

A.
Manual Motor Starters: Provide toggle-type, thermal-switch, manual, motor

starters with pilot lights for all 120-volt, single-phase motors rated less than hp.
1.
Columbus PS
Where shown or required, provide

HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch.
16491-3
starters
complete
with
2.
2.3
Provide starter enclosures as specified under the section Remote Control

Stations.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A.
General: Provide 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz, across-the-line, combination motor

circuit protector magnetic starters with individual control power transformers.
B.
Magnetic Starters: Provide magnetic starters as follows:
C.
1.
Full voltage nonreversing or full voltage reversing, as required.
2.
Starter contacts of the replaceable, spring-loaded, wedge type with silvercadmium oxide plated contact surfaces.
3.
Provide replaceable coils of the epoxy sealed type.
4.
Thermal Overload Elements: Class 20 thermal overload element and all

required accessories. Provide size five and larger starters with current
transformer operated overload relays.
a.
Bimetallic type with an adjustment knob which allow plus or minus

15-percent adjustment of the heaters nominal rating.
b.
Size the overload relays after approval of the corresponding motor.
c.
Provide and adjust overload relays that match the associated motor
nameplate running-current rating.
d.
Provide a set of isolated, normally-open and normally-closed contacts

for each overload relay.
Motor Circuit Protectors: Provide a motor circuit protector for each combination
starter as follows:
1.
Molded-case, air-break type designed for 600-volt, 60-hertz service with an

interrupting capacity of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 volts.
2.
Three-pole motor circuit protectors with magnetic, adjustable-trip units

actuating a common tripping bar to open all poles when an overload or short
circuit occurs.
3.
No thermal elements.
4.
Magnetic trip units capable of being set from 700 to 1,300 percent of the
motor full-load amperes.
Columbus PS
16491-4
D.
Control Components: Provide push buttons, switches, indicating lights,

transformers, relays and timers as specified under the section Control Components.
E.
Enclosures: Provide motor controllers installed in NEMA 250 rated enclosures as

follows:
AREA
2.4
ENCLOSURE
Outdoor, below grade

elevation indoors and
corrosive areas
NEMA 4X Stainless steel
Above grade indoor
NEMA 12 Industrial
REMOTE CONTROL STATIONS

A.
General: Provide heavy-duty, oiltight remote control stations, consisting of push

buttons, indicating lights, and selector switches with double-break silver contacts
meeting the requirements specified under the section Control Components.
B.
Enclosures: Provide motor controllers installed in NEMA 250 rated enclosures as

follows:
AREA
C.
2.5
ENCLOSURE
Outdoor, below grade

elevation indoors and
corrosive areas.
NEMA 4X Stainless steel
Above grade indoor
NEMA 12 Industrial
Lockout Attachments: Where shown, provide lockout attachments as follows:

1.
Push buttons with padlockable attachment that holds the button depressed.
2.
Selector switch with a padlockable attachment that covers the selector

switch operators and allows the switch to be set in any position. Selector
switch operators that use a removable key are not acceptable.
CONTROL COMPONENTS
A.
Push Buttons, Selector Switches and Indicating Lights:

1.
Provide heavy-duty, oiltight, 30.5 mm, push-button or selector-switch

control stations arranged for flush-panel mounting.
2.
Provide the additional switches, relays, and other electrical accessories

necessary to control and safeguard the operation of the associated
equipment.
Columbus PS
16491-5
3.
Provide 30.5 mm, low-voltage, push-to-test, LED type indicating lights

suitable for operation at 120-volt, 60-hertz ac control circuit voltages.
4.
Color code indicating lights as follows:

Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Motor running or valve open

Motor off or valve closed
Capable of operation from this point
Alarm or trouble condition
B.
Control Power Transformer: Provide an individual, control power transformer for

each starter to derive the 120 volts for the unit's control circuit. Provide
transformers with sufficient capacity to meet the energy demands for all related
control components including relays, solenoids and other indicated items. Provide
dual fuses on the primary and one fuse on the secondary. Ground the unfused leg
of the secondary to the enclosure.
C.
Elapsed Time Meters: Provide nonreset-type elapsed time meters to register up to

9999.9 hours, having square cases suitable for panel mounting and having coils for
120-volt, 60-hertz operation.
D.
Control and Latching Relays: Provide control and latching relays of 600-volt
class, machine-tool quality with convertible contacts. Provide relay-operating
contacts rated at a minimum of 10 amperes, 120 volts, 60 hertz.
E.
Timing Relays: Provide four-pole, double-throw, timing relays with timing ranges
and ON/DELAY or OFF/DELAY operation as required. Provide contacts rated a
minimum of 10 amperes at 120 volts, 60 hertz.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
B.
Mounting: Mount manual starters, motor controllers and remote control stations 4
feet 6 inches from the finished floor up to their centerlines, unless otherwise
shown. Mount all devices at least inch away from concrete wall surfaces.
C.
Adjustments: Set all motor circuit protectors and circuit breakers based on the
approved short circuit and coordination study.
D.
Overloads: Adjust the thermal overloads on each phase of each starter unit for the
actual motor installed.
Columbus PS
16491-6
E.
Cable Connections:
diagrams.
F.

screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers' published torque
tightening recommendations. Where manufacturers' torquing requirements are not
3.2
Terminate and label all field wiring per the approved

A.
B.
Operation and Maintenance: Furnish operation and maintenance instructions as

END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16491-7
Columbus PS
16491-8
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for providing complete lighting systems as

specified and as shown.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2

Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
REFERENCES
A.

1.
2.
1.3

UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
System Components: Provide all interior and exterior lighting fixtures including
all supports, plaster frames, trim rings, outlet boxes, light standards, concrete
bases, ground rods, and all accessories and appurtenances required for complete
functioning lighting systems, as shown and as specified.
B.
Performance Requirements: Provide lighting systems that adhere to code and are
in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Manufacturer's Data and Information:

1.
Columbus PS
Furnish catalog data for all equipment provided under this section.
16500-1
2.
Furnish complete photometric data reports from an independent testing

laboratory with shop drawings for each luminaire. Luminaires submitted
without photometric data will not be reviewed.
C.
Shop Drawings: Furnish layout drawings showing arrangement, circuiting,

erection requirements of equipment and details of construction and assembly.
D.
Quality Control: Furnish the following:

1.
2.
3.
E.
1.5
Manufacturers certificates for equipment performance.

Manufacturers test reports.
Manufacturers installation instructions.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish two copies of the operation and
maintenance manuals for lighting equipment as specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes: Provide materials and workmanship that meet the requirements of the
NFPA Standards and the National Electrical Code.
B.
equipment.
1.6
Provide UL and FMS listed and labeled lighting

A.
B.
Storage and Protection: Store and protect equipment, components and accessories
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with the
requirements of Division 1.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.

1.
Fixtures: Provide one lighting fixture of each type for every 40, but not less
than one, for each type provided.
2.
Ballasts: Provide 10 percent, but not less than two, of each type of:
a.
b.
Columbus PS
Fluorescent ballast provided.

Metal halide ballast and capacitor provided.
16500-2
B.
3.
Fluorescent Lamps: Provide 20 percent, but not less than 12, of each type of
fluorescent lamp provided.
4.
Metal halide Lamps: Provide 20 percent, but not less than 12, of each type
of metal halide lamp provided.
5.
Lens and Globes: Provide 10 percent, but not less than 6, of each type of
lens or globes provided.
6.
Provide two of each type photo cell provided.
7.
Provide five sets of special tools that may be required for maintenance of
lighting fixtures.
Packaging: Deliver all spare parts neatly wrapped or boxed, indexed and tagged
with complete information for use and reordering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
General: The lighting fixture descriptions and catalog numbers listed in the
Lighting Fixture Schedule on the contract drawings are used to indicate the
acceptable quality, design and distribution characteristics of approved lighting
fixtures.
B.

1.
Lamps:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Ballasts:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Advance Transformer Company

Universal Manufacturing Corporation
Osram Sylvania
Emergency Battery Lights:

a.
b.
c.
Columbus PS
General Electric Company Lamp Division

Philips Lighting Company
Osram Sylvania
Chloride Systems
Dual-Lite
Sure-Lites
16500-3
Other
4.
Time Switches:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Photocells:
a.
b.
6.
Tork
Intermatic
LED Lights
a.
2.2
Intermatic
Tork
Paragon
Cooper Crouse Hinds
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide lighting fixtures complete with all required lamps, ballasts,
fittings, receptacles, gaskets, globes and diffusers, as shown and scheduled.
B.
Wiring Channel Construction: Construct the wiring channels to permit access to

the auxiliaries and sockets for repair or replacement of components without
removal of the fixture.
C.
Fluorescent Fixture Diffusers: Secure diffusers for fluorescent fixtures securely in

place in a manner which enables them to be removed when required.
D.
Globes: Provide gasketed, heat and impact-resistant, glass globes for incandescent,
metal halide fixtures.
E.
Lamp Holders: Rigidly support screw-type, lamp holders, secure them against
turning, and install them in a manner that allows for easy replacement. In general,
fixtures designed to accept lamps of different wattages shall have adjustable
sockets to allow for variations in lamp light centers. Provide brass, shell-type lamp
holders. Aluminum shells will not be accepted.
F.
Insulation: Provide a wire insulation systems and components that are capable of
withstanding the temperatures to which they will be subjected in the fixture, while
maintaining normal expected ballast life.
2.3
COMPONENTS
A.
Ballasts:
1.
Columbus PS
Provide Class P ballasts for fluorescent fixtures bearing CBM and UL labels
having a high power factor. Provide non-PCB capacitors. Provide ballasts
16500-4
with the quietest sound rating available for its type. In general, use A-sound
rated, 34-watt, rapid-start, energy saving ballasts. Provide two-lamp ballasts
whenever possible, unless specifically noted otherwise.
2.
Provide ballasts for metal halide fixtures that are integrally mounted and
suitable for operating the high intensity discharge lamp of the type and
wattage rating scheduled. Provide non-PCB capacitors. Provide ballasts
with sufficient open circuit voltage to strike and operate the lamp at
temperatures down to 0 degrees F indoors and minus 20 degrees F outdoors.
Provide a ballast system that will not fail when a burned-out lamp is left in
place for 120 days or less.
a.
2.4
Provide metal halide ballasts of the high power factor, peak-lead,

autotransformer type with a minimum power factor of 90 percent.
EXIT SIGNS
A.
2.5
Indoor Areas:
1.
General: Provide fully-automatic, self-contained, battery-pack, LED type

exit signs, normally operated from the ac wiring system, but capable of
remaining lighted for a period of 1.5 hours during an ac power outage.
Provide exit signs suitable for dual voltage input with surge protection
suitable for operation on 120 volts. Equip each sign with nickel cadmium
batteries and a totally solid-state charger which constantly evaluates the state
of charge of the batteries and keeps them fully charged. Provide a charger
that is capable of fully recharging the batteries in 24 hours, following a
discharge. Provide a press-to-test switch located on the bottom of the
housing to test the lamps and battery, and an ac indicator lamp to indicate
that the charger is functioning and the unit is in operating condition.
Provide UL listed exit signs complying with OSHA regulations.
2.
Construction: Provide exit signs having a cast-aluminum housing with field

selectable direction arrows, a red, translucent optical diffuser over the LED
lamps, single or double-faced, as listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule or
as shown.
OUTDOOR LIGHTING
A.
General: Provide outdoor lighting luminaires and standards as listed in the

Lighting Fixture Schedule.
B.
Mounting: Mount outdoor lighting on concrete bases or structures as shown.
C.
Wind Design: Provide outdoor lighting standards and luminaires that can
withstand the force caused by a 100 mile-per-hour wind with a gust factor of 1.3.
Columbus PS
16500-5
D.
2.6
Lighting Standards: Provide lighting standards complete with mast arm subbase,
anchor bolts and handholes.
EMERGENCY BATTERY LIGHTING
A.
General: Provide emergency battery lighting equipment as listed in the Lighting

Fixture Schedule capable of providing emergency lighting instantaneously upon
the failure or interruption of the normal electric power supply.
B.
Nonhazardous Locations:
2.7
1.
Batteries: Provide 6-volt, sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries

capable of operating 40 watts of light for 1-1/2 hours to 87-1/2 percent of
the battery capacity.
2.
Charging Systems: Provide with a solid-state charging system. Provide

chargers suitable for operation on 120 volts.
3.
Lamps: Provide 8-watt, sealed-beam tungsten halogen type lamps.
4.
Housings:
Provide NEMA 4X sealed and gasketed, fiberglass or
thermoplastic enclosures.
5.
Controls: Provide a test push buttons and ac ON indicating lights.
TIME SWITCH
A.
2.8
General: Provide digital, general purpose, 7-day type, time switches that allow a
different schedule each day. Provide time switches that include 32 on-off
operations, daylight-savings time adjustment, LCD display and battery backup.
Provide time switches suitable for panel-door mounting, 120-volts operation and
with output contacts rated for 20 amperes.
PHOTOCELLS
A.
General: Provide SPST photocells integral with the fixtures suitable for switching
the scheduled lamp load at the stated voltage. Provide photocells suitable for
operating from -40 degrees F to 140 degrees F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Packing: Suitably pack and rigidly brace all equipment and protect it against
weather, damage and undue strain during shipment.
Columbus PS
16500-6
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install lighting fixtures and lamps in accordance with the manufacturer's
Locate fixtures to suit the architectural details of the area involved. Coordinate
placement with the details indicated on the architectural reflected ceiling drawings
or architectural elevations. Install lamps of proper type, wattage and voltage rating
in fixtures prior to completion of project. Install all fixtures to comply with
applicable provisions of NEC.
B.
Obstructions: In areas, such as equipment and mechanical rooms, which have

obstructions at the ceiling or walls such as ducts, large pipes, groups of pipes, and
like items, install fixtures so that maximum utilization of the light is achieved.
C.
Accessories: Provide straps, mounting plates, nipples, plaster rings, brackets and
all accessories necessary for proper installation.
D.
Suspended Fixture Support: Support suspended fixtures by approved means,

consisting of rods, stems attached to studs, hickeys and suitable outlet box cover
aligners of the shock-absorbing, vaportight or swivel type having flexible joints
permitting fixtures to hang plumb. Install stems using 3/4-inch galvanized steel
conduits, unless otherwise specified. Where indicated or required, support fixtures
by means of a suspended channel. Provide channels that meet the requirements for
the type of conduit provided, as specified in Section 16130. Where the channel is
used as the wiring raceway, provide closure strips, end caps and fittings as required
for an approved raceway.
E.
Emergency Lighting: Connect exit signs to separate unswitched circuits in the

lighting panelboard. Lock these circuit breakers in the closed position. Connect
emergency light fixtures to unswitched leg of circuit serving the area.
F.
Concrete Bases: Provide concrete bases for outdoor lighting standards including
underground ducts and conduits and required grounding as shown and as specified.
Provide steel reinforcing bars, anchor bolts, and bolt circle for concrete bases as
shown and specified and provide leveling shims as required.
G.
Exit Fixtures: In general, mount exit sign fixtures so that the bottom of the fixture
will be three inches above the top of the door frame.
H.
Photocells: Install photocells 6-inches above roof peak with the lens facing north.
I.
Nameplates: Install nameplates as specified in Section 16075.
3.3

A.
Testing: Test the entire lighting system for continuity and balance after installation
and prior to acceptance.
Columbus PS
16500-7
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Fixtures: Aim and adjust fixtures as shown.
B.
Exit Sign Arrows: Adjust exit sign directional arrow as shown.
C.
Relamping: Relamp fixtures that have failed lamps at substantial completion.
3.5
A.
3.6
Demonstrate the proper operation of all lighting fixtures to the owner's

representative and repair or replace all defective fixtures.
A.
Shop Painting: Shop paint equipment as specified in Section 09900.
B.
Steel Surfaces: Prior to final completion of the Work, thoroughly clean all steel
surfaces and retouch all scratches and abrasions. Use the same paint as used for
shop finishing coats.
C.
Photometric Control Surfaces: Clean

recommended by the manufacturer.
photometric
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16500-8
control
surfaces
as
SECTION 16723
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
This section describes the requirements for a fiber optic cable system as used
by digital video, security and computer systems. This section includes fiber
optic cable, connectors and all ancillary equipment necessary to provide fully
functional systems.
RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Related Work Specified in other Sections include:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3

SUBMITTALS
A.

Division 1 and Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods of the
Electrical Contract.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish manufacturer's catalog data for each
type of wire and cable furnished.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
A description of the network including:

Layout drawings showing all hardware and cabling
Catalog descriptions for each component
MAINTENANCE
A.
Spare parts shall be furnished and shall be completely identified with a

numerical system to facilitate parts inventory, control and stocking. Each part
shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are
identical for more than one size unit shall have the same part number. The
following shall be supplied:
Columbus PS
16723-1
1.
One set of all special tools, wrenches and test equipment required to
disassemble, test, repair and adjust the equipment shall be provided.
2.
One set of fiber optic test tools shall be furnished. The test set shall
consist of Optical Light Source (OLS) MicroTest Optical Light,
Tektronics TOP 130 LED light source or equal, Optical Power Meter
(OPM), MicroTest Fiber eye, Tektronics TOP 200 or equal, TOP visual
Fault Finder or equal.
a.
Optical Power Meter (OPM):

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
b.
Optical Light Source:

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
3.
Columbus PS
Accuracy/Linearity +/-0.2dB
Amplifier design: Linear
Calibrated wavelength: 850nm, 1300nm
Calibration period: 12 months
Display resolution: 0.01dB
Dynamic range (Power): +3dB to -55dB
Optical adapter: Universal
Photodiode: Germanium
Power Source: 2 AA batteries
Battery Life: 100 hours
Source type: LED

Wavelength: 850nm, 1300nm
Power launched into 62.5/125nm fiber @850nm: -13dBm
and @1300nm: -12dBm
Power output accuracy: +/-2dB @ 850nm and +0.5dB @
1300nm
Optical adapter: Universal
Power Source: 2AA batteries
Battery life: 8 hours
Splice/connectorization kit: Provide a splice and termination kit with

the following minimum equipment.
a.
Fiber cleaver - Corning Cable Systems model FBC-005 or

approved equal.
b.
50 multimode connectors of each type used. Connectors shall be

of the mechanical type with a pre-polished factory stub with
mechanical splice with index matching gel. Connectors shall be
Corning Cable Systems Unicam multimode connectors or
approved equal.
16723-2
B.
4.
Additional items as recommended by equipment manufacturers or as

described elsewhere in the Specifications.
5.
Twenty patch cables of each type provided.
Provide special tools necessary for normal operation, maintenance and

diagnostic aids.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Fiber Optic Cables

a.
b.
c.
2.
Fiber Optic Patch Cables

a.
b.
2.2
Optical Cable Corporation, DX series

Belden, Tray optics series
Phoenix Digital FOC - ECP series
Optical Cable Corporation

Siecor
MATERIALS
A.
B.
General
1.
Provide all necessary items for installation, including mounting brackets,

interconnecting cables, hardware and appurtenances.
2.
Fiber optic cable shall be utilized for CCTV and instrumentation

circuits.
Fiber Optic Cable

1.
Fiber optic cable shall be installed for inter-building and inter-panel

communication and digital video systems as shown.
a.
DPC Communication:
The fiber optic cable for DPC
communication shall meet the following:
(1)
Columbus PS
Cable shall be suitable for installation as both trunk cable

and riser cable.
16723-3
b.
Columbus PS
(2)
Cable shall be rated for indoor/outdoor use.
(3)
Cable shall be 62.5/125 micrometer (core/clad) multimode

fiber optic cable.
(4)
Cable shall utilize a multifiber per tube (MFPT) design

consisting of 24 fibers contained in tight buffer tubes.
(5)
Cable shall utilize a 900 um diameter tight buffer coating

on each optical fiber.
(6)
Cable shall be riser rated distribution cable.
(7)
Cable shall have a ripcord(s) to assist in jacket removal.
(8)
Cable shall be suitable for direct termination with standard

connectors.
Digital Video System: The fiber optic cable for digital video
system shall meet the following:
(1)
Cable shall be suitable for installation as both trunk cable

and riser cable.
(2)
Cable shall be rated for indoor/outdoor use.
(3)
Cable shall be 62.5/125 micrometer (core/clad) multimode

fiber optic cable.
(4)
Cable shall utilize a multifiber per tube (MFPT) design

consisting of 4 fibers contained in tight buffer tubes.
(5)
Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.0 dB/km

at 1300 nm.
(6)
Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500

MHz-km at 1300 nm.
(7)
Cable shall utilize a 900 um diameter tight buffer coating

on each optical fiber.
(8)
Cable shall be riser rated distribution cable.
(9)
Cable shall have a ripcord(s) to assist in jacket removal.
16723-4
(10) Cable shall be suitable for direct termination with standard

connectors.
2.
Fiber Optic Patch Cables

a.
Patch cables shall be 62.5/125 micrometer (core/clad) multimode

fiber optic cable.
b.
Patch cables shall be terminated with connectors as scheduled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Install all fiber optic cable in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations.
2.
Provide pull boxes as needed to safely pull cable without damage.
3.
Terminate both ends of all cables in a separate fiber optic patch panel,
unless otherwise shown in a common patch panel.
4.
Provide fiber optic jumper cables to interconnect between patch panels.
5.
Provide support for all riser cables to reduce tensile load below eighty
percent of the manufacturers maximum long term tensile load
requirements.
6.
Inspect all fiber optic cables before and after installation.
7.
Faulty fiber optic cables shall be removed and replaced at no additional

cost to the City.
8.
Provide long radius elbows which are in excess of the manufacturer's

advertised long-term minimum bending radius.
9.
Where two cables join, provide two patch panels mounted adjacent to
each other with necessary jumpers between panels provided.
10.
Terminate all fibers in every cable with extras tagged as spare.
Columbus PS
16723-5
3.2
FIELD TESTING
A.
Provide the services of the fiber optic cable manufacturer to inspect the
installation of each cable. Test each fiber between its patch panel bulkhead
connectors for optical power loss and frequency response. All fibers shall be
verified to meet manufacturers advertised specifications.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16723-6
SECTION 16724
FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install, and
place into successful operation, fiber optic patch panels. This section includes
all ancillary equipment necessary to provide a fully functional patch panel
system.
RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Related Work Specified in other Sections Include:

1.
2.
3.
1.3

SUBMITTALS
A.

Division 1 and Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods of the
Electrical Contract.
B.
Product Data and Information: Furnish Manufacturer's product data sheets and
complete construction details including physical characteristics of each patch
panel.
1.
Overall dimension of each patch panel.
2.
A description of the network including:

a.
b.
1.4
Layout drawings showing all cabling and connections.

Catalog descriptions of each component.
SPECIAL TOOLS
A.
The Contractor shall provide special tools necessary for normal operation,
maintenance and diagnostic aids.
Columbus PS
16724-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels

a.
b.
2.2
Net Optics
Corning Cable Corp.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A.
General: Provide all necessary items for installation including, but not limited
to, mounting brackets, interconnecting cables, hardware and appurtenances.
B.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels:

1.
Columbus PS
Wall mounted fiber optic patch panels meeting the following minimum
specifications shall be installed as shown.
a.
Capacity for 48 connectors and jumpers.
b.
Thin modular low profile splice tray shall accommodate splicing

for fusion and mechanical splices.
c.
Dual doors shall be provided to separate the cable entry section

and the patch panel side.
d.
Provide cable routing from the top and bottom of both panel
sections.
e.
Enclosures shall be manufactured from 16-gauge, cold rolled

steel.
f.
Panels shall be provided with grounding and strain relief lugs to

support the fiber cable.
g.
Provide cable tie-down support islands to take up excess fiber

optic cable and insure it does not exceed its maximum bending
radius.
h.
Provide cable bulkhead adapters pre-mounted on eight plates, six

connectors per plate (dual fiber connectors count as two).
16724-2
2.
i.
Panels shall be inspected to assure that there are no sharp edges

which could damage the fiber optic cable.
j.
Patch panel dimensions shall be a minimum of 13.5" high x 22.5"

wide x 4" deep.
k.
Patch panel shall be mounted in a painted steel NEMA 12

enclosure.
Rack-mounted fiber optic patch panels meeting the following minimum

specifications shall be installed in the DPC system.
a.
Capacity for 12 connectors and jumpers.
b.
Provide universal mounting brackets for 19 and 23 inch EIA relay

racks and cabinets.
c.
Modular low profile splice tray shall accommodate splicing for

fusion and mechanical splices.
d.
Provide access from the front, rear, left and right sides.
e.
Panels shall be manufactured from 16-gauge, cold rolled steel.
f.
Panels shall be provided with grounding and strain relief lugs to

support the fiber cable.
g.
Provide cable tie-down support islands to take up excess fiber

optic cable and insure it does not exceed its maximum bending
radius.
h.
Panels shall be inspected to assure that there are no sharp edges

which could damage the fiber optic cable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS

A.
Install fiber optic patch panels, with enclosure, on wall or in 19" rack in
accordance with manufacturers guidelines.
B.
Where two fiber optic cables join provide two patch panels mounted adjacent
to each other with necessary jumpers provided between panels.
C.
Terminate all fibers in every cable with extras tagged as spare.
Columbus PS
16724-3
D.
Label each patch panel and include a termination list attached to the inside of
the door.
END OF SECTION
Columbus PS
16724-4
APPENDIX A
Boring Logs
Columbus PS
Appendix C
APPENDIX I
Boring Location Diagram
APPENDIX II
Soil Boring Logs
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
37-8-7-4
7.36
4-2-2-3
2.25
12.94
4-5-5-9
3.00
15.25
17-10-1010
2.25
19.72
3-5-7-7
1.75
18.48
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 20, 2011

B-1
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Asphalt
Brown Clayey SAND (SC), damp
Stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), damp, FILL
Soft reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY, (CL), damp, FILL
Medium stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), some

gravel, damp, FILL
Very stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), damp, FILL
10
2-2-2-4
0.75
Soft reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), moist, FILL
28.14
15
5-7-8-7
2.75
21.68
20
5-8-7-9
3.00
Stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), moist, FILL
24.86
25
3-3-6-7
1.25
Medium stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), damp,

FILL
22.59
30
4-7-8-8
1.75
Stiff orangish brown mottled reddish brown Sandy Lean

CLAY (CL), damp
19.52
35
6-8-11-14
4.00
26.37
Very stiff brown mottled reddish brown white Sandy Lean

CLAY (CL), damp
Completion Notes:
Site:
Free water observed on 48'-50' split spoon sampler.

Soil boring backfilled with bentonite/cement grout using pressure technique.
* - Sample not tested
# - Non-cohesive soil sample
** - Weathered bedrock sample
Byrd Park Reservoir Preliminary Engineering

Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Project No.: G11285-01
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
3-5-5-7
1.75
21.36
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 20, 2011

B-1
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Loose to medium loose light brown mottled pinkish red

Clayey SAND (SC), moist
45
5-8-8-7
1.50
0-0-5-2
1-1-1-2
20.99
50
Loose brown Clayey SAND (SC), moist
55
Very loose reddish brown mottled white Clayey SAND (SC),

wet
Soft white Lean CLAY (CL), damp
25.18
Very loose light grey mottled pinkish red Poorly Graded Silty
SAND (SM), wet
23.53
60
11-17-1310
4-5-11-5
Dense yellowish brown Gravelly Silty SAND (SC), wet
10.11
65
Medium dense yellowish brown Gravelly Silty SAND (SC),

wet
22.34
70
10-14-169
0-0-8-7
15.31
75
10.92
Medium dense pinkish brown Gravelly Silty SAND (SC), wet
Loose tan Poorly Graded SAND (SP), trace gravel, wet
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
6-6-6-6
8.86
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 20, 2011

B-1
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Tan Poorly Graded SAND (SP), trace gravel, wet

85
14-9-1130
75@5"
Medium dense light tan mottled white Clayey SAND (SC),

moist
22.04
90
Hard mottled white and dark tan micaceous SILT (ML), damp
14.88
95
50@2"
Hard weathered Bedrock - Petersburg Granite
**
100
Boring Terminated @ 100.0'
105
110
115
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
M/C
%
Depth
Feet
B-2
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Asphalt
Light brown Clayey SAND (SC), damp
FILL
11.22
40-7-7-6
Lithology
Oct. 20, 2011
4-3-4-5
2.25
18.13
3-4-5-6
18.37
2-4-6-7
1.25
23.36
Medium stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), moist,

FILL
3-3-6-6
1.50
22.17

FILL

FILL
10
2-3-3-3
0.50

FILL
27.26
15
2.0
3-6-7-9
22.38
20
3-4-5-6

FILL
21.26
25
2-3-4-5
1.25

FILL
23.66
30
4-7-8-11
1.75
28.80
35
7-10-1113
3.50
22.01
Very stiff reddish brown mottled brown Sandy Lean CLAY

(CL), damp
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
6-8-9-11
2.75
22.83
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 20, 2011

B-2
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Very stiff reddish brown to light brown mottled gray Sandy

Lean CLAY (CL), damp
45
3-4-5-6
Loose reddish brown mottled white Clayey SAND (SC), moist
18.14
50
0-1-2-3
Very loose reddish brown mottled white Clayey SAND (SC),

wet
20.52
55
1-1-1-3
23.16
60
Very loose brown Poorly Graded SAND (SP), wet

Very loose brown gravelly SAND, wet
65
70
75
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
37-5-6-5
10.55
6-4-3-4
2.25
20.70
3-4-7-9
3.00
20.53
12-8-1110
2.00
21.44
3-4-5-8
1.75
20.52
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 21, 2011

B-3
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Asphalt
FILL
Medium stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY, trace Gravel
(CL), damp, FILL
FILL
10
5-4-3-7
0.75

FILL
25.39
15
3-3-4-6
0.75

FILL
28.95
20
2-5-4-8
1.50

FILL
23.62
25
2-2-3-4
0.50
27.11
30
4-7-6-8
1.00
Stiff reddish brown mottled light brown Sandy Lean CLAY

(CL), damp. Tan Sandy CLAY lenses present in spoon
8.77
35
4-4-7-10
2.75
23.48
Stiff mottled reddish brown brown to light gray Sandy Lean

CLAY (CL), damp
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
3-4-5-9
2.50
11.10
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 21, 2011

B-3
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Medium stiff gray mottled brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL),

moist
45
W-4-5-4
3-4-4-6
2-2-3-3
Loose brown Clayey SAND (SC), wet
22.50
50
Loose brown mottled gray Clayey SAND (SC), wet
55
Loose gray mottled brown Clayey SAND (SC), wet

Medium stiff gray mottled brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL),
moist
18.72
Very loose light brown Clayey SAND (SC), wet
28.80
60
65
70
75
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
71-11-9-8
1.75
18.66
8-5-6-6
2.00
20.46
3-6-7-8
1.50
18.93
9-7-9-11
2.00
21.54
3-4-4-7
1.75
19.90
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 21, 2011

B-4
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Asphalt
Brown Clayey SAND (SC), damp
Stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY, (CL), damp, FILL
Stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), moist, FILL

FILL
10
3-6-7-9
2.25
17.35
15
3-6-9-10
3.00
22.42
20
5-5-7-8
2.00
23.39
25
3-4-6-7
1.50

FILL
19.90
30
3-6-7-9
1.25
Stiff light orangish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), damp
22.85
35
4-5-6-7
1.50
23.66
Stiff mottled gray reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL),

damp
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
M/C
%
Depth
Feet
B-4
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Stiff light brown mottled gray Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), wet.
Spoon contained interbedded dark brown Silty SAND lenses.
22.61
4-6-5-7
Lithology
Oct. 21, 2011
45
26.84
1-2-2-2
50
3-4-4-4
0.25
Soft reddish brown mottled brown Sandy CLAY (CL), wet

Soft brown mottled gray Sandy CLAY (CL), wet
Medium stiff gray mottled reddish brown Sandy CLAY (CL),

wet
23.01
55
11-28-2425
1.25
Very dense brown mottled gray Clayey SAND some gravel

(SC), wet
6.40
60
16-14-129
8.50
5-9-9-7
23.37
65
Medium dense light brown mottled gray Clayey SAND (SC),

wet
70
1-1-3-5
0.75
40.59
75
2-2-4-9
1.00
46.12
Soft brown mottled light gray CLAY (CL), moist

Soft pinkish red mottled brown to gray CLAY (CL), moist
Medium stiff gray mottled gray Fat CLAY (CH), moist
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
3-9-14-20
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
M/C
%
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 21, 2011

B-4
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Very stiff to hard mottled white grennish brown Micaceous

Sandy SILT (ML), with weathered bedrock fragments, damp
22.59
85
11-19-2436
14.77
50@1"
**
90
Hard weathered Bedrock - Petersburg Granite

95
100
105
110
115
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
73-10-6-8
4.50
17.52
10-8-8-8
2.75
20.31
3-4-7-8
2.00
18.75
9-9-9-11
2.25
17.30
3-5-5-5
2.00
19.15
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 24, 2011

B-5
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Asphalt
Very stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY, trace ash
fragments (CL), damp, FILL
Very stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), moist, FILL
FILL
10
2-3-4-5
2.00
Medium stiff brown reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL),

moist, FILL
21.37
15
2-3-3-2
1.00
Medium stiff brown reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL),

moist, FILL
28.09
20
2-3-3-4
0.50

FILL
29.12
25
1-3-3-5
1.00

FILL
21.55
30
3-4-4-3
1.25
Medium stiff orangish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), moist
22.70
35
6-8-8-11
3.50
26.21
Very stiff gray mottled reddish brown orangish brown Sandy

Lean CLAY (CL), damp
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
5-5-5-6
0.75
22.21
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 24, 2011

B-5
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Medium dense brown mottled reddish brown Clayey SAND

(SC), wet
45
3-4-4-5
Loose orangish brown Clayey SAND (SC), moist
22.55
50
2-2-3-3
Loose gray Clayey SAND (SC), wet
Soft orangish brown Sandy SILT (ML), wet
28.71
55
1-2-2-4
Very loose orangish brown to gray Poorly Graded SAND (SP)
24.29
60
65
70
75
Completion Notes:
Site:


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
24-5-3-5
17.01
7-7-10-12
3.75
19.49
5-8-9-10
3.50
19.90
13-12-1210
1.25
21.12
3-6-7-7
2.00
20.70
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 24, 2011

B-6
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Asphalt
FILL
10
2-2-2-4
0.75
28.32
15
2-4-4-4
1.00
Medium stiff reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), wet,

FILL
24.32
20
1-4-5-6
1.75

FILL
24.01
25
4-4-6-9
3.00

FILL
21.31
30
6-6-7-6
1.50
Stiff orangish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL), moist
20.91
35
9-4-12-14
4.25
23.44
Very stiff gray mottled reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY (CL),
damp
Completion Notes:
Site:
Free water observed on 18'-20' & 48'-50' split spoon sampler.


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
Sample
BORING LOG
Drill Rig:
CME-55
Date Drilled:
Boring Dia:
6 Inches
Boring Number:
Blow
Counts
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
M/C
%
7-8-7-9
24.35
Depth
Feet
Lithology
Oct. 24, 2011

B-6
Logged By:
Chris Cornelissen
Description
Medium dense orangish brown mottled gray Clayey SAND

(SC), moist
45
3-4-6-6
17.88
50
4-3-4-3
25.91
55
11-9-4-20
Medium dense pinkish red mottled gray Clayey SAND (SC),

moist
Medium dense light gray mottled light brown Clayey SAND
(SC), moist
Medium stiff gray mottled brown pinkish red Sandy CLAY

(CL), damp
Medium dense orangish brown to gray Clayey SAND (SC)

with gravel, moist
12.95
60
65
70
75
Completion Notes:
Site:
Free water observed on 18'-20' & 48'-50' split spoon sampler.


Grant Street
Richmond, Virginia
Page
APPENDIX III
Reference Notes for Boring Logs
APPENDIX IV
Laboratory Test Data
Soil Classification Calculations

Byrd Park Reservoir Preliminary Engineering - Richmond, VA
GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-1
Sample Depth 23.0' - 25.0'
Visual Sample Description Reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY, damp
Natural Moisture Content

Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Beta
6.92 grams
111.22 grams
90.56 grams
24.7%
Coarse or Fine Grained

Pan + Soil retained on No. 200 sieve
(dry)
39.63 grams
Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve
60.9%
13.83 grams
(dry)
91.7%
Soil Classifies as Fine-Grained Soil
Atterberg Limits
Liquid Limit
No of Blows
Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Liquid Limit
Liquid Limit
26
5AA
19.28
44.86
38.02
36%
37
37
NA
NA
Plastic Limit
Pan ID
Pan Weight
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Plastic Limit
R-8
38.51
41.49
41.02
19% NA
19
G11285-01, B-1, 38.0'-40.0'

Page 1
11/2/2011
Grain Size Distribution Calculations

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-1
Mechanical Sieve Analysis

Sieve Percent Percent
Sieve
Percent
Size Retained Retained Size, mm Passing
3/4"
0.00
0.0%
19.0
100.0%
1/2"
0.00
0.0%
12.5
100.0%
3/8"
6.91
8.3%
9.5
91.7%
No. 4
0.00
0.0%
4.75
91.7%
No. 10
0.18
0.2%
2.0
91.5%
No. 40
2.87
3.4%
0.425
88.1%
No. 100
17.00
20.3%
0.15
67.8%
No. 200
5.75
6.9%
0.075
60.9%
Pan
0.07
0.1%
Total
32.78
39.1%
Sieve Analysis
Sand
Silt & Clay

100.0%
90.0%
80.0%
70.0%
60.0%
50.0%
40.0%
30.0%
20.0%
10.0%
0.0%
20
D1
6.78
35.45
27.89
1A
100.0
10.0
24.73
23.81
1.0
0.1
Percent Passing
Gravel
0.0
Sieve Size, mm
G11285-01, B-1, 38.0'-40.0'

Page 2

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-2
Visual Sample Description Reddish brown Sandy Lean CLAY, damp

Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
T-1
8.85 grams
129.03 grams
107.59 grams
21.7%

(dry)
54.35 grams
53.9%
8.85 grams
(dry)
100.0%
Atterberg Limits
Liquid Limit
No of Blows
Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Liquid Limit
Liquid Limit
29
1A
19.34
37.70
33.73
28%
28
28
NA
NA
Plastic Limit
Pan ID
Pan Weight
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Plastic Limit
5B
19.42
26.39
25.54
14% NA
14
G11285-01, B-2, 4.0'-6.0'

Page 1

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-3
Visual Sample Description Mottled reddish brown brown to light gray Sandy Lean CLAY, damp

Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
D-1
6.83 grams
143.50 grams
122.40 grams
18.3%

(dry)
29.75 grams
80.2%
6.83 grams
(dry)
100.0%
Atterberg Limits
Liquid Limit
No of Blows
Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Liquid Limit
Liquid Limit
26
3A
19.50
36.33
30.79
49%
49
49
NA
NA
Plastic Limit
Pan ID
Pan Weight
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Plastic Limit
4A
19.46
22.02
21.63
18% NA
18
G11285-01, B-3, 38.0'-40.0'

Page 1
11/2/2011

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-3

Sieve
Percent
3/4"
0.00
0.0%
19.0
100.0%
1/2"
0.00
0.0%
12.5
100.0%
3/8"
0.00
0.0%
9.5
100.0%
No. 4
0.00
0.0%
4.75
100.0%
No. 10
0.09
0.1%
2.0
99.9%
No. 40
1.98
1.7%
0.425
98.2%
No. 100
10.55
9.1%
0.15
89.1%
No. 200
10.30
8.9%
0.075
80.2%
Pan
0.14
0.1%
Total
23.06
19.8%
Sieve Analysis
Sand
Silt & Clay

100.0%
90.0%
80.0%
70.0%
60.0%
50.0%
40.0%
30.0%
20.0%
10.0%
0.0%
20
D1
6.78
35.45
27.89
1A
100.0
10.0
24.73
23.81
1.0
0.1
Percent Passing
Gravel
0.0
Sieve Size, mm
G11285-01, B-3, 38.0'-40.0'

Page 2

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-4
Visual Sample Description Light brown mottled gray Clayey SAND with gravel, moist

Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
S-1
8.79 grams
133.18 grams
110.95 grams
21.8%

(dry)
101.17 grams
9.6%
37.59 grams
(dry)
71.8%
Soil Classifies as Coarse-Grained Soil
Atterberg Limits
Liquid Limit
No of Blows
Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Liquid Limit
Liquid Limit
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Pan ID
Pan Weight
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Plastic Limit
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
NA
NA
Plastic Limit
NA
Insufficent amount of material available to determine
G11285-01, B-4, 68.0'-70.0'

Page 1
11/2/2011

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-4

Sieve
Percent
3/4"
0.00
0.0%
19.0
100.0%
1/2"
16.09
15.7%
12.5
84.3%
3/8"
0.00
0.0%
9.5
84.3%
No. 4
12.71
12.4%
4.75
71.8%
No. 10
6.23
6.1%
2.0
65.7%
No. 40
36.45
35.7%
0.425
30.0%
No. 100
19.87
19.4%
0.15
10.6%
No. 200
1.03
1.0%
0.075
9.6%
Pan
0.08
0.1%
Total
92.46
90.4%
Sieve Analysis
Sand
Silt & Clay

100.0%
90.0%
80.0%
70.0%
60.0%
50.0%
40.0%
30.0%
20.0%
10.0%
0.0%
20
D1
6.78
35.45
27.89
1A
100.0
10.0
24.73
23.81
1.0
0.1
Percent Passing
Gravel
0.0
Sieve Size, mm
G11285-01, B-4, 68.0'-70.0'

Page 2

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-5
Visual Sample Description Orange brown to gray Poorly Graded SAND, wet

Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
E-1
7.04 grams
168.39 grams
133.75 grams
27.3%

(dry)
118.04 grams
12.4%
7.04 grams
(dry)
100.0%
Atterberg Limits
Liquid Limit
No of Blows
Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Liquid Limit
Liquid Limit
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Pan ID
Pan Weight
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Plastic Limit
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
NA
NA
Plastic Limit
NA
Insufficent amount of material available to determine
G11285-01, B-5, 58.0'-60.0'

Page 1
11/2/2011

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-5

Sieve
Percent
3/4"
0.00
0.0%
19.0
100.0%
1/2"
0.00
0.0%
12.5
100.0%
3/8"
0.00
0.0%
9.5
100.0%
No. 4
0.00
0.0%
4.75
100.0%
No. 10
0.02
0.0%
2.0
100.0%
No. 40
56.21
44.4%
0.425
55.6%
No. 100
52.71
41.6%
0.15
14.0%
No. 200
2.06
1.6%
0.075
12.4%
Pan
0.05
0.0%
Total
111.05
87.6%
Sieve Analysis
Sand
Silt & Clay

100.0%
90.0%
80.0%
70.0%
60.0%
50.0%
40.0%
30.0%
20.0%
10.0%
0.0%
20
D1
6.78
35.45
27.89
1A
100.0
10.0
24.73
23.81
1.0
0.1
Percent Passing
Gravel
0.0
Sieve Size, mm
G11285-01, B-5, 58.0'-60.0'

Page 2

GES JN G11285-01
Prepared By: CWC
Sample ID B-6
Visual Sample Description Pinkish red mottled red Clayey SAND, moist

Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
D-1
6.83 grams
143.50 grams
122.40 grams
18.3%

(dry)
89.00 grams
28.9%
10.93 grams
(dry)
96.5%
Atterberg Limits
Liquid Limit
No of Blows
Pan ID
Pan Wt
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Liquid Limit
Liquid Limit
26
3A
19.50
36.33
30.79
49%
49
49
NA
NA
Plastic Limit
Pan ID
Pan Weight
Pan + Soil (wet)
Pan + Soil (dry)
Moisture Content
Plastic Limit
4A
19.46
22.02
21.63
18% NA
18
G11285-01, B-6, 48.0'-50.0'

Page 1
Proctor Test Report
11/2/2011
Geotech-Environmental Solutions - Misc. Testing

DAA # R11195R-01
Prepared By: ADC
Soil and Test Method Data

Sample ID
Sample Depth
Test Method
Sample Preparation
Mold Size, in
Test Data
Sample #1
N/A
ASTM D698, Method B, with mechanical hammer
Air dried and sieved through a 3/8" sieve.
4.0
#1
Moisture Content
Dry Density, pcf
#2
16.1%
99.8
18.4%
104.8
#3
20.2%
103.5
#4
#5
22.8%
99.0
Moisture-Density Curve
Maximum Dry Density, pcf = 104.9, Optimum Moisture, % = 18.7
108.0
106.0
Dry Density, pcf
104.0
102.0
100.0
98.0
96.0
13.0%
15.0%
17.0%
19.0%
21.0%
23.0%
25.0%
Moisture Content, %
Zero Air Voids
Proctor Points
Perm Points
R11195R-01, Sample #1
Page 3

CB J12069-1 SpecBook2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CB J12069-1 SpecBook2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

02500

Laying and Jointing Buried Pipelines ............................................ 02500-1

HVAC Controls .............................................................................. 15900-1

Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes:

Section 05120 - Structural Steel

Codes and standards referred to in this Section are:

Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25,

Power Piping (Includes Revision Service)

Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000

Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and

Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation

Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division

General: System includes supporting devices adequate to maintain the pipelines,

Design Requirements: Design supporting devices in accordance with the best

Interference: Design all supporting devices so as to minimize interference with

Provide a wooden or thermoplastic pad between the plastic pipe and

Use supports for vertical lines of a type which do not exert a

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Acceptable manufacturers are listed below. Other manufacturers of equivalent

Pipe hangers and supports

Sheet metal shield

Grinnell Corporation, Cranston, RI

"Thermal-Hanger Shields" by Pipe Shields Incorporated, Vacaville,

Support overhead hangers using threaded rods properly fastened in place by

Suspended Piping: Support suspended piping by adjustable ring or clevis hangers

Saddle Stands: Use adjustable saddle stands.

Install hanger and supports in accordance with the manufacturer's

Painting: Paint hangers, supports, anchors, and similar devices as specified in

Touch-Up Painting: Clean and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted

Section Includes: Requirements for furnishing and installation of vibration

Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes:

Section 15670 - Condensing Units

Codes and standards referred to in this Section are:

ASTM A 36/A36M - Specification for Structural Steel

General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division

Furnish templates to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations and other

Submit shop drawings indicating locations of units and flexible connections.

Include a schedule of the units, showing size or manufacturers part number,

Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by

Obtain support isolation units from a single manufacturer if available.

Engage the manufacturer to provide technical selection and supervision of

Performance: Comply with the minimum static deflections recommended by the

Acceptable manufacturers are listed below. Other manufacturers of equivalent

Flexible Duct Connectors.

Vent Products Co. Inc.

Flexible Pipe Connectors.

Consolidated Kinetics Corp.

Flow Flex Engr. Co.

Metraflex Co. Inc.

Neoprene Pads: Use oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of the manufacturers standard

Spring Isolators, Free-Standing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration

BASES AND FRAMES

HANGERS AND RISERS

Provide a vibration isolation spring with a cap and pad-type isolators,

Provide a neoprene pad, securely retained in the unit.

Provide a fiberglass pad or shape, securely retained in the unit, with a

Install a removable spacer in each unit, to limit the deflection during

Riser Isolators: Provide the manufacturers standard pad-type isolator bonded to

Riser Support Isolators: Provide the manufacturers standard pad-type isolator

DUCT AND PIPE CONNECTORS

Provide U-type configurations, asbestos free of 2 ply, vulcanized EPDM

General: Apply types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at